VDS Cea 4001en2010

VdS CEA
VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems 4001en
Planning and Installation
VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Publisher and publishing house: VdS Schadenverhütung GmbH
Amsterdamer Str. 172-174

50735 Köln, Germany
Phone: +49 221 77 66 0; Fax: +49 221 77 66 341
Copyright by VdS Schadenverhütung GmbH. All rights reserved.

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04) VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems
VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems
Planning and Installation

Contents
0 Foreword ................................................................................................................. 8
0.1 Application of the VdS CEA Guidelines................................................................ 8
0.2 Classification system for sprinkler systems .......................................................... 8
0.3 Contents of these Guidelines................................................................................ 9
1 General .................................................................................................................. 10
1.1 Scope.................................................................................................................. 10
1.2 Aims .................................................................................................................... 10
1.3 Description .......................................................................................................... 11
1.4 Approvals ............................................................................................................ 12
1.5 Normative references ......................................................................................... 13
2 Definitions ............................................................................................................. 15
3 Contract planning and documentation .............................................................. 24
3.1 General ............................................................................................................... 24
3.2 Initial considerations ........................................................................................... 25
3.3 Preliminary or estimating stage .......................................................................... 25
3.4 Design stage ....................................................................................................... 25
3.5 Commencement of installation works................................................................. 30
4 Extent of sprinkler protection ............................................................................. 30
4.1 Scope of protection and exceptions ................................................................... 30
4.2 Compartmentation and separation ..................................................................... 32
5 Classification of fire hazards .............................................................................. 32
5.1 General ............................................................................................................... 32
5.2 Hazard classes ................................................................................................... 33
5.3 Storage ............................................................................................................... 34
5.4 Protection of false ceiling and false floor spaces................................................ 36
6 Hydraulic design criteria ..................................................................................... 36
6.1 General ............................................................................................................... 36
6.2 High Hazard Storage - HHS ............................................................................... 37
6.3 Pressure and flow requirements for pre-calculated systems.............................. 40
6.4 Pipe sizing and layout......................................................................................... 40
7 Water Supplies - General..................................................................................... 41
7.1 Suitability............................................................................................................. 41
7.2 Connections for other services ........................................................................... 42
7.3 Housing of equipment for water supplies ........................................................... 43
7.4 Test facility devices............................................................................................. 44
7.5 Pressure/flow tests on water supplies ................................................................ 45
7.6 Water supply pressure test ................................................................................. 45
3
VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)
8 Choice of water supply ........................................................................................ 46

8.1 General ............................................................................................................... 46
8.2 Public water mains.............................................................................................. 46
8.3 Water storage tanks............................................................................................ 47
8.4 Natural and artificial sources .............................................................................. 53
8.5 Pressure tanks.................................................................................................... 57
8.6 Type of water supply........................................................................................... 59
8.7 Isolation of water supplies .................................................................................. 61
8.8 Choice of water supply ....................................................................................... 61
9 Pumps.................................................................................................................... 65
9.1 General ............................................................................................................... 65
9.2 Multiple pump arrangements .............................................................................. 66
9.3 Compartments for pump sets ............................................................................. 66
9.4 Maximum temperature of water supply .............................................................. 67
9.5 Valves and accessories ...................................................................................... 67
9.6 Suction conditions............................................................................................... 68
9.7 Performance characteristics ............................................................................... 71
9.8 Electrically driven pump sets .............................................................................. 72
9.9 Diesel engine driven pumps ............................................................................... 77
10 Installation type and size..................................................................................... 83
10.1 Wet pipe installations.......................................................................................... 83
10.2 Dry pipe installations........................................................................................... 85
10.3 Alternate installations.......................................................................................... 86
10.4 Pre-action installations........................................................................................ 86
10.5 Subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions........................................................ 88
10.6 Subsidiary multiple control valve ........................................................................ 88
11 Spacing and location of sprinklers .................................................................... 88
11.1 General ............................................................................................................... 88
11.2 Maximum area per sprinkler ............................................................................... 89
11.3 Minimum distance between sprinklers............................................................... 90
11.4 Location of sprinklers in relation to building, facilities and equipment................ 90
11.5 Intermediate sprinklers in High Hazard occupancies ......................................... 98
11.6 Alternative protection concept for “rack storage and high rack storage”.......... 105
12 Sprinkler design characteristics and uses ...................................................... 112
12.1 General ............................................................................................................. 112
12.2 Sprinkler types and application......................................................................... 112
12.3 Flow from sprinklers.......................................................................................... 114
12.4 Sprinkler temperature ratings ........................................................................... 114
12.5 Sprinkler response sensitivity .......................................................................... 115
12.6 Sprinkler guards................................................................................................ 115
12.7 Sprinkler water shields...................................................................................... 116
12.8 Sprinkler escutcheon plates.............................................................................. 116
12.9 Corrosion protection of sprinklers..................................................................... 117
13 Valves .................................................................................................................. 117
13.1 Alarm valve station ........................................................................................... 117
13.2 Stop Valves....................................................................................................... 117
4
13.3 Ring main valves .............................................................................................. 117

13.4 Drain valves ...................................................................................................... 118
13.5 Test facilities ..................................................................................................... 118
13.6 Flushing connections ........................................................................................ 119
13.7 Pressure gauges............................................................................................... 120
13.8 Relief valve ....................................................................................................... 121
14 Alarms and alarm devices ................................................................................. 121
14.1 Water motor alarms .......................................................................................... 121
14.2 Electrical water flow and water and air pressure switches ............................... 123
14.3 Alarm transmission equipment to permanently manned locations ................... 124
14.4 Monitoring of stop valves .................................................................................. 124
15 Pipework.............................................................................................................. 125
15.1 General ............................................................................................................. 125
15.2 Pipe hangers..................................................................................................... 130
15.3 Pipework in concealed spaces ......................................................................... 134
16 Signs, notices and information......................................................................... 135
16.1 Block plan ......................................................................................................... 135
16.2 Signs and notices ............................................................................................. 135
17 Commissioning and approval inspections...................................................... 137
17.1 Commissioning inspections .............................................................................. 137
17.2 Installation certificate and documents .............................................................. 138
18 Maintenance of operational readiness............................................................. 139
18.1 General ............................................................................................................. 139
18.2 Action following sprinkler operation .................................................................. 141
18.3 Operator’s control programme.......................................................................... 141
18.4 Servicing programme by VdS-approved installer ............................................. 145
19 Monitoring of sprinkler systems....................................................................... 151
19.1 Stop valves ....................................................................................................... 151
19.2 Fill level ............................................................................................................. 151
19.3 Pressure............................................................................................................ 151
19.4 Power supply .................................................................................................... 151
19.5 Lines ................................................................................................................. 152
19.6 Detector lines .................................................................................................... 152
19.7 Sprinkler pump.................................................................................................. 152
19.8 Sprinkler equipment room................................................................................. 152
19.9 Fault warning .................................................................................................... 152
19.10 Power supply of monitoring system.................................................................. 152
19.11 Power supply from electrical network ............................................................... 152
19.12 Power supply from accumulators...................................................................... 153
19.13 Requirements to components of monitoring systems ...................................... 153
5
Annex A Classification of Hazards.............................................................................. 155

Annex B Process for Categorising Stored Materials................................................. 158
B.1 General ............................................................................................................. 158
B.2 Material factor ................................................................................................... 158
B.3 Effect of stored materials configuration ............................................................ 160
B.4 Additional categorising method for polypropylene, polyethylene,
polystyrene and plastics with similar fire behaviour.......................................... 162
Annex C Alphabetic Listing of Stored Products and Categories............................. 164
Annex D Requirements for Multi-Storey Buildings ................................................... 168
D.1 Scope................................................................................................................ 168
D.2 Zoning of installations ....................................................................................... 168
D.3 Requirements for zoned installations ............................................................... 168
D.4 Block Plan ......................................................................................................... 170
Annex E Special Requirements for High Rise Systems............................................ 171
E.1 Scope................................................................................................................ 171
E.2 Design criteria ................................................................................................... 171
E.3 Water supplies .................................................................................................. 172
Annex F Additional Requirements To Increase Life Safety...................................... 174
F.1 Subdivision into zones ...................................................................................... 174
F.2 Wet Pipe Installations ....................................................................................... 174
F.3 Sprinkler type and sensitivity ............................................................................ 174
F.4 Alarm valve station ........................................................................................... 174
F.5 Water Supplies ................................................................................................. 174
F.6 Theatres............................................................................................................ 174
F.7 Additional precautions for maintenance ........................................................... 175
Annex G Methods for sizing pipework........................................................................ 176
G.1 Calculation of pressure losses in pipework ...................................................... 176
G.2 Pre-calculated systems..................................................................................... 180
G.3 Fully calculated systems................................................................................... 180
Annex H Figures with examples (informative) ........................................................... 184
Annex I Approved components ................................................................................... 187
Annex J New technology (Informative)....................................................................... 189
Annex K Protection of Special Hazards...................................................................... 190
K.1 Aerosols ............................................................................................................ 190
K.2 Clothes in multiple garment hanging storage ................................................... 190
K.3 Flammable liquid storage.................................................................................. 192
K.4 Pallets - idle ...................................................................................................... 194
K.5 Spirituous liquors in wooden barrels................................................................. 194
K.6 Non-woven synthetic fabric............................................................................... 195
K.7 Risks with storage of plastics – Storage with containers of unexpanded
polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) and polystyrene (PS) or
stored PP/PE/PS materials and plastics with similar fire behaviour................. 195
K.8 Local protection of chipboard manufacture ...................................................... 200
K.9 Special protection concept for racks with solid shelves and gangways ........... 202
K.10 Cable ducts, vertical cable ducts and cable floors............................................ 205
6
K.11 Recycling plants for plastic packaging material................................................ 207

K.12 Local application for paper machines ............................................................... 209
K.13 Special requirements for the protection of mobile shelving with
ceiling sprinklers only........................................................................................ 209
K. 14 Requirements for the protection of automatic parking systems ....................... 210
Annex L ESFR Sprinkler systems, planning and installation................................... 213
L.1 General ............................................................................................................. 213
L.2 Sprinkler System Design .................................................................................. 217
Annex M Proportioning of film forming foam concentrate in sprinkler systems... 223
M.1 Choice and type of sprinkler system................................................................. 223
M.2 Foam proportioning unit.................................................................................... 224
M.3 Foam concentrate pumps ................................................................................. 225
M.4 Foam concentrate............................................................................................. 225
M.5 Foam concentrate tank ..................................................................................... 226
M.6 Foam concentrate pipes and water-foam concentrate mixture pipes............... 227
M.7 Pressure loss calculation with foam concentrate pipes.................................... 227
M.8 Disposal ............................................................................................................ 229
Annex N Commodity classification methodology utilising calorimeter tests
(informative)................................................................................................................... 229
N.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 229
N.2 Test principles................................................................................................... 229
N.3 Method .............................................................................................................. 230
N.4 Evaluation of test results................................................................................... 230
N.5 Bibliography ...................................................................................................... 230
Annex O List of numbering of tables and figures CEA/VdS CEA (informative) ..... 231
Annex R Requirements for Material and Fire Resistance Classes and
their Classification in accordance with DIN 4102 and DIN EN 13501 ..................... 235
R.1 Principles .......................................................................................................... 236
R.2 Combustibility of materials................................................................................ 236
R.3 Fire resistance of components.......................................................................... 238
Annex S Combustion Heat of Insulating Materials of Cables and Wires
(acc. VdS 2134) .............................................................................................................. 242
S.1 General ..................................................................................................................... 242
S.2 Application ................................................................................................................ 242
S.3 Application of tables.................................................................................................. 242
Annex SL........................................................................................................................ 248
Extinguishing support systems................................................................................... 248
Annex Z Notification of installation for sprinkler systems ....................................... 252
7
0 Foreword
These VdS CEA Guidelines for automatic sprinkler systems – Planning and installation
are based on CEA 4001 (DE), edition September 1995.
The CEA Specifications have been developed by the GEI 4 expert group of the fire
protection section of CEA (Comité Européen des Assurances) in line with the experts of
EUROFEU (European Committee of the Manufacturers of Fire Protection and Safety
Equipment and Fire Fighting Vehicles).
The CEA Member Associations will publish these Guidelines as European guidelines in
the respective countries.
0.1 Application of the VdS CEA Guidelines

These Guidelines supersede the edition VdS CEA 4001 : 2008-11 (03) and shall be
applicable with any systems applied for as from 01.04.2011.
Requirements missing from these Guidelines do not entitle the operator to determine any
provisions without prior agreement with VdS.
The installation of sprinkler systems shall be subject to these Guidelines and to the
applicable legal and official regulations.
Any modifications of edition VdS CEA 4001:2008-11 (03) are marked by a vertical line in
the margin:
Example:
combustible
Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of
the classification in accordance with Annex R.
0.2 Classification system for sprinkler systems

By publishing these Guidelines in Germany, a classification system for the protective
value of sprinkler systems is established. Three classes of availability are distinguished.
Class 1 includes systems with very high availability corresponding to the protective value
of the former VdS Guidelines, Class 2 includes systems with high availability
corresponding to the protective value of the CEA Specifications, and Class 3 includes
systems with limited availability corresponding to the protective value of extinguishing
support systems. The main difference between sprinkler systems of Class 1 and Class 2
is the availability and reliability of the water supply.
In the planning phase of the sprinkler system an analysis should be carried out in
cooperation with the competent bodies to determine the appropriate protection target.
Due to this classification the operator has a choice – within certain limits and depending
on the protection target – between systems of different availability and the appropriate
advantages, such as an assessment and approval by VdS.
The classification of sprinkler systems is specified in Table 0.01:
8
Sprinkler systems Extinguishing

support systems
Class 1 2 3
Application Full protection Full protection Partial protection /
preparation for Class 1 or 2 1)
Maximum surface [m²] unlimited 50,000 2) 5,000 2)
of protected area
Limitation from Limitation of fire Limitation of fire Stage of extension
unprotected area compartment compartment 1 none
Stage of extension
2 ≥ F 30
Stage of extension
3 ≥ F 90
Protective value for very high high limited, graduated according
persons and property to stage of extension 3)
1) If a building regulation requires sprinkler protection, systems of Class 3 generally will not fulfil the life safety
requirements.
2) Systems installed in larger areas have a lower protective value.
3) As extinguishing support systems are designed only for bridging the time between an alarm and the
beginning of fire fighting operations, these systems do not fulfil the requirements that are generally set to
water extinguishing systems (e.g. sprinkler systems).
Table 0.01: Classification of sprinkler systems
0.3 Contents of these Guidelines

Every clause of these Guidelines covers all requirements for sprinkler systems of Classes
1 and 2 and their components as well as all requirements for the buildings, rooms or
equipment to be protected.
The requirements for extinguishing support systems are specified in an Annex and based
on the requirements for sprinkler systems of Classes 1 and 2.
The requirements to be fulfilled by a sprinkler system of Class 1 are highlighted

accordingly. These requirements refer to measures increasing the reliability of sprinkler
systems.
Example:
Additional requirements to be fulfilled by sprinkler systems of Class 1.
In certain cases the CEA Specifications refer to national regulations. Such requirements
apply to sprinkler systems of Classes 1 and 2 and have been added to these Guidelines
accordingly. If alternative requirements of the CEA Specifications are replaced by
national regulations, it will be noted accordingly.
On certain issues the CEA Specifications require amendments in order to ensure a

precise technical realisation. These amendments have been added to these Guidelines
accordingly.
Furthermore, amendments have been added for alternative protection concepts, the
efficiency and reliability of which have been evidenced by fire tests, secure statistical data
resp. system-analytical safety engineering methods.
Any of the added amendments comply with the existing requirements of VdS 2092, the
sprinkler guidelines for planning and installation.
9
1 General
1.1 Scope
These Guidelines specify requirements and give recommendations for the design,
installation and maintenance of fixed sprinkler systems in buildings and industrial plants,
and particular requirements for sprinkler systems which are integral to measures for the
protection of life.
The requirements and recommendations of these Guidelines are also applicable to any
addition, extension, repair, maintenance or other modification to a sprinkler system.
It covers the classification of hazards, provision of water supplies, components to be

used, installation and testing of the system, maintenance, and the extension of existing
systems, and identifies construction details of buildings which are necessary for
satisfactory performance of sprinkler systems complying with these Guidelines.
The requirements concerning water supplies may be applicable as guidance, to be used

with experienced judgement for other fixed, fire fighting systems where no other VdS
Guidelines or CEA Specifications exist.
These Guidelines do not deal with water spray systems.
These Guidelines are intended only for fixed sprinkler systems in buildings and other
premises on land. Although the general principles may well apply to other uses (e.g.
maritime use), for these other uses additional considerations will almost certainly have to
be taken into account.
The requirements are not valid for automatic sprinkler systems on ships, in aircraft, on
vehicles and mobile fire appliances or for below ground systems in the mining industry.
These Guidelines are intended for use by those concerned with selling, designing,
installing, testing, inspecting, approving, operating and maintaining automatic sprinkler
systems, in order that such equipment will function as intended throughout its life.
1.2 Aims
An automatic sprinkler system is designed to detect a fire and extinguish it with water in
its early stages or hold the fire in check so that extinguishment can be completed by other
means.
The sprinkler system is intended to extend throughout the premises with only limited
exceptions.
An evaluation of sprinkler protection shall also be based on further aspects, such as

combustible insulation or controllers in high rack storage without any additional
protection.
In some life safety applications, an authority might specify sprinkler protection only in
certain designated areas, and solely to maintain safe conditions for the evacuation of
persons.
It should not be assumed that the provision of a sprinkler system entirely obviates the
need for other means of fighting fires and it is important to consider the fire precautions in
the premises as a whole.
10
Structural fire resistance, escape routes, fire detection and fire alarm systems, particular
hazards needing other fire protection methods, provision of extinguishing means, safe
working and goods handling methods, management supervision and good housekeeping
all need consideration.
It is essential that sprinkler systems should be properly maintained by VdS-approved

installers to ensure operation when required. This routine is liable to be overlooked or
given insufficient attention by supervisors. It is, however, neglected at peril to the lives of
occupants of the premises and at the risk of crippling financial loss. The importance of
proper maintenance cannot be too highly emphasised.
When sprinkler systems are out of service extra attention shall be paid to other fire
precautions and the appropriate authorities shall be informed of the shutdown.
1.3 Description
A sprinkler system consists of a water supply (or supplies) and one or more sprinkler
installations; each installation consists of a set of installation main control valves and a
pipe array fitted with sprinkler heads. The sprinkler heads are fitted at specified locations
at the roof or ceiling, and where necessary between racks, below shelves, and other
specified places. The main elements of a typical installation are shown in Figure 1.01.
The sprinklers operate at predetermined temperatures to discharge water over the

affected part of the area below. The flow of water through the alarm valve initiates a fire
alarm. The operating temperature is generally selected to suit ambient temperature
conditions.
Only sprinklers in the vicinity of the fire, i.e. those which become sufficiently heated,
operate.
Figure 1.01: Main elements of a sprinkler installation
11
1.4 Approvals
1.4.1 VdS-approved installers and components
Sprinkler systems shall be installed in accordance with these Guidelines by VdS-
approved installers using VdS-approved components and VdS-approved methods for
sizing pipework as specified in Annex G. The approved installer shall be approved for
each type of system installed by him.
If local requirements make sub-contracting necessary such as installation of electrical

supplies or public water mains connections, the approved installer shall inform the sub-
contractor of any special requirements for sprinkler installations to satisfy these
Guidelines.
If the installation of a system involves more than one approved installer, one of them shall
be responsible for the entire installation.
1.4.2 Completion
The approved installer shall send an installation certificate to VdS Schadenverhütung
(VdS), Inspection Services, when the system is finally installed. The responsible expert
will then carry out the approval inspection. The same procedure will apply to existing
systems where alterations have been made.
1.4.3 Periodical inspections

The sprinkler system shall be periodically inspected at least once a year by the
authorities’ expert.
The inspection report shall confirm that the system is in accordance with these
Guidelines, well maintained and in full working order. Any faults and deficiencies shall be
noted in the inspection report and the authorities shall specify the time limits for
rectification.
1.4.4 Responsible person

The operator shall appoint a responsible person and a substitute, who after they have
been given the necessary instructions by the installer, shall ensure that the system
remains in working condition. The name, address and telephone number of the person
responsible for the installation, as well as those of his or her substitute, shall be
prominently displayed in the sprinkler equipment room.
The operator shall ensure that:
− the installation conforms to these Guidelines at all times;

− the installation is in working order at all times;
− the installation is checked, maintained and tested in accordance with the installers'
instructions and these Guidelines;
− the installation is inspected, by contract, at least once a year by one of the authorities'
experts;
− any faults or deficiencies are corrected within the time limits laid down by the
authorities.
12
1.5 Normative references

These Guidelines incorporate dated and undated references to other publications. These
references are cited at the appropriate places in the text, and the publications are listed
hereafter. For dated references, subsequent amendments to or revisions of any of these
publications apply only when incorporated by amendment of these Guidelines. For
undated references the latest edition of the publication referred to applies.
− DIN 1045 Concrete, reinforced and prestressed concrete structures

− DIN 1055 Design loads for buildings/Actions on structures
− DIN 1072 Road and foot bridges; design loads
− DIN 1988 Technical regulations for drinking water installations (TRWI)
− DIN 2460 Steel water pipes
− DIN 2501 Flanges; connecting dimensions
− DIN 2880 Application of cement mortar lining for cast iron pipes, steel pipes and
fittings
− DIN 3384 Hose assemblies of stainless steel for gas; safety requirements, testing,
marking
− DIN 4102 Fire behaviour of building materials and building components
− DIN 6280 Generating sets
− DIN 8061 Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride pipes; general quality requirements
− DIN 8075 Polyethylene (PE) pipes
− DIN V 14011 Terms for fire fighting purposes
− DIN 14462 Water conduit for fire extinguishing – Planning and installation of fire hose
systems and pillar fire hydrant and underground fire systems
− DIN 17455 General purpose welded circular stainless steel tubes; technical delivery
conditions
− DIN 18232 Smoke and heat control systems
− DIN 30675-1 External corrosion protection of buried pipes; corrosion protection
systems for steel pipes
− DIN 30681 Compensators for gas installations - Stainless steel expansion joints with
bellows units - Safety requirements, testing, marking
− DIN 50929 Corrosion of metals; probability of corrosion of metallic materials when
subject to corrosion from the outside
− DIN EN 545 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water
pipelines - Requirements and test methods
− DIN EN 671 Parts 1 to 3 Wall hydrants
− DIN EN 1044 Brazing - Filler metals
− DIN EN 1045 Brazing - Fluxes for brazing - Classification and technical delivery
conditions
− DIN EN 1057 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round copper tubes for water
and gas in sanitary and heating applications
13
− DIN EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints - Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
and accessories - Part 1: Steel flanges, PN designated
− DIN EN 1254 Copper and copper alloys – Plumbing fittings
− DIN EN 10241 Steel threaded pipe fittings
− DIN EN 10242 Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron
− DIN EN 10298 Steel tubes and fittings for onshore and offshore pipelines – Internal
lining with cement mortar
− DIN EN 12449 Copper and copper alloys - Seamless, round tubes for general
purposes
− DIN EN 13501 Fire classification of construction products and building elements
according to their fire behaviour
− DIN EN 1363 Fire resistance tests
− DIN EN 1364 Fire resistance tests for non-load-bearing elements
− DIN EN 1365 Fire resistance tests for load-bearing elements
− DIN EN 1366 Fire resistance tests for installations
− DIN EN 1634 Fire resistance tests for doors and closures
− DIN EN 60332-3 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions – Part
3-21: Test for vertical flame spread of vertically mounted bunched wires or cables –
Category A F/R
− DIN EN ISO 12944-4 Paints and varnishes - Corrosion protection of steel structures
by protective paint systems - Part 4: Types of surface and surface preparation
− DIN ISO 8528-4 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current
generating sets – Part 4: Control and switchgear
− DIN VDE 0108 Power installations and safety power supply in communal facilities
− DIN VDE 0276-603 Power cables - Part 603: Distribution cables of rated voltage
U0/U 0,6/1 kV
− DIN VDE 0276-604 Power cables - Part 604: Power cables of nominal voltages U0/U
0,6/1 kV with special fire performance for use in power stations
− DVGW GW 9 Evaluation of soils regarding their corrosion behaviour on buried pipes
and containers of non-alloy and low-alloyed ferrous materials
− EN 54 Fire detection and fire alarm systems
− EN 287-1 Qualification test of welders – Fusion welding – Part 1: Steels
− EN 10 204 Metallic products – Types of inspection documents
− EN 12 259-1+A1 Fixed firefighting systems – Components for sprinkler and water
spray systems – Part 1: Sprinklers
− FM Global DS 2-0 Installation guidelines for automatic sprinklers
− DIN EN 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid
electrolytes - Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable single cells
− IEC 60947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear
− ISO 3046-1 : 1986 Reciprocating internal combustion engines - Performance – Part
1: Declarations of power, fuel and lubricating oil consumptions
− NT FIRE 049 Combustible products: Commodity classification; Fire test procedure
14
− R 1.1.1 Pressure pipes made of PVC-U with quality mark of “Gütegemeinschaft

Kunststoffrohre e.V.”
− R 14.3.1 Pressure pipes made of PE 80 and PE 100 in general, with quality mark of
“Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffrohre e.V.”
− VDA 4500 KLT (tote box) system
− VdS 2095 Guidelines for automatic fire detection and fire alarm systems; planning
and installation
− VdS 2106 Guidelines for spark detection, spark separation and spark extinguishing
systems; planning and installation
− VdS 2109 Guidelines for water spray extinguishing systems; planning and installation
− VdS 2132 Guidelines for the approval of installers for fire extinguishing systems
− VdS 2212 Log book for water extinguishing systems
− VdS 2234 Fire break walls and complex separation walls; leaflet for arrangement and
design
− VdS 2373 Sprinkler systems - Leaflet for anti-freeze protection
− VdS 2496 Guidelines for the triggering of fire extinguishing systems
2 Definitions
For the purposes of these Guidelines, the following definitions apply.
'A' gauge
A pressure gauge connected to the public water mains, between the supply pipe shut-off
valve and the check valve.
accelerator
A device that reduces the delay in operation of a dry alarm valve, or alternate alarm valve
in dry mode, by early detection of the drop in air or inert gas pressure on sprinkler
operation.
AFFF (aqueous film forming foam)
Aqueous film forming foam concentrate based on fluorine surfactants.
AFFF/AR (alcohol resistant)
Alcohol resistant aqueous and polymeric film forming foam concentrate based on fluorine
surfactants with polysaccharides.
alarm test valve
A valve through which water may be drawn to test the operation of the water motor fire
alarm and/or of any associated electric fire alarm.
alarm valve
A check valve, of the wet, dry or alternate type that also initiates the water motor fire
alarm when the sprinkler installation operates.
15
alarm valve, alternate
An alarm valve suitable for a wet, dry or alternate installation.
alarm valve, dry
An alarm valve suitable for a dry installation; and/or in association with a wet alarm valve
for an alternate installation.
alarm valve, pre-action
An alarm valve suitable for a pre-action installation.
alarm valve station
An assembly comprising an alarm valve, a stop valve and all the associated valves and
accessories for the control of one sprinkler group.
alarm valve, wet
An alarm valve suitable for a wet installation.
area of operation
The maximum area over which it is assumed, for design purposes, that sprinklers will
operate in a fire.
area of operation, hydraulically most favourable
The location in a sprinkler array of an area of operation of specified shape at which the
water flow is the maximum for a specific pressure.
area of operation, hydraulically most unfavourable
The location in a sprinkler array of an area of operation of specified shape at which the
water supply pressure is the maximum needed to give the specified design density.
arm pipe
A pipe less than 0,3 m long, other than the last section of a branch pipe, feeding a single
sprinkler.
authorities
Public authorities, e.g. fire and building control authorities, local water authorities or other
appropriate public authorities, or else fire insurers or VdS Schadenverhütung (VdS),
responsible for approving sprinkler systems, components and procedures.
'B' gauge
A pressure gauge connected to and on the same level as an alarm valve, indicating the
pressure on the upstream side of the valve.
16
balanced pressure proportioning
Proportioning of the foam concentrate with a pressure identical to the water pressure
prevailing at the inlet to the proportioning unit.
booster pump
An automatic pump supplying water to a sprinkler system from a gravity tank or the public
water mains.
branch pipe
A pipe feeding sprinklers either directly or via arm pipes.
'C' gauge
A pressure gauge connected to and on the same level as an alarm valve, indicating the
pressure on the downstream side of the valve.
combustible

composite pipe system
System for the construction of piping, the wall of which consists of several materials in a
permanent non-detachable compound, e.g. plastics and aluminium.
design density
The minimum density of discharge, in mm/min of water, for which a sprinkler installation is
designed, determined from the discharge of a specified group of sprinklers, in litres per
minute, divided by the area covered, in square metres.
design temperature
The design temperature is the temperature of a pipe which shall be used as basis for
calculating the strength and linear extension.
detector sprinkler
A sealed sprinkler mounted on a pressurised pipeline used to control a deluge valve.

Operation of the detector sprinkler causes loss of pressure to open the valve.
distribution pipe
A pipe feeding either a branch pipe directly or a single sprinkler on a non-terminal branch
pipe more than 300 mm long.
distribution pipe spur
A distribution pipe from a main distribution pipe, to a terminal branched pipe array.
17
double tree arrangement
Pipe arrangement with branch pipes on both sides of a distribution pipe.
drop
A vertical distribution pipe feeding a distribution or branch pipe below.
escutcheon plate
A plate covering the gap between the shank or body of a sprinkler projecting through a
suspended ceiling, and the ceiling.
exhauster
A device to exhaust the air or inert gas from a dry or alternate installation to atmosphere
on sprinkler operation to give more rapid operation of the alarm valve.
film forming foam concentrates
Film-forming synthetic foam concentrates consist of combinations of fluorine surfactants

and hydrocarbon tensides as well as further additives. Aqueous film forming foam
concentrates (AFFF) and alcohol resistant film forming foam concentrates (AFFF/AR) can
be distinguished.
Note: They are classified as hazardous to water and shall be handled in accordance with
legal regulations.
fire compartment
A separated volume in accordance with VdS 2234 (fire compartment separation) capable
of maintaining its fire integrity for a minimum specified time.
fire-resistant
Designation for the fire resistance class of components, characteristics of the

classification in accordance with Annex R.
fire-retardant

foam
Steady state of small bubbles of lower density than that of flammable liquids or water.
Foam generated by film forming foam concentrates form a barrier between fire load and
air resp. oxygen. On the surface of most hydrocarbonated fuels these concentrates form
a film that is able to suppress both fuel steams and oxygen intrusion.
fully calculated
A term applied to an installation in which all the pipework is sized by hydraulic calculation
by the approved installer.
18
gridded configuration
A pipe array in which water flows to each sprinkler by more than one route.
hanger
An assembly for suspending pipework from elements of building structure.
HHP
High fire risk, production risks (High Hazard Production)
HHS
High fire risk, storage risks (High Hazard Storage)
highly fire-retardant

highly flammable

high rise system
A sprinkler system in which the highest sprinkler is more than 45 m above the lowest
sprinkler or above the sprinkler pumps, whichever is the lower.
installation, alternate
An installation in which the pipework is selectively charged with either water or air/inert
gas according to ambient temperature conditions.
installation, dry (pipe)
An installation in which the pipework is charged with air or inert gas under pressure.
installation, pre-action
One of two types of dry, or alternate in dry mode, installation in which the alarm valve can
be opened by a fire detection system.
installation, wet (pipe)
An installation in which the pipework is always charged with water.
jockey pump
A small pump used to replenish minor water loss, to avoid starting an automatic sprinkler
or booster pump unnecessarily.
19
LH
Light Hazard.
life safety
A term applied to sprinkler systems forming an integral part of measures required for the
protection of life.
looped configuration
A pipe array in which there is more than one distribution pipe route along which water
may flow to a branch pipe.
main distribution pipe
A pipe feeding a distribution pipe.
maximum flow demand (Qmax)
The volumetric flow at the point of intersection of the pressure/flow demand characteristic
of the most favourable area of operation and the water supply pressure-flow demand
characteristic with the water source under normal conditions.
mechanical pipe joint
A pipe fitting other than threaded tubulars, screwed fittings, spigots and socket and
flanged joint, used to connect pipes and components.
multiple control
A valve, normally held closed by a temperature sensitive element, suitable for use in a
water spray installation or for the operation of a pressure switch.
multi-storey buildings
Buildings comprising two or more storeys, above and/or below ground.
node
A point in pipework at which pressure and flow(s) are calculated; each node is a datum
point for the purpose of hydraulic calculations in the installation.
non-combustible

normal operation
According to these Guidelines, normal operation of a building or system means

uninterrupted operation without interference of the sprinkler system being necessary.
20
of low flammability

OH
Ordinary Hazard.
operating pressure
The pressure prevailing in the sprinkler system.
pipe array
The pipes feeding a group of sprinklers. Pipe arrays may be looped, gridded or branched.
plastic pipe system
System for the construction of piping, the wall of which is made exclusively of plastic
material, except for the transition pieces.
pre-calculated
A term applied to an installation in which the pipes down-stream of the design points have
been previously sized by hydraulic calculation. Tables of diameters are given.
premix
A water-foam concentrate mixture mixed prior to extinguishing operations, constantly

available inside the wet pipe installation or a tank.
press fitting system
System for the construction of piping. The connection between pipe and fitting is by a
form-fit modification using a press tool.
proportioning
Continuous addition of foam concentrate of a specific concentration to the water flow.
riser
A vertical distribution pipe feeding a distribution or branch pipe above.
smoke-proof and self-closing
Doors with smoke protection function in accordance with DIN 18095 and Annex R.
spreading coefficient
Defines the ability of a liquid to spread spontaneously over the surface of another liquid.
21
sprinkler, (automatic)
A nozzle with a thermally sensitive sealing device which opens to discharge water for fire
fighting.
sprinkler, flush ceiling pattern
A pendent sprinkler for fitting partly above but with the temperature sensitive element
below, the lower plane of the ceiling.
sprinkler, concealed
A recessed sprinkler with a cover plate that disengages when heat is applied.
sprinkler, conventional pattern
A sprinkler that gives a spherical pattern of water discharge.
sprinkler, dry pendent pattern
A unit comprising a sprinkler and a dry drop pipe unit with a valve, at the head of the pipe,
held closed by a device maintained in position by the sprinkler head valve.
sprinkler, dry upright pattern
A unit comprising a sprinkler and dry rise pipe unit with a valve, at the base of the pipe,
held closed by a device maintained in position by the sprinkler head valve.
sprinkler, flat spray
A sprinkler with a downward, particularly flat, paraboloid pattern discharge for a certain
protection area. Part of the water may be discharged towards the ceiling.
sprinkler, fusible link
A sprinkler which opens when a component provided for the purpose melts.
sprinkler, glass bulb
A sprinkler which opens when a liquid-filled glass bulb bursts.
sprinkler, horizontal
A sprinkler in which the nozzle directs water horizontally against the deflector.
sprinkler, pendent
A sprinkler in which the nozzle directs water downwards.
sprinkler, recessed
A sprinkler in which all or part of the heat sensing element is above the lower plane of the
ceiling.
22
sprinkler, sidewall pattern
A sprinkler that gives an outward half-paraboloid pattern discharge.
sprinkler, spray pattern
A sprinkler that gives a downward paraboloid pattern discharge.
sprinkler, upright
A sprinkler in which the nozzle directs water upwards.
sprinkler group
A sub-division of an installation fitted with an alarm valve station and the appropriate
pipes and sprinklers.
sprinkler system
The entire means of providing sprinkler protection in the premises comprising one or
more sprinkler installations, the pipework to the installations and the water supplies.
sprinkler yoke (arms)
The part of a sprinkler that retains the heat sensitive element in load bearing contact with
the sprinkler head valve.
staggered (sprinkler) layout
An off-set layout with the sprinklers displaced one-half pitch along the branch pipe
relative to the next range or branches.
standard (sprinkler) layout
A layout with sprinkler on adjacent branch pipes forming a rectangle.
subsidiary alternate (wet and dry pipe) extension
A part of a wet installation that is selectively charged with water or air/inert gas according
to ambient temperature conditions and which is controlled by a subsidiary dry or alternate
alarm valve.
subsidiary dry extension
A part of a wet or alternate installation that is charged permanently with air or inert gas
under pressure.
supply pipe
A pipe connecting a water supply to a trunk main or the alarm valve stations; or a pipe
supplying water to a private reservoir or storage tank.
suspended open cell ceiling
A ceiling of regular open cell construction through which water from sprinklers can be
discharged freely.
23
tree arrangement
A pipe arrangement with branch pipes on only one side of a distribution pipe.
trunk main
A pipe connecting two or more water supply pipes to the alarm valve stations.
unpolluted atmosphere
According to these Guidelines an atmosphere is considered unpolluted if the

concentrations for aggressive or corrosive chemicals are not reached. The manufacturer
shall specify which chemicals have these characteristics in which concentrations.
water flow
Product of area of operation and design density with non-uniformity factor due to
hydraulics (l/min).
water-foam concentrate mixture
A mixture consisting of water and proportions of foam concentrate.
water supply datum point
A point on the installation pipework at which the water supply pressure and flow rate are
specified and measured.
zone
A sub-division of an installation with a specific flow alarm or alarm valve and fitted with a
monitored slide valve.
3 Contract planning and documentation
3.1 General
Installation, extensions, modifications and repairs of sprinkler systems shall be carried out
by VdS-approved installers using VdS-approved components (see Annex I).
Note: Even in the case of modifications and extensions of systems the documentation
should be revised according to the below-mentioned details.
The information specified in 3.3 and 3.4 shall be available to the operator. All drawings
and information documents shall carry the following information:
a) the name of the operator and the owner;

b) the address and location of premises;
c) the occupancy of each building;
d) the name of the installer;
e) the name of the person responsible for checking the design, who shall not also be the
designer;
f) date and number of issue.
24
3.2 Initial considerations

Consideration shall be given to any benefits that might be gained by changes in building
design, work procedures etc., when preparing the outline design.
Although an automatic sprinkler system usually extends throughout a building or plant, it

should not be assumed that this entirely obviates the need for other means of fire
protection and it is important to consider the fire precautions of the premises as a whole.
Account shall be taken of possible interaction between sprinkler systems and other fire
protection measures.
Where a sprinkler system or an extension or alteration to a sprinkler system is being

considered for new or existing buildings and industrial plants the relevant authorities shall
be consulted at an early stage.
3.3 Preliminary or estimating stage

The information provided shall include the following:
a) a general specification of the system; and

b) a block plan of the premises showing:
1) the types of sprinkler groups and the hazard classes and storage categories in the
various buildings;
2) the extent of the system with details of any unprotected areas;
3) the construction and occupancy of the main building and any communicating
and/or neighbouring buildings;
4) a cross-section of the full height of the building(s) showing the height of the highest
sprinkler above a stated datum level;
c) particulars of the water supplies, which in the case of public water mains shall include
pressure flow data, with the date and time of test, and a plan of the test site; and
d) a statement that the installation will comply fully with these Guidelines or giving details of
any deviations from their requirements and the reasons therefor.
3.4 Design stage

3.4.1 General
The information provided shall include a notification of installation (see 3.4.2), complete
working drawings of the sprinkler groups (see 3.4.3) and details of the water supplies
(see 3.4.4).
3.4.2 Notification of installation

The notification of installation shall give the following information:
a) the name of project;

b) all drawing or document reference numbers;
c) all drawing or document issue numbers;
d) all dates of issue of drawings or documents;
e) all drawing or document titles;
25
f) the types of sprinkler groups and the nominal diameter of each alarm valve station;
g) the number or references of each alarm valve station in the system;
h) the number of sprinklers on each alarm valve station;
i) the piping volume in the case of dry or alternate installations;
j) the height of the highest sprinkler on each alarm valve station;
k) a statement that the installation will comply fully with these Guidelines or giving details of
any deviations from their requirements and the reasons therefor;
l) a list of approved components included in the system, each identified by manufacturer's
name and model/reference number.
3.4.3 Installation layout drawings

3.4.3.1 General
The scale shall be not less than 1:200. Layout drawings shall include the following
information:
a) north point indication;

b) fire hazard classes including storage categories and design storage heights;
c) constructional details of floors, ceilings, roofs, exterior walls of sprinklered areas and
walls separating sprinklered and non-sprinklered areas;
d) sectional elevations of each floor of each building showing the distance of sprinklers
from ceilings, structural features, etc. which may affect the sprinkler layout or the water
distribution from the sprinklers;
e) the location and size of concealed roof or ceiling voids, offices and other enclosures
sealed at a level lower than the roof or ceiling proper;
f) indication of trunking, stagings, platforms, machinery, light fittings, heaters, suspended
open cell ceilings etc. which may adversely affect the sprinkler distribution;
g) the sprinkler types and temperature ratings;
h) the type and approximate location of pipe hangers;
i) the location and type of alarm valve stations and location of water motor alarms;
j) the location and details of any water flow, and air or water pressure alarm switches;
k) the location and size of any subsidiary valves, subsidiary stop valves and drain valves;
l) the drainage slope of the pipework;
m) a schedule listing the number of sprinklers for each area of protection;
n) the location of all test valves;
o) the location and details of any alarm panel;
p) the location and details of any fire department supply connections;
q) a key to the symbols used.
Note: Details of other services should not appear on sprinkler drawings except insofar as
they are necessary for the correct installation of the sprinkler system.
3.4.3.2 Pre-calculated pipework
All systems require a full hydraulic calculation. Thus, details on pre-calculated systems
cannot be given.
26
3.4.3.3 Fully calculated pipework
For fully calculated pipework, the following shall be given, with detailed calculations,
either on purposely designed work sheets or as a computer print-out:
a) the program name and version number, if applicable;

b) the date of the worksheet or print-out;
c) the actual internal diameters of all pipes used in the calculation;
d) for each design area of operation:
1) the area identification;
2) the hazard class;
3) the specified design density in millimetres per minute;
4) the assumed maximum area of operation in square metres;
5) the number of sprinklers in the area of operation;
6) the sprinkler nominal orifice size in millimetres;
7) the maximum area covered per sprinkler in square metres;
8) detailed and dimensioned working drawings showing the following:
− the node or pipe reference scheme used to identify pipes, junctions, sprinkler
heads and fittings which need hydraulic consideration;
− the position of the hydraulically most unfavourable area of operation;
− the position of the hydraulically most favourable area of operation;
− the four sprinklers upon which the design density is based;
− the height above datum point of each identified pressure value;
e) for each sprinkler in the area of operation:
1) the sprinkler node or reference number;
2) the K factor;
3) the flow through the sprinkler in litres per minute;
4) the pressure to the sprinkler or sprinkler assembly in bar;
f) for each hydraulically significant pipe:
1) pipe node or other reference;
2) nominal bore in millimetres;
3) the pipe constant for type and condition (see G1.1 according to C value);
4) flow in litres per minute;
5) velocity in metres per second;
6) length in metres;
7) numbers, types and equivalent lengths of fittings;
8) static head change in metres;
9) pressures at inlet and outlet in bar;
10) friction loss in bar;
11) indication of flow direction.
27
3.4.4 Water supply

3.4.4.1 Water supply drawings
The drawings shall show water supplies and pipework therefrom up to the installation
alarm valves. The drawings shall be on an indicated scale of not less than 1:100. A key to
the symbols shall be included. The position and type of stop and check valves and any
pressure reducing valve, water meter, water lock and any connection supplying water for
other services, shall be indicated.
3.4.4.2 Hydraulic calculation
An hydraulic calculation (with relevant flow details) shall show that each trunk main
together with any branch main, from each water supply to a water supply test and drain
valve, alarm valve station and control valve 'C' gauge (i.e. including control valves of
sprinkler groups) is capable of providing the required pressure and flow at the test and
drain valve of the alarm valve.
3.4.4.3 Public water mains
Where a public water mains forms one or both of the supplies or provides infill to a
reduced capacity storage tank, the following details shall be given:
a) the nominal diameter of the mains;

b) whether the mains is double-end fed or dead-end; if dead-end, the location of the
nearest double-end fed mains connected to it;
c) the pressure/flow characteristic of the public water mains determined by a test at a
period of peak demand. At least three test points shall be shown. The graph shall be
corrected for friction losses and static head difference between the test location and
either the control valve 'C' gauge or the suction tank infill valve, as appropriate;
d) the date and time of the public water mains test;
e) the location of the public water mains test point relative to the alarm valve;
f) a pressure/flow characteristic indicating the available pressure at any flow up to the
maximum flow demand;
g) the demand pressure/flow characteristic for each sprinkler group for the hydraulically
most unfavourable (and if required the most favourable) area of operation with pressure
taken as at the alarm valve 'C' pressure gauge.
3.4.4.4 Automatic pump set
Where automatic pump sets form one or more of the water supplies the following details
of each automatic pump set shall be provided:
a) a pump characteristic curve for low water level 'X' (see Figures 8.02 and 8.03), showing
the estimated performance of the pump or pumps under installed conditions at the alarm
valve 'C' gauge;
b) the pump manufacturer's data sheet showing the following:
1) the generated head graph;
2) the power absorption graph;
3) the net positive suction head (NPSH) graph;
4) a statement of the power output of each prime mover;
c) the installer's data sheet showing the performance of the pump set, its pressure/flow
characteristics, at the control valve 'C' gauge for normal water level and for low water
28
level 'X' (see Figures 8.02 and 8.03), and at the pump outlet pressure gauge for normal
water level;
d) the height difference between the alarm valve 'C' gauge and the pump delivery pressure
gauge;
e) the sprinkler group number and the hazard classifications;
f) the available and the specified NPSH at maximum required flow;
g) the minimum depth of water cover in the case of submersible pumps;
h) the demand pressure/flow characteristic for the hydraulically most unfavourable and
most favourable area of operation calculated at the alarm valve 'C' gauge.
3.4.4.5 Pressure tank
The following details shall be provided:
a) the location;
b) the total volume;
c) the volume of stored water;
d) the air pressure;
e) the height of the highest sprinkler above the bottom of the tank;
f) details of the means of replenishment.
3.4.4.6 Water storage tank
a) the location;
b) the total volume;
c) the volume and resulting operating time;
d) inflow for reduced capacity tanks;
e) vertical distance between the pump centre line and the tank low water level 'X';
f) structural details of the tank and roof;
g) anticipated frequency of schedule repairs requiring emptying of the tank.
3.4.5 Electrical installation for electrically driven pumps

a) protection of the cables against mechanical damage;

b) protection of the cables against fire;
c) electrical installations.
29
3.5 Commencement of installation works

Before the commencement of any works for new installations and/or extensions or
modifications of existing installations, the approved installer shall send a written
notification (‘Notification of installation’) to VdS Schadenverhütung (VdS).
A notification shall be submitted for each new installation, independently of its size, and
for all extensions of more than 100 sprinklers as well as for modifications of the main
distribution network or of the sprinkler equipment room of existing installations.
Notifications are also required for all substantial renewals or modifications of the
pipework, e.g. after inspections of old installations (see Requirement Notification of
installation VdS 2132).
Note: Details in accordance with Annex Z shall be provided.
4 Extent of sprinkler protection
4.1 Scope of protection and exceptions

All areas of a building as well as of the communicating buildings shall be sprinkler
protected, except in the cases indicated in Cl. 4.1.1.
Any openings communicating between a sprinklered and an unsprinklered building or

section shall be closed automatically in the event of fire to provide a fire resistance which
is at least equivalent to the required fire resistance of the section to be separated.
4.1.1 Permitted exceptions within a building

On principle, sprinkler protection shall be considered in the following cases, but may be
omitted after due consideration of the fire load in the following cases:
a) washrooms and toilets (but excluding cloakrooms) which are made of non-combustible
materials and which are not used to store combustible materials. The closures of door
openings between protected and unprotected areas are not subject to any requirements
as far as the permitted exceptions of this subclause are concerned;
b) staircases and escape routes with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from
the protected area, containing no combustible material. Door openings between
protected and unprotected areas shall have at least smoke-proof and self-closing or fire-
retardant closures;
c) vertical shafts (e.g. lifts) with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the
protection area, containing no combustible material. Door openings between sprinklered
and unsprinklered areas shall have at least fire-resistant closures;
d) rooms protected by other automatic extinguishing systems, (e.g. gas, powder
extinguishing systems), designed and installed in accordance with VdS Guidelines;
e) ceiling areas above the wet end of paper machines. Any levels underneath and adjacent
areas with cable trays, hydraulic pumps and other technical equipment are not
considered as wet end and shall be included in the technical fire protection. Consultation
with VdS is required;
f) cloakrooms which are made of non-combustible materials, in which clothes are kept in
metal sheet lockers only and which are not used to store combustible materials. The
closures of door openings between protected and unprotected areas are not subject to
any requirements as far as the permitted exceptions of this subclause are concerned;
30
g) rooms with a surface area of up to 20 m², solely containing telecommunication

equipment;
h) rooms with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the protected area, in
which wet process works are carried out, however, only by agreement with VdS
Inspection Services. Door openings between sprinklered and unsprinklered areas shall
have at least fire-resistant closures;
i) technical operating rooms with fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the
protected area (e.g. ventilation control room, heating room, refrigerating machinery
room, lift machinery room, distribution station for water and steam, fuel oil storage room)
with a surface area of up to 150 m². Door openings between protected and unprotected
areas shall have at least fire-retardant closures;
j) 1. cold areas ≤ 20 m²:
The structural separation of cold areas with temperatures below 0°C from the
protected area are not subject to any requirements for fire resistance and
combustibility of the separation materials, as far as the permitted exceptions of this
subclause are concerned, provided that the surface area does not exceed 20 m².
2. cold areas > 20 m² and ≤ 60 m²:
The structural separation of cold areas with temperatures below 0°C and a surface
area above 20 m² but not exceeding 60 m² shall have fire-resistant and non-
combustible separation from the protected area. The door openings between
sprinklered and non-sprinklered areas shall have at least fire-retardant closures;
k) offices and dwellings with a surface area of up to 150 m² with fire-resistant and non-
combustible separation from the protected area; door openings between protected and
unprotected areas shall have at least fire-resistant closures;
l) crawl spaces without any combustible contents, separated from the protected area by
non-combustible materials;
m) ramps, canopies and roofings made of non-combustible building materials at fire break
walls (see VdS 2234), door/gate openings between protected and unprotected areas
shall have at least fire-resistant closures;
n) false ceiling spaces and false floor spaces < 0,8 m (see Cl. 5.4) which are not separated
by non-combustible materials and in which the false ceilings and floors themselves are
made of non-combustible materials; provided that in these areas no materials of high
flammability are available, and the fire load of materials of low flammability (e.g. cables,
insulating material) does not exceed 12,6 MJ/m² (3,5 kWh/m²); in areas of high cable
concentration the fire load per 4 m x 4 m shall not exceed 335 MJ (93,1kWh). It is
important to ensure that the fastening of the false ceiling construction is resistant
enough, and that any penetrations to (vertical) cable ducts are sealed with non-
combustible materials. The same applies to false ceiling spaces such as described
above, however with a false ceiling made of combustible materials, provided that this
ceiling is separated from the intermediate space at least by a highly fire-retardant
separation. If false ceiling and false floor spaces less than 300 mm high do not comply
with the a.m. conditions, they shall be divided into fields of less than 100 m² by means of
fire-retardant components made of non-combustible materials.
Note: The fire load of cables shall be calculated in accordance with Annex S.
o) electrical operating rooms (e.g. low voltage and high voltage cabling, transformer cells,
battery room, backup power generator room, relay room for telephone switchboard) with
a surface area of up to 60 m² and fire-resistant and non-combustible separation from the
protected area. Door openings between protected and unprotected areas shall have at
least fire-retardant closures. The backup power generator of the emergency power
supply of the sprinkler system may be positioned in the electrical operating room.
31
Note: The permitted exceptions from sprinkler protection are subject to the fact that it may
be sensible to sprinkler protect these rooms for risk minimisation purposes. Especially if
these rooms are of prime importance for operating procedures (see e.g. i) and o)),
appropriate protection measures should be taken.
4.1.2 Necessary exceptions from sprinkler protection

Sprinkler protection shall not be provided in the following areas of a building or plant:
a) silos or bins containing substances which expand on contact with water;

b) in the vicinity of industrial furnaces or kilns, salt baths, smelting ladles or similar
equipment if the hazard would be increased by the use of water in extinguishing a fire;
c) areas, rooms or places where the water discharged from a sprinkler might present a
hazard;
d) in the vicinity of tiltable frying pans, deep fryers and similar equipment, if the hazard
would be increased by the use of water in extinguishing a fire.
In these cases, other automatic extinguishing systems (e.g. gas, powder or water spray
systems) shall be considered, designed and installed in accordance with VdS Guidelines.
4.2 Compartmentation and separation

Compartmentation and separation between combustible materials stored in the open air
and in sprinklered buildings shall be at least in accordance with national regulations.
Areas with sprinkler systems or equivalent VdS-approved automatic fire extinguishing

systems shall be separated from other areas by spatial (at least 5 m) or structural
compartmentation (spatial separation and fire break walls and complex separation walls
in accordance with VdS 2234 “Fire break walls and complex separation walls – leaflet for
arrangement and design”). Openings in structural compartmentations shall have closures
in accordance with VdS 2234.
Note: Equivalent in the a.m. sense are water spray systems that fully comply with the
appropriate VdS Guidelines. Inert gas fire extinguishing systems may also be considered
equivalent if they are designed in accordance with the appropriate VdS Guidelines.
If sprinkler systems with areas of different design density are not separated at least by
fire-retardant and non-combustible materials with fire-retardant closures, two sprinkler
rows minimum of higher design density shall extend into the area of lower design density.
This does not apply to platforms, operational equipment and offices, in which the systems
shall be designed according to the fire hazard.
Horizontal separations (ceilings and roofs) are not considered in this context.
5 Classification of fire hazards
5.1 General
The hazard class to which the sprinkler system is to be designed shall be determined
before starting on the design work.
The buildings and areas to be protected by automatic sprinkler systems shall be

classified as Light Hazard (LH), Ordinary Hazard (OH) or High Hazard (HH).
32
This classification depends on the occupancy and the fire load and shall be in
accordance with Annexes A to C.
5.2 Hazard classes

Buildings or areas to be protected which contain one or more of the following
occupancies and fire hazards shall be classified as belonging to one of the following
hazard classes:
5.2.1 Light Hazard (LH)

Hazard class LH covers non-industrial occupancies with low fire loads and combustibility
in which no single area, that is not at least enclosed by fire-retardant materials, is greater
than 126 m².
5.2.2 Ordinary Hazard (OH)

Hazard class OH covers trading and industrial occupancies where combustible materials
with a medium fire load and medium combustibility are processed or manufactured.
Ordinary Hazard OH is sub-divided into 4 groups:
− OH1, Ordinary Hazard Group 1;

− OH4, Ordinary Hazard Group 4.
Materials may be stored in occupancies classified as OH1, 2 and 3 provided that the
following conditions are met:
a) the protection throughout the room shall be designed to at least OH3;

b) the maximum storage heights shown in Table 5.01 shall not be exceeded;
c) blocks of storage including surrounding aisles shall not exceed 216m² or an area
specified by VdS. Blocks of storage shall be separated by aisles all around. The aisles
shall be kept free of storage.
When the process area is classified as OH4, storage areas shall be treated as HHS.
Note: Storage means that in the process area goods are stored in an area of more than
2 m² und/or over a height of more than 1,2 m.
Note: For the storage of materials according to category I or II in OH4 hazards the design
according to HHS may be based on the actual storage height and not the maximum
permitted storage height acc. Table 6.02, provided that the ceiling height does not exceed
12 m.
33
Storage category Maximum storage height Width of aisles

(m) (m)
Free standing or block All other cases
storage (ST1)1)
I 4,0 3,5 2,0
II 3,0 2,6 2,0
III 2,1 1,7 2,0
IV 1,2 1,2 2,0
Note: For storage heights exceeding these values, see Cl. 5.2.4.
1)
Also applicable for storage ST4 – ST6 with blocks of up to 50m²
Table 5.01: Maximum storage heights for OH3
5.2.3 High Hazard, Process (HHP)

Hazard class HHP covers trading and industrial occupancies where the materials
concerned have a high fire load and high combustibility and are capable of developing a
quickly spreading or intense fire.
Hazard class HHP is sub-divided into 4 groups:
− HHP1, High Hazard Process Group 1;

− HHP4, High Hazard Process Group 4.
Note: If goods are stored, the storage heights shall be in accordance with the design
density (see Table 6.02) and the block sizes shall be adhered to.
5.2.4 High Hazard, Storage (HHS)

Hazard class HHS covers the storage of goods where the height of storage exceeds the
limits given in 5.2.2.
Hazard class HHS, is sub-divided into 4 categories:
− HHS1, High Hazard Storage Category I;

− HHS2, High Hazard Storage Category II;
− HHS3, High Hazard Storage Category III;
− HHS4, High Hazard Storage Category IV.
5.3 Storage
5.3.1 General
The overall fire hazard of stored goods is a function of the combustibility of the materials
being stored, including their packaging, and of the storage configuration.
To determine the required design criteria for stored goods the procedure shown in Figure
5.01 shall be followed.
Note: Where large scale fire test data is available, it may be appropriate to use such data
to establish design criteria.
34
Figure 5.01: Flow chart for determining the class required for storage
5.3.2 Storage Methods

Methods of storing goods are classified as follows:
− ST1: free standing or block stacking;

− ST2: post or box pallets in single rows (i.e. with aisles no less than 2,4 m wide);
− ST3: post or box pallets in multiple (including double) rows;
− ST4: palletised rack;
− ST5: solid or slatted shelves 1 m or less wide;
− ST6: solid or slatted shelves over lm and not more than 6 m wide.
Typical examples of storage methods are given in Figure 5.02.
Note: For each storage method, there are specific limitations to storage heights
depending on the type and design of sprinkler systems (see Cl. 6.2).
Figure 5.02: Types of storage methods
35
In order for sprinkler protection to be effective, the limitations and protection requirements
of Table 5.02 shall be met.
Configuration Limitations Protection requirements in addition to

sprinklers at ceiling or roof
ST1 Storage shall be confined to blocks None

not exceeding 150 m2 in plan area2)
ST2 Aisle between rows shall be not None
less than 2,4 m wide
ST3 Storage shall be confined to blocks None
not exceeding 150 m2 in plan area2)
ST4 Aisle separating rows shall be not Intermediate sprinklers are recommended1)
less than 1,2 m wide.
Aisle separating rows shall be less Intermediate sprinklers are required
than 1,2 m wide.
1)
ST5 Either the aisle separating rows Intermediate sprinklers are recommended
shall be not less than 1,2 m wide or
storage blocks shall be not more
2 2)
than 150 m in plan area
ST6 Either the aisle separating rows Intermediate sprinklers are required or, if
shall be not less than 1,2 m wide or this is impossible, continuous non-
storage blocks shall be not more combustible full height vertical bulkheads
2 2)
than 150 m in plan area fitted longitudinally and transversally within
each shelf.
1)
When the ceiling clearance is greater than 4 m, in-rack sprinklers shall be used.
2)
Storage blocks shall be separated by aisles not less than 2,4 m wide.
Table 5.02: Limitations and protection requirements for different storage methods
5.4 Protection of false ceiling and false floor spaces

If the height of the false ceiling or false floor space exceeds 0,8 m, measured between
the underside of the roof and the top of the suspended ceiling or between the floor and
the underside of the raised floor, these spaces shall be sprinkler protected.
If the height of the concealed space at roof and floor is between 0,3 and 0,8 m, the
spaces shall be sprinkler protected only if they contain combustible materials (see 4.1.1n)
or are constructed with combustible materials.
If the height of the concealed space at roof and floor is not greater than 0,3 m, no
sprinkler protection is required. Electrical cables with low load for lighting and wall
sockets are permitted (see 4.1.1).
The protection in the concealed space shall be to LH when the main hazard class is LH,
and OH1 in all other cases. See 15.3 for the pipework arrangement.
6 Hydraulic design criteria
6.1 General
The design density shall be not less than the appropriate value given in this clause when
all the ceiling or roof sprinklers or all the sprinklers in the area of operation, whichever is
the fewer, plus any in-rack sprinklers and supplementary sprinklers, are in operation. The
minimum requirements for design density and area of operation for LH, OH and HHP
classes are given in Table 6.01. For HHS systems, 6.2 shall be applied.
36
Areas of different densities in open communication shall be separated by a zone of at

least 2 sprinkler rows wide of the higher density extending into the designed area of lower
density.
If racks with sprinklers at intermediate levels are located in the overlap area, the
increased design density shall be considered when dimensioning the ceiling pipework,
but not when designing the water supply.
All systems shall be fully calculated. Thus, no details regarding pre-calculated systems
are given.
Hazard class Design density Wet or pre-action Dry or alternate

(minimum)
mm/min Area of operation in m²

LH 2,25 84 not allowed - use OH1
OH1 5,0 72 90
OH2 5,0 144 180
OH3 5,0 216 270
OH4 5,0 360 not allowed - use HHP1
HHP1 7,5 260 325
HHP2 10,0 260 325
HHP3 12,5 260 325
HHP4 Special consideration required
Table 6.01: Design density and area of operation for hazard classes LH, OH and HHP
6.2 High Hazard Storage - HHS

6.2.1 General
The type of protection and determination of the design density and area of operation are
dependent on the combustibility of the product (or mix of products) and its packaging
(including the pallet) and the method and height of storage.
Specific limitations apply to the various types of storage methods as detailed in Clause 5.
6.2.2 Ceiling or roof protection only

Table 6.02 specifies the appropriate design density and area of operation according to
the category and maximum permitted storage height for the various types of storages
with roof or ceiling protection only. More specifically, the storage heights indicated in the
table are considered the maximum for efficient sprinkler protection where sprinklers are
only provided at the roof or ceiling. The distance between the maximum permitted
storage height and the roof or ceiling sprinklers should not exceed 4 m.
Storage heights exceeding these limits require that intermediate levels of in-rack
sprinklers be provided as per 6.2.3 below.
Note: Storage height, building height and ceiling clearance (the vertical distance between
the roof or ceiling sprinklers and the top of the storage) are all significant variables
contributing to the effectiveness and required design density of sprinkler protection.
If in the case of an exceeded maximum storage height the distance between maximum
permitted storage height and ceiling is > 4 m, this may be compensated by a design
37
density increased by 2,5 mm/min. From a distance of 5 m an increase by 1mm/min per

each further metre or part thereof is sufficient. The area of operation remains unchanged.
Storage Category I Category II Category III Category IV Minimum Area of operation

methods (HHS1) (HHS2) (HHS3) (HHS4) design (wet or pre-action
density system) 2)
Maximum permitted storage height1)
m mm/min m2
ST1 5,3 4,1 2,9 1,6 7,5
free standing 6,5 5,0 3,5 2,0 10,0 260
or block 7,6 5,9 4,1 2,3 12,5
stacking - 6,7 4,7 2,7 15,0
- 7,5 5,2 3,0 17,5
- - 5,7 3,3 20,0
- - 6,3 3,6 22,5 300
- - 6,7 3,8 25,0
- - 7,2 4,1 27,5
- - - 4,4 30,0
ST2 4,7 3,4 2,2 1,6 7,5
post pallets in 5,7 4,2 2,6 2,0 10,0 260
single rows 6,8 5,0 3,2 2,3 12,5
and ST4 - 5,6 3,7 2,7 15,0
palletised - 6,0 4,1 3,0 17,5
racks
- - 4,4 3,3 20,0
- - 4,7 3,6 22,5 300
- - 5,3 3,8 25,0
5,7 4,1 27,5
6,0 4,4 30,0
ST3 post or 4,7 3,4 2,2 1,6 7,5
box pallets in 5,7 4,2 2,6 2,0 10,0 260
multiple rows
- 5,0 3,2 2,3 12,5
and
- - - 2,7 15,0
ST5/ST6
solid or - - - 3,0 17,5
slatted
shelves
1) The vertical distance from the floor to the sprinkler deflectors, minus 1m or the highest value shown in the table,
whichever is the lower. The design shall be in accordance with the theoretical storage height, not the actual one.
Instead of the theoretical storage height the actual storage height may be taken as basis for designing the system. For
this purpose technical or organisational measures shall be taken to ensure that the storage height is adequate and the
distance between maximum permitted storage height and roof or ceiling does not exceed 4 m.
2) Dry and alternate systems should be avoided on High Hazard storages especially with the more combustible products
(the higher categories) and the higher storages. Should it nonetheless be necessary to install a dry or alternate system,
the area of operation shall be increased by 25%.
Note: An interpolation of the values is possible.
Table 6.02: Design criteria with roof or ceiling protection only
38
ceiling/roof
storage height
storage height
storage height
floor floor floor
Design density Design density Design density

acc. Tables 6.02 resp. 6.03 plus 2,5mm/min plus 2,5 + n x 1mm/min
Example: Distance 3,9m Example: Distance 4,9m Example: Distance 7,9m
Design density = 7,5mm/min D. d. = 7,5 + 2,5 = 10mm/min D. d. = 7,5 + 2,5 + 3 x 1 =
13mm/min
Figure 6.01: Increase of design density with high ceilings or roofs
6.2.3 Intermediate level in-rack sprinklers

6.2.3.1 Where more than 50 intermediate level sprinklers are installed in the racks, roof
or ceiling sprinklers shall be installed with a separate set of alarm valves.
6.2.3.2 The design density for the roof or ceiling sprinklers shall be a minimum of
7,5 mm/min over an area of operation of 260 m². If goods are stored above the highest
level of intermediate protection, the design criteria for the roof or ceiling sprinklers shall be
taken from Table 6.03. If the rack protection is designed in accordance with Cl. 11.6, then
Cl. 6.2.3.2 will not apply.
6.2.3.3 It shall be assumed that 3 adjoining heads are operating simultaneously on each
level of in-rack sprinklers, up to a maximum of three levels, at the most hydraulically
remote position.
Where rack aisles are no less than 2,4 m in width only one rack need be assumed to be
involved. Where rack aisles are less than 2,4 m but no less than 1,2 m in width, two racks
shall be assumed to be involved. Where rack aisles are less than 1,2 m in width, three
racks shall be assumed to be involved.
If the rack protection is designed in accordance with Cl. 11.6, Cl. 6.2.3.3 will not apply.
Details for the hydraulic design of the system are specified in Cl. 11.6.
Note: In racks with more than one sprinkler row per level a maximum of three adjoining
sprinkler rows with three sprinklers each shall be considered.
39
Storage Category Category Category Category Minimum Area of

methods I II III IV design operation (wet
(HHS1) (HHS2) (HHS3) (HHS4) density or pre-action
system) 2)
Maximum permitted storage height above topmost level
1)
of rack sprinklers
m mm/min m²
ST4 3,5 3,5 2,2 1,6 7,5 260
Pallet rack - - 2,6 2,0 10,0 260
storage
- - 3,2 2,3 12,5 260
- - 3,5 2,7 15,0 260
ST5 and ST6 4,7 3,4 2,2 1,6 7,5 260
solid or 5,7 4,2 2,6 2,0 10,0 260
slatted - 5,0 3,2 2,3 12,5 260
shelves - - - 2,7 15,0 260
- - - 3,0 17,5 260
1) Vertical distance between the topmost rack sprinkler level and the roof or ceiling sprinklers minus 1m.
Instead of the theoretical storage height the effective storage height may be used. This implies compliance with the
required storage height and with the permitted distance between permitted storage height and roof or ceiling
(≤ 4 m).
2) Dry or alternate systems should not be used with high hazard storage, especially with combustible products of
higher categories and greater storage heights. Where dry or alternate systems have to be installed nonetheless,
the area of operation shall be increased by 25%.
Table 6.03: Design criteria for ceiling sprinklers with in-rack protection
6.3 Pressure and flow requirements for pre-calculated systems

cannot be given.
6.4 Pipe sizing and layout

6.4.1 Pipe sizing
Pipe sizes shall be determined in accordance with Annex G.
− All pipe sizes shall be determined by hydraulic calculation using the method shown in
G.1 and G.3;
− All systems require a full hydraulic calculation. Thus, details on pre-calculated
systems cannot be given.
6.4.2 Maximum system pressure

Sprinkler systems shall be designed in such a way as to ensure that sprinkler heads are
never subjected to a pressure in excess of 12 bar except during pressure testing of the
pipework, see Cl. 17.
Note: The components shall be selected such that they are appropriate for the maximum
system pressure.
40
7 Water Supplies - General
7.1 Suitability
7.1.1 Time of operation
Water supplies shall be capable of furnishing automatically at least the requisite
pressure/flow conditions of the system. Except as specified in the case of pressure tanks,
each water supply shall have a minimum water volume for the following minimum
durations:
− LH 30 min
− OH 60 min
− HHP 90 min
− HHS 90 min
Deviating from this, the operating times of 11.6 and Annex K apply to systems installed in
accordance with these specifications in consideration of the respective requirements.
Note 1: In the case of public water mains and inexhaustible sources the duration is
implicit in the requirements given in these Guidelines.
A water supply shall not be affected by possible frost conditions or drought or flooding or
any other conditions that could reduce the flow or effective capacity or render the supply
inoperative.
All practical steps shall be taken to ensure the continuity and reliability of water supplies.
Note 2: Water supplies should preferably be under the control of the operator, or else the
reliability and right of use should be guaranteed by the organisation having control.
The water shall be free from fibrous or other matter in suspension liable to cause
accumulations in the system piping. Salt or brackish water shall not be retained in
sprinkler installation pipework.
Note 3: Where there is no suitable fresh water source available, a salt or brackish water
supply may be used provided the installation is normally charged with fresh water.
The water supply shall have the following minimum operating times:
− OH 40 min
− HHP 60 min
− HHS1 60 min
Moreover, it is possible to reduce the operating time for specific risks which fulfil the
requirements specified in Cl. 11.6 and Annex K.
The sprinkler system shall have fire department supply connections. The supply pipe
shall be DN 100 with a minimum of two ‘B’ hose connections and one self-closing drain
valve. To avoid an extraction of water from the sprinkler system, the supply pipe shall
be fitted with a non-return valve. For maintenance of the non-return valve a shut-off
device shall also be fitted. In the case of a direct connection to the public water mains,
an authorisation by the water supply company is required.
41
7.1.2 Frost protection

The alarm valve station and the feed pipe shall be maintained at a minimum temperature
of 4°C.
7.2 Connections for other services

7.2.1 Connection of wall hydrants
In high rise buildings the connection of wall hydrants to sprinkler systems is not permitted.
Wall hydrants may be connected to the water supply of the sprinkler system, provided
that all of the following conditions are met:
a) the planning principles of DIN 14462 “Water conduit for fire extinguishing – Planning and
installation of fire hose systems and pillar fire hydrant and underground fire systems” are
met;
b) a hydraulic calculation of the additional water demand of the wall hydrants has been
done;
Unless specified otherwise by the authorities or in the fire protection concept, the
following flow rates shall be considered hydraulically for wall hydrants at the
connection point of the pipework:
– 200 l/min per wall hydrant type F with one ‘C’ connection each, but not more than
600 l/min; or
– 100 l/min per wall hydrant type S with one hose connection valve G 1A each in
accordance with DIN 14461-3 and rigid hose, but not more than 300 l/min;
c) the operating time of wall hydrants shall be independent of the operating time of the
sprinkler system in accordance with DIN 14462. The water quantity shall be available
in addition to the water supply of the sprinkler system.
The extinguishing water quantity to be available for the hydrant system can be agreed
with the competent fire protection authorities or with the issuer of the fire protection
concept, as regards the simultaneousness of both systems;
d) upon commissioning of the wall hydrant system it shall be ensured that automatic alarms
and fault warnings are released via a fire detection system. The type of signal is
specified by the operator of the system;
e) the water for the wall hydrant pipework is preferably taken upstream of the alarm valve
stations through a stop valve located as close as is practical to the point of connection to
the water supply of the sprinkler system.
If wall hydrants are to be connected downstream of the alarm valve stations, this is
permitted only provided that:
– the competent fire protection authorities, the insurer and the operator of the system
agree in writing; and
– the water is preferably taken from the inexhaustible water source.
The water may be taken from the exhaustible water source, provided that:
– only interior hydrants type S are connected with one hose connection valve G1A
each in accordance with DIN 14461-3, rigid hose and a maximum flow demand of
100 l/min; and
– the exhaustible water source is refilled automatically;
42
– the refill for elevated tanks and pressure tanks (tank filling pump) is designed
such that the extraction by a consumer is ensured at all times as regards
pressure and flow.
7.2.2 Connection of pillar and ground hydrants
In high rise buildings the connection of pillar or ground hydrants to sprinkler systems is
not permitted.
Water for pillar or ground hydrants may be taken from the sprinkler system, provided that
all of the following conditions are met:
a) the water shall not be taken from the exhaustible water source;
b) extraction is upstream of the alarm valve station through a stop valve located as
close as is practical to the point of connection to the water supply of the sprinkler
system;
c) c1 – a combined water supply in accordance with 8.6.4 is provided;
c2 – Class 1: at least a water supply type 3 is provided with two or more pumps
with independent power supplies (the requirements in accordance with 8.6.4 a
to d shall be met).
Pillar or ground hydrants shall be considered hydraulically at the connection point of the
pipework with the following flow rates:
– where available, in accordance with the requirements of the authorities; or
– with 1200 l/min per pillar or ground hydrant with two ‘B’ connections each, but not
more than 3600 l/min; or
– with 200 l/min per pillar or ground hydrant with one ‘C’ connection each, but not more
than 600 l/min.
Pillar or ground hydrants connected on the premises of the operator to the supply line of
the sprinkler system shall also be considered as specified above.
Unless specified otherwise by the authorities or in the fire protection concept, the
operating time of the pillar or ground hydrants shall be 120 min.
The water quantity required for the pillar or ground hydrants shall be available in addition
to the water supply of the sprinkler system.
7.3 Housing of equipment for water supplies

Water supply equipment, such as pumps, pressure tanks and gravity tanks, shall not be
housed in buildings or sections of premises in which there are hazardous processes or
explosion hazards.
If sprinkler pumps, alarm valves, compressors or pressure tanks are housed in rooms
other than the pump rooms, they shall be protected from unauthorised access,
mechanical damage and fire risk. In the case of fire, safe access shall be ensured.
Note: In production risks with alarm valves located outside the sprinkler equipment room,
appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent unauthorised access (e.g. wire frame).
Alarm valve stations outside the sprinkler equipment room shall always be located at a
building wall, not more than 10 m from the nearest emergency exit. Access and operation
shall be possible even in the case of fire. This regulation is applicable for higher risks
(e.g. warehouses), only if the main valve can be operated from the outside (through the
building wall).
43
If the storage height exceeds 7,5 m in category HHS1 to HHS3, and 4,4 m in HHS4, the
alarm valve stations shall also be installed with fire-retardant separation minimum.
7.4 Test facility devices

Sprinkler installations shall be permanently provided with suitable devices for measuring
pressure and flow for checking compliance with Clauses 6 and 9.
Note: It is sufficient to have a flow measuring device at hand. For protecting the flow
measuring device it may be appropriate not to have it permanently installed into the
system.
The test pipe of water pipework and gravity tanks shall be dimensioned for the water rate,
and in the case of sprinkler pumps it shall be dimensioned for the 1,2-fold water rate. The
maximum flow velocity shall not exceed 12 m/s. In the measuring section including
calming sections the velocity shall not exceed 6 m/s. To restrict the volumetric flow, no
shut-off valves shall be used. Downstream of the measuring section the water flow shall
be regulated by a shut-off valve. A manometer shall be fitted upstream of the test pipe
outlet inside the feed pipe. Manometer and flow measuring device shall be readable from
the same spot. Upstream of the measuring equipment a straight calming section shall be
fitted, the length of which is at least 10 times the pipe diameter, followed by a section
which is at least 5 times the pipe diameter. The pipe diameter of the calming section shall
correspond to the nominal width of the measuring equipment.
7.4.1 Measuring equipment at alarm valve stations

A flow measuring device shall be installed at each alarm valve station except in the
following cases:
a) where two or more alarm valve stations are installed together, the device need be
installed only at the hydraulically most remote station, or, when the installations belong
to different hazard classes, at the alarm valve station which requires the highest water
flow;
b) where the water supply is by an automatic pump or pumps, the flow measuring device
may be installed at the pumphouse.
In all cases, the appropriate allowance must be made for the pressure losses between
the water source and the alarm valve station(s) using the calculation methods specified in
G.1.
Adequate facilities shall be provided for the disposal of test water.
Note 1: Dry or alternate alarm valve stations (main or subsidiary) may have an additional
flow test valve arrangement of unspecified flow loss characteristic fitted below the alarm
valve station, downstream of the main stop valve, to facilitate informal supply pressure
testing. Such flow test valves and pipework should have a nominal diameter of DN 40 for
LH installations and of DN 50 for other installations.
Note 2: Regarding flow measurement in pump systems see Clause 7.1 .
7.4.2 Measuring equipment at water supplies

At least one suitable flow and pressure measuring arrangement shall be permanently
installed and shall be capable of checking each water supply.
Note: If the flow measuring device is in danger of being polluted, the measuring device
can be removed, but shall be available on site at all times.
44
The testing apparatus shall be of adequate capacity and shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions. Care shall be taken with the distance from valves
and fittings. The apparatus shall be installed in a frost-proof area.
7.5 Pressure/flow tests on water supplies
The water supply shall be testable at least at Qmax/n of the system, with Qmax being the
maximum flow demand and n the number of pumps operating in parallel.
In any case it shall be possible to test the nominal delivery rate of the pumps (100%).
A test pipe can be used for testing several pumps, provided that the pumps do not
influence each other when connected to one test pipe. For this purpose, slide valves or
check valves shall be fitted for each pump. The emergency circulation flow shall be
granted.
7.6 Water supply pressure test

7.6.1 General
Use the test facility specified in Clause 7.4.
Test each supply to the installation independently with all other supplies isolated.
7.6.2 Storage pump and pressure tank supplies

The hydraulics of all installations shall be fully calculated.
Fully open the stop valves controlling the flow from the supply to the installation. Open
the installation drain and test valve and check that the pump(s), if fitted, start
automatically. Check that the flow is as specified in Clause 6 and as recorded during the
commissioning test. Record the supply pressure measured on the ‘C’ gauge. Compare
this with the appropriate value specified in Clause 6 and the value recorded during the
commissioning test.
Alternatively the measurement may be in accordance with Clause 7.4.
7.6.3 Public water mains, booster pump, elevated private reservoir and
gravity tank
Fully open the stop valves controlling the flow from the supply to the installation. Open
the installation drain and test valve and check that the pump(s), if installed, start
automatically. Manipulate the drain and test valve to give the appropriate flow specified in
Clause 6. When the flow is steady record the supply pressure measured on the ‘C’
gauge. Compare this with the appropriate value specified in Clause 6 and the value
recorded during the commissioning test.
Note: Measuring and test equipment acc. Clause 7.4 is sufficient.
45
8 Choice of water supply
8.1 General
Water supplies shall be one or more of the following:
a) public water mains (see 8.2);

b) water storage tanks (see 8.3);
c) inexhaustible sources (see 8.4);
d) pressure tanks (see 8.5).
8.2 Public water mains

8.2.1 General
The public water mains shall be capable of satisfying the requirements for pressure, flow
and duration.
Note: It may be necessary to take into account extra flow required for fire brigade
purposes.
Sprinkler systems shall not be supplied immediately from the public drinking water mains,
unless this is the only water source available. If the sprinkler system has further water
sources, e.g. pressure tank or pump system with tank, the sprinkler system shall be
connected indirectly.
unless no other type of fire extinguishing system, e.g. wall hydrant system, is connected
to the water supply.
unless no additives, e.g. foaming agents or anti-freezing agents are proportioned.
In case of an immediate connection to the public water mains, the local water authority
shall agree. A VdS-approved safety component with a DVGW quality mark (German
Technical and Scientific Association for Gas and Water) shall be used.
Consideration shall be given to fitting strainers on all connections from public water
mains.
In the case of single water supplies, consideration shall be given to the installation of a
pressure switch on the supply connection which shall operate an alarm system when the
pressure in the supply drops to a predetermined value. The switch shall be positioned on
the supply side of any back pressure valve and shall be equipped with a test valve.
If a filter is fitted in the supply of the public water mains downstream of the water meter,
there is a risk of not providing the required water rate in the case of contaminations.
Therefore, the outlet for the sprinkler system shall be located upstream of the filter.
Note: A possible impairment of the installation’s functionality caused by a filter may be

prevented by means of a bypass, an outlet to the sprinkler system upstream of the filter,
or full storage.
46
8.3 Water storage tanks

8.3.1 General
Water storage tanks, where used, shall be one or more of the following:
− water storage tank;

− gravity tank;
− reservoir.
Tanks shall be fitted with a fill level or water level indicator that is easily readable. The
target water level shall be marked. This is not necessary with open, easily accessible
tanks, the water level of which can be determined by visual inspection. Each tank shall be
fitted with an overflow in accordance with DIN 1988. The accumulating water quantity
shall be safely discharged.
To ensure the system’s functionality during inspection and maintenance works, the
draining connection of the tank shall be dimensioned such that short interruption periods
are possible. Not less than 15 m³/h of water shall be drainable, or else it shall be possible
to lower the water level to not less than 50 cm below the relieved float valves or
appropriate feed valves. The draining connection shall be fitted with a secured shut-off
valve. If the tank is to be drained by means of the sprinkler pump, the non-return valve in
the fire department supply pipe of DN 50 maximum nominal width, fitted with a shut-off
valve secured by strap and lock, may be bypassed.
8.3.2 Minimum water volume

For each system a minimum water volume is specified. This shall be supplied from one or
several of the following:
− a water storage tank, with an effective capacity at least equal to the specified water
volume;
− a reduced capacity tank (see Cl. 8.3.4), where the required minimum water volume is
supplied jointly by the effective capacity of the tank plus the automatic infill.
The effective capacity of a tank shall be calculated by taking the difference between the
normal water level and the lowest effective water level. If the tank is not frost proof, the
normal water level shall be increased by 1,0 m and ice venting provided. In the case of
enclosed tanks, easy access shall be provided.
Tanks fitted with a ceiling shall have an access opening with an inner width of 600 mm
minimum. No contaminations due to rain, dust, etc. shall be able to enter the tank via the
access openings. Access openings of underground tanks located on green spaces and
impassable areas shall rise at least 250 mm above the ground line. Fixed appliances for
inspecting the tank, such as ladders, shall be fitted. Tanks located in buildings shall have
a distance of at least 400 mm between tank wall and room walls, and at least 500 mm to
the room ceiling.
For sprinkler systems class 1 only frost-proof tanks are permitted. The extinguishing
water shall be kept ice-free at all times. In the case of underground tanks a cover
including tank ceiling of 80 cm is sufficient. If in special cases a heating is required, the
details shall be agreed with the competent authorities. The use of anti-freezing agents
is not permitted.
47
8.3.2.1 Pre-calculated systems
The hydraulics of all systems shall be fully calculated. Specifications on pre-calculated

systems do not apply.
8.3.2.2 Calculated systems
The minimum water volume shall be calculated by multiplying the maximum demand flow
by the following operating times:
− LH 30 min
− OH 60 min
− HH 90 min
The minimum water volumes for sprinkler systems class 1 shall be calculated by
multiplying the maximum demand flow by the following operating times:
− OH 40 min
− HHP 60 min
− HHS1 60 min
and in the case of specific risks the specifications of Clause 11.6 and Annex K shall be
fulfilled.
8.3.3 Refill rates for water storage tanks

The water source shall be capable of refilling the tank in no more than 36 hours.
The outlet of any feed pipe shall be situated at least 2,0 m away from the pump inlet,
measured horizontally.
Note: See Clause 8.3.4 for the arrangement of water supply and pump test pipe.
8.3.4 Reduced capacity tanks

The following conditions shall be met for reduced capacity tanks:
a) the inflow shall be from a public water mains and shall be automatic, via at least two
mechanical float valves;
b) the effective capacity of the tank shall be no less than that shown in Tables 8.01;
c) the tank capacity plus the inflow shall be sufficient to supply the system at full capacity
as specified in 8.3.2;
d) it shall be possible to check capacity of the inflow;
e) the inflow arrangement shall be accessible for inspection.
f) the functioning of the feed valves shall only depend on the water pressure in the supply
pipe, but not on any other power source.
The supply pipe and the pump test pipe shall be arranged such that the inflowing water
does not drive any air towards the suction pipe connection, and that the floaters of the
float valves are positioned in a calming section. This may be achieved by arranging the
supply pipe and the test pipe on the side opposite to the suction pipe connection within a
settling chamber, according to Figure 8.01.
48
In the case of tanks set up in rooms excessive condensation water shall be avoided by
appropriate ventilation resp. heating.
≥ 300mm
150 - 200
5 4
1 float valve
2 drainage
3 pump suction pipe
1 2 4 overflow
5 pump test pipe
Figure 8.01: Reduced capacity tank
Hazard Class Minimum capacity

m3
LH - Wet or pre-action 5
OH1 - Wet or pre-action 10

OH1 - Dry or alternate 20
OH2 - Wet or pre-action
HHP and HHS 70

but in no case less than 10% of the full capacity
Table 8.01: Minimum capacity of reduced capacity tanks
49
8.3.5 Effective capacity of tanks and dimensions of suction chambers

The effective capacity of storage tanks shall be calculated as shown in Figure 8.02,
where:
− N is the normal water line;

− X is the lowest water level;
− D is the nominal diameter of the suction pipe.
Nominal diameter Distance ’A’ Distance ‘B’ minimum Minimum dimension of

of suction pipe ’D’ minimum vortex inhibitor
mm m m m
65 0,25 0,08 0,20 x 0,20
80 0,31 0,08 0,20 x 0,20
100 0,37 0,10 0,40 x 0,40
150 0,50 0,10 0,60 x 0,60
200 0,62 0,15 0,80 x 0,80
250 0,75 0,15 1,00 x 1,00
300 0,90 0,20 1,20 x 1,20
400 1,05 0,20 1,20 x 1,20
500 1,20 0,20 1,20 x 1,20
Table 8.02: Suction pipe inlet clearances
Table 8.02 specifies minimum dimensions for the following:
− ‘A’ from the suction pipe to the lowest water level (see Figure 8.02) ;
− ‘B’ from the suction pipe to the bottom of the sump (see Figure 8.02).
If a vortex inhibitor is installed with the minimum dimensions specified in Table 8.02,
Dimension ‘A’ may be reduced to 0,10 m.
50
Figure 8.02: Effective capacity of suction tanks and dimensions of suction chambers
51
8.3.6 Strainers
In the case of pumps under suction lift conditions, a strainer shall be fitted upstream of
the back pressure valve on the pump suction pipe. It shall be fitted so that it can be
cleaned without the tank having to be emptied. In the case of open tanks feeding pumps
under positive head conditions, a strainer shall be fitted to the suction pipe outside the
tank. A stop valve shall be installed between the tank and the strainer.
Strainers shall have a cross-sectional area of at least 1.5 times the nominal area of the
pipe and shall not allow objects greater than 5 mm diameter to pass.
In the case of
− clean water filled into the tank,

− regular checks of the water quality for contaminations,
− an installation of the tank in technical operating rooms, and
− an exclusive use of the water for extinguishing purposes
the installation of a strainer is not required.
8.3.7 Materials, strength

The materials used shall be water-proof and weather-proof, or have a corrosion
protection that is permanent for two years minimum.
Welded sheet steel tanks shall be made of St 37-2 (or similar) or higher quality, and have
a minimum sheet thickness of 3 mm for the walls and 5mm for the tank bottom. Wall and
bottom thickness shall be calculated based on the 1,2-fold water pressure on the bottom
of the brimful tank. Wall strengthenings shall only be fitted to the interior wall if they are
welded to the tank end-to-end.
The tank interior wall shall be pre-treated using a streaming method of purity level SA 2 ½
(ISO 12 944-4) prior to the first interior coating against corrosion.
The interior coating of the tank shall be in accordance with a system appropriate for
underwater and water load variations. The exterior walls of the tanks and the underbody
shall at least be prime-coated.
Note: If the underbody is not accessible after installation, it shall be prime-coated

beforehand.
8.3.8 Underground tanks

If underground tanks are used, a ventilation pipe shall be fitted above the highest
possible water level, having a minimum diameter of 78 cm². The ventilation pipe shall be
made of corrosion-resistant material and protected against contamination and
obstruction. No light shall enter the tank through the ventilation pipe. If the tanks are set
up in rooms, an appropriate ventilation resp. heating shall prevent excessive
condensation.
Underground reinforced concrete tanks below traffic routes shall be dimensioned for a
traffic load “LKW 12 to” in accordance with DIN 1072 or fork lift load in accordance with
DIN 1055.
52
The tanks shall be dimensioned in accordance with DIN 1045, with at least concrete
quality C 20/25 (waterproof) and a minimum component strength of 20 cm. A different
concrete quality may be used if an equivalent sealing system is used in addition. The
concrete cover shall be secured exclusively by distance holders for concrete. A decrease
of the internal force variables of filling pressure via earth thrust is not permitted. The
permitted crack width Wcal shall not exceed 0,2 mm. Moreover, the concrete quality shall
be selected according to ambient conditions.
For tank wall penetrations for pipes use sealing systems that permit pipe angle
modifications.
8.3.9 Elevated private reservoirs

An elevated private reservoir is a water storage tank connected to a sprinkler system by a
supply of its own, and the geodetic height of which provides the operating pressure
required by the sprinkler system.
The water volume required by the sprinkler system shall be available at all times. If water
is extracted from an elevated private reservoir for other purposes than for the sprinkler
system, the required water volume shall be provided at all times.
The water volumes required for exhaustible elevated private reservoirs shall be at least
as follows:
− Sprinkler systems for LH 15 m³

− Sprinkler systems for OH 30 m³
− Sprinkler systems for HHS and HHP 40 m³
8.4 Natural and artificial sources

Natural and artificial sources such as rivers, canals and lakes are considered as
inexhaustible provided that they are virtually inexhaustible for reasons of capacity and
climate etc.
8.4.1 General
8.4.1.1 In the case of flowing waters the angle between the flow direction and the intake
axis (seen in the direction of flow) shall be less than 60°.
Schematic diagram (angle for intake axis)
jackwell
suction
chamber
/ settling
chamber
intake axis
< 60°
water flow direction
53
8.4.1.2 Excavation of the bed of the lake etc., to create the necessary depth for a pump
suction inlet is not recommended, but if unavoidable the area shall be enclosed with the
largest screen practicable, but in any case having sufficient clear area as specified in
8.4.3.3 and 8.4.4.5.
8.4.1.3 Two screens shall be provided, with one in use and the other in a raised position
ready for interchange when cleaning is necessary.
8.4.2 Settling chambers and suction chamber

8.4.2.1 Where a suction or other pipe draws from a settling chamber or suction chamber
fed from an inexhaustible source, the design and dimensions in Figure 8.03 a, 8.03 b and
8.03 c shall apply. Pipes, conduits and the bed of open-topped channels shall have a
continuous slope towards the settling chamber or suction chamber of at least 1:125.
8.4.2.2 The dimensions of the suction chamber and the location of suction pipes from the
walls of the chamber, their submergence below the lowest known water level (making any
necessary allowances for ice) and clearance from the bottom shall conform to 8.3.5 and
Figures 8.02 and 8.03 a, 8.03 b and 8.03 c.
8.4.2.3 The chambers shall be arranged to prevent ingress of wind borne debris and of
sunlight.
8.4.3 Inlet as weir or above open channel

8.4.3.1 The depth 'd' of water in open channels or weirs (including the weir between the
settling chamber and suction chamber) below the lowest known water level of the water
source shall be not less than that specified in Table 8.03 for the corresponding width 'w'
of inlet or channel and the appropriate flow (see also Figures 8.03 a and 8.03 b). The
design shall be done for maximum flow demand Qmax.
8.4.3.2 The settling chamber shall have the same width ‘b’ and depth ‘h’ as the suction
chamber, with b ≥ w.
8.4.3.3 Before entering the settling chamber the water shall first pass through a
removable screen of wire mesh or perforated metal plate having an aggregate clear area
below the water level of 150 mm² for each l/min of pump nominal flow in the case of LH or
OH or maximum design flow for HHP or HHS.
54
Figure 8.03 a: Jackwell with inlet as weir
Figure 8.03 b: Jackwell with inlet above open channel
55
Figure 8.03 c: Jackwell with inlet through pipe or feed pipe
0,25m < t ≤ 0,5 m 0,5m < t ≤ 1,0 m t > 1,0 m

Width Maximum Width Maximum Width Maximum
w flow demand w flow demand w flow demand
m l/min m l/min m l/min
0,088 280 0,082 522 0,078 993
0,125 497 0,112 891 0,106 1 690
0,167 807 0,143 1 380 0,134 2 590
0,215 1 200 0,176 1 960 0,163 3 630
0,307 2 060 0,235 3 160 0,210 5 650
0,334 2 340 0,250 3 510 0,223 6 260
0,410 3 160 0,291 4 480 0,254 7 830
0,500 4 190 0,334 5 590 0,286 9 580
0,564 4 950 0,361 6 340 0,306 10 750
0,750 7 260 0,429 8 310 0,353 13 670
1,110 12 050 0,527 11 420 0,417 18 070
1,170 12 800 0,539 11 820 0,425 18 640
1,500 17 380 0,600 13 900 0,462 21 410
2,000 24 400 0,667 16 270 0,500 24 400
4,500 60 300 0,819 21 950 0,581 31 140
- - 1,000 29 170 0,667 38 910
- - - - 2,000 203 300
Note : For dimensions not included in this table, the conduit shall be designed such that the water velocity
does not exceed 0,2 m/s.
Table 8.03: Minimum width of open channels and weirs (see Figures 8.03 a and 8.03 b)
56
8.4.4 Inlet via pipe or feed pipes

8.4.4.1 The diameter of the pipes or feed pipes shall be in accordance with the following
equation:
d ≥ 21,68 ⋅ Q 0,357
d = internal diameter of inlet pipe in mm
Q = max. flow rate in l/min according to Cl. 8.4.3.1
8.4.4.2 The inlet of the pipes or feed pipes shall be located at least pipe diameter ‘d’
below the lowest known water level.
8.4.4.3 The length of the settling chamber shall have at least the larger value of 10 d or
2,5m, with ‘d’ being the minimum internal diameter of the pipe or feed pipe.
8.4.4.4 The inlet of the pipe or feed pipe (see Fig. 8.03 c) supplying the settling chamber
and/or suction chamber, shall be fitted with a screen whose total aperture diameter is at
least 5 times the cross section of the pipe or feed pipe ‘d’. Provision shall be made to
ensure that the settling chamber can be blocked for regular cleaning and maintenance.
For duplicate water supplies separate settling and suction chambers shall be provided.
The screen shall be able to withstand the water pressure in the case of obstruction. The
mesh width shall not exceed 25 mm.
8.5 Pressure tanks

8.5.1 General
A pressure tank is a tank containing water under air pressure which shall be sufficient to
ensure that all the water can be discharged at the necessary pressure.
The pressure tank shall be reserved solely for the sprinkler system.
The pressure tank shall be easily accessible for external and internal inspection. It shall
be protected against corrosion both internally and externally.
The discharge pipe shall be situated at least 0,05 m above the bottom of the tank.
8.5.2 Housing
The pressure tank shall be housed either in a readily accessible position in a sprinkler
protected building or in a separate sprinkler protected building of non-combustible
construction used solely for the housing of fire protection water supplies and equipment.
When the pressure tank is housed in a sprinkler protected building the area shall be
enclosed by at least fire-retardant construction of non-combustible materials. The
pressure tank and housing shall be maintained at or above a temperature of 4°C.
8.5.3 Minimum capacity (water)

The minimum quantity of water in a pressure tank for a single supply shall be 15 m3 for
LH and 23 m3 for OH1.
The minimum quantity of water in a pressure tank for duplicate supplies shall be 15 m3 in
LH and OH (all groups).
57
The minimum water volume of pressure tanks designed to class 1 shall be:
− 7,5m³ for sprinkler systems for LH and OH

− 15,0m³ for sprinkler systems for OH2 - OH4, HHS and HHP
provided that the water supply of the sprinkler system consists of a pressure tank in
connection with a further water source.
8.5.4 Air pressure and contents

8.5.4.1 General
The air space shall not be less than one third of the pressure tank volume.
Pressure in the tank shall not exceed 12 bar.
Note: The maximum permitted pressure of the pressure tank is relevant.
The air pressures and water flow rates of the tank shall be sufficient to satisfy the
sprinkler installation demand requirements, up to the point of exhaustion.
8.5.4.2 Calculation
The air pressure to be maintained in the tank shall be determined from the following
formula:
P = (P1 + P2 + 0,1h) (Vt/Va)-P1
where:
P is the operating pressure, in bar;
P1 is the atmospheric pressure, in bar (assume P1 = 1);
P2 is the minimum pressure required for the hydraulically most unfavourable sprinkler
at the time of complete exhaustion of the pressure tank, in bar
h is the height of the hydraulically most unfavourable sprinkler above the bottom of
the pressure tank (can be negative, if the hydraulically most unfavourable sprinkler
is positioned below the tank), in m
Vt is the total volume of the tank, in cubic metres;
Va is the volume of air in the tank, in cubic metres.
8.5.5 Charging with air and water

Pressure tanks used as a single supply shall be provided with means for automatically
maintaining the air pressure and water level. The air and water supplies shall be capable
of filling and pressurising the tank completely in no more than 8 hours.
Note: For air supply purposes a quantity of 18 m³/h are assumed to be sufficient.
The water supply shall be capable of topping up with water at the operating pressure (P
in 8.5.4) of the pressure tank with a flow of at least 6m3/h.
58
8.5.6 Control and safety equipment

The tank shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and the required service pressure shall be
marked on the gauge.
A gauge glass shall be fitted to indicate the water level. Stop valves shall be fitted at each
end of the gauge glass and they shall normally be kept closed and a drain valve shall
also be provided.
The gauge glass shall be protected against mechanical damage and shall be marked with
the required water level.
The tank shall be fitted with a suitable safety device to ensure that the highest permitted
pressure is not exceeded.
The tank shall be protected against mechanical damage.
The connection between pressure tank and alarm valve station(s) shall have at least the
nominal diameter of the largest alarm valve station. However, the diameter shall not fall
below DN 100 and need not exceed DN 150.
The connection shall have a check valve with one slide valve upstream and one
downstream.
Both at the water refill and at the air supply one slide valve and one check valve each
shall be installed as closely as possible to the tank. The water refill pipe shall have a
diameter of DN 40 minimum, the air supply DN 20 minimum.
The pressure pipe of the water refill shall be fitted with a gauge. The sprinkler pump shall
not be used to refill the pressure tank.
The pressure tank shall be fitted with a second gauge.
The gauge glass shall be made of a material that does not sliver when bursting, or else a
fixed sliver protection shall be fitted, permitting the gauge glass to be read without
endangering persons.
8.6 Type of water supply

8.6.1 Single water supplies
The water supply shall conform to the pressure, flow and duration requirements given in
Clauses 6 and 8.
The following constitute acceptable single water supplies:
a) public water mains;

b) public water mains with one or more booster pumps;
c) pressure tank (LH and OH1 only) (see Clause 8.5);
d) gravity tank;
e) storage tank with one or more pumps;
f) natural or artificial source with one or more pumps (see Clause 8.4).
59
8.6.2 Superior single water supplies

Superior single water supplies are single water supplies which provide a higher degree of
reliability. They include the following:
a) public water mains fed from both ends, where each end is capable of satisfying the
pressure and flow demands of the system. The public water mains pipe network shall be
fed from two or more water sources and shall not be dependent at any point on a single,
common trunk main;
If booster pumps are required, two or more shall be provided;
b) gravity tank with no booster pump, or water storage tank with two or more pumps, where
the tank fulfils the following conditions:
− the tank shall be full capacity;
− there shall be no entry for light or foreign matter;
− potable water shall be used;
− painting or other corrosion protection, which reduces the need for emptying the
tank for maintenance shall be approved by the authorities (see Clause 18.4.5.2);
c) inexhaustible source with two or more pumps.
8.6.3 Duplicate water supplies

Duplicate water supplies consist of two single water supplies where each supply is
independent of the other. Each of the supplies forming part of a duplicate supply shall
conform to the pressure and flow characteristics given in Clause 6.
Any combination of single supplies (including superior single supplies) may be used, with
the following limitations:
a) no more than one pressure tank shall be used for OH1 systems;
b) no more than one storage tank of the reduced capacity type shall be used.
Two or more pumps drawing water from two independent suction tanks constitute an
acceptable duplicate water supply.
8.6.4 Combined water supplies

Combined water supplies are superior single or duplicate water supplies designed to
supply more than one fixed fire fighting system, as for example in the case of combined
pillar/ground hydrants and sprinkler installations. This does not apply to installations fitted
exclusively with sprinkler and water spray valves.
Combined supplies shall fulfil the following conditions:
a) the system shall be fully calculated (down to the pillar/ground hydrants);

b) the supply shall be capable of supplying the sum of the simultaneous maximum
calculated flows from each system. The flows shall be corrected up to the pressure
required by the most demanding system;
c) the duration of the supply shall be no less than that required for the most demanding
system. For hydrants the duration shall be in accordance with 7.2;
60
8.7 Isolation of water supplies

The connections between the water sources and alarm valve stations shall be arranged
so as to ensure the following:
a) that servicing of main components such as strainers, pump sets, back pressure valves
and water meters is facilitated;
b) that any problem occurring to one supply shall not impair the operation of any other
source or supply;
c) that maintenance can be carried out on one supply without impairing the operation of
any other source or supply.
8.8 Choice of water supply

The type of water supply shall be selected in accordance with Table 8.04 in consideration
of the maximum protection area.
Single water Single superior Duplicate water supply
supply water supply
Low Hazard (LH) X X X
1)
Ordinary Hazard (OH) X X X
High Hazard Production (HHP) X X X
less than 500 sprinklers
High Hazard Production (HHP) X2) X2)
500 sprinklers or more
High Hazard Storage (HHS) X3) X X
less than 500 sprinklers
High Hazard Storage (HHS) X2) X2)
500 to 5000 sprinklers
High Hazard Storage (HHS) X2)
more than 5000 sprinklers
1) For OH2 and OH3 a pressure tank shall not be used as single water supply.
2) Each pump set shall be powered by a source that is completely independent of that of any other pump.
Even in the case of failure of a pump set it shall be ensured that each further pump set starts automatically.
3) For high rack storage only up to 80 rack sprinklers maximum.
Table 8.04: Classification of water supply
Water supply type 1 consists of one exhaustible water source only.
Water supply type 2 consists of one inexhaustible water source only.
Water supply type 3 consists of one inexhaustible and one exhaustible water source.
Water supply type 4 consists of two inexhaustible and one exhaustible water sources.
61
Water supply Fire Permitted Permitted

hazard number of number of
sprinklers sprinklers
Type consisting of Abbrev. in total 4) per fire
section 4)
1 1 exhaustible water source 5) a, b LH 1000
either
1 pressure tank OH not permitted
or HHP not permitted
1 gravity tank HHS not permitted
5)
2 1 inexhaustible water source c, d, e LH 2000 2) 750 1)
either
1 public water mains or OH 1000 3) 750 1)
3)
1 pump set or HHP 100
1 gravity tank HHS 100
3 1 inexhaustible water source and c, d, e LH 5000 5000
1 exhaustible water source a, b, f OH 5000 5000
e.g. 1 public water mains and HHP 5000 5000
1 pressure tank HHS 5000 5000
or equivalent combination
a = pressure tanks; b = gravity tanks (exhaustible); c = public water mains; d = gravity tanks
(inexhaustible); e = pump sets; f = reduced capacity tanks; a1, b1 = a1 or b1
1) The fire sections shall at least have fire retardant separations made of non-combustible materials.
2) Water supply type 1 may also be used in mixed hazards LH/OH, provided that the number of
sprinklers in the OH area does not exceed 400 or 40% of the total number of sprinklers. One fire
section in the OH area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply characteristics
shall be in accordance with hazard class OH.
3) Water supply type 2 may also be used in mixed hazards OH/HHP, provided that the number of
section in the HHP area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply characteristics
shall be in accordance with hazard class HHP.
4) Sprinklers in voids do not count.
5) Water supplies types 1 and 2 are assessed less favourably than types 3 and 4.
Table 8.05: Types of water supply, Part 1
62
Water supply Fire Permitted Permitted

hazard number of number of
sprinklers sprinklers
Type consisting of Abbrev. in total 4) per fire
section 4)
4 2 inexhaustible water sources and c1, d1, LH 20000 20000
e1+c2,d2,e
2
1 exhaustible water source 6) a, b, f OH 20000 20000
e.g. 2 public water mains and HHP 20000 20000
1 pressure tank HHS 20000 20000
or equivalent combination
Alternatively:
3 water sources of 50% each 7) and c1,d1,e1+c2
1 exhaustible water source 6) ,
d2,e2+c3,d
3,e3
e.g. 3 pump sets of 50% and
1 pressure tank
Note: With more than 20000 sprinklers additional power supply backups shall be provided by
agreement with the VdS Inspection Services.
a = pressure tanks; b = gravity tanks (exhaustible); c = public water mains; d = gravity tanks
(inexhaustible); e = pump sets; f = reduced capacity tanks; a1, b1 = a1 or b1
Water supplies according to c and e may also be used. If these are not the only water supplies, two
thirds of the required water rate or duration will be sufficient. If a pump set is used as an exhaustible
water source, its power supply shall be backed up.
1) The fire sections shall at least have fire-retardant separations made of non-combustible materials.
2) Water supply type 1 may also be used in mixed hazards LH/OH, provided that the number of
section in the OH area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply
characteristics shall be in accordance with hazard class OH.
3) Water supply type 2 may also be used in mixed hazards OH/HHP, provided that the number of
section in the HHP area shall not comprise more than 100 sprinklers. The water supply
characteristics shall be in accordance with hazard class HHP.
5) Water supplies types 1 and 2 are assessed less favourably than types 3 and 4.
6) With more than 10000 sprinklers an automatic refill of the pressure tank is required.
7) Each water supply shall provide at least the pressure required for the most unfavourable area of
operation and at least 50% of the water rate for most favourable area of operation. The first water
supply shall operate before the pressure in the pipework required for the most unfavourable area of
operation falls. The second water supply shall operate at the latest when the supply pressure
required for the most unfavourable area of operation has been reached. If one water supply fails,
the next one shall operate automatically. At least one water supply shall a storage tank, while the
two other tanks may be reduced capacity tanks. It is possible to combine the two reduced capacity
tanks in one tank with a partition.
Table 8.05: Types of water supply; Part 2
63
Water Number of LH and OH HHP and HHS

supply sprinklers1)
Type 3 1 – 5000 1-750 Sprinkler 2) 751-5000 Sprinkler

Wu
and 4 W Wu Wug
A, B, C W W A1, B1, C1 und
A, B, C
A2, B2, C2, D
5001 – 20000
W Wu Wu
A1, B1, C1 A2,B2,C2,D
5001 – 20000
W 50% W 50% W 50%
W
A1, B1, C1 A2, B2, C2, D A1, A2, B1, B2, C3, D 4)
3)
LH OH HHP HHS
Type 1 1 – 1000
Wu Wu
and 2 W
A, B, C A, B, C
1001 – 2000 not not permitted not permitted

Wu
permitted
A, B, C
LH, OH, HHP, HHS = hazard classes

W = exhaustible water source, e.g. pressure tank, gravity tank
Wu = inexhaustible water source
Wug = inexhaustible water source, backed up power supply
If one water source is attached to several power sources, the appropriate power source can be selected.
A = mains supply; B = private power generator; C = diesel engines;
D = standby supply generator
A1 = mains 1; A2 = mains 2; A1, B1, C1 = A1 or B1 or C
2) For high rack storage only up to 80 rack sprinklers maximum.
3) Only permitted with water supply type 2 and up to 100 sprinklers maximum.
4) In the case of a failure of a power supply or pump, at least 100% of the required water rate shall be provided at all
times.
Table 8.06: Power supply subject to fire hazard class and number of sprinklers
64
LH ... OH LH ... HH HH
1-5000 sprinklers 5001-20000 sprinklers 751-5000 sprinklers
A,B A 1,B 1 A2,B 2,D A1,B 1 A 2,B 2,D
water water water water
A 2,B 2,D A,B,D
water water water water
water water water
A = mains supply E = electric motor A1 = mains supply 1

B = private power generator F = controller A2 = mains supply 2
C = diesel engine P = pump A1, B2, C1 = A1 or B1 or C1
D = standby supply generator
Figure 8.04: Examples of power supply for pump sets
9 Pumps
9.1 General
Pumps are installed to provide the required system flow rates at the required pressures.
The pumps shall be used for fire fighting purposes only (see 7.2).
The pressure at the delivery side of the pump shall decrease continuously (stable
characteristic).
65
Note: The engine shall be selected in accordance with the approval requirements (e.g.
increased capacity with increased primary pressures) of the VdS approval for pumps.
Pumps shall be driven either by electric motors or diesel engines capable of providing at
least the power required for any pump load conditions from zero flow to the end of the
pump characteristic. The end of the pump characteristic complies with the flow rate at
pump pressure zero, measured at the delivery side of the pump. The pump capacity shall
be designed in accordance with the VdS approval for the entire characteristic up to the
approval limit.
The coupling between the driver and the pump shall be of a type which ensures that
either can be removed independently.
Pipework shall be supported independently of the pump. Pipes shall be supported

immediately upstream and downstream of the pump and connected with zero potential.
The installation instructions of expansion joints shall be carefully attended to.
During operation it shall not be possible to disable pump sets other than manually,
even after response of an engine monitoring system.
With several power sources it is essential to ensure that the pump set is powered
automatically by another power source in the case of a fault or failure at the controller.
9.2 Multiple pump arrangements

Where more than one pump is installed with a superior single water supply or a duplicate
water supply, these shall be powered by independent power sources (see 9.8.1).
In any case, pumps shall have compatible characteristic curves and be capable of
operating in parallel at all possible flow rates.
Where two pumps are installed, each one shall be capable independently of providing the
specified flows and pressures. Where three pumps are installed, each pump shall be
capable of providing at least 50% of the specified flow at the specified pressure.
With several water sources the sprinkler pumps shall be optionally feedable from any of
the water supplies, as long as the pumps are not located in separate places (‘H’ circuit).
If one tank is cut off in a system with sprinkler pumps operating in suction lift conditions
and being fed optionally from two tanks via H arrangement, the sprinkler pump for the
empty tank shall not aspirate any air via the priming tank of the sprinkler pump that is not
in operation.
9.3 Compartments for pump sets

9.3.1 Pump sets shall be housed in a room built of highly fire-retardant components
made of non-combustible materials, used for no other purpose than fire protection. It shall
be one of the following (in order of preference):
a) a separate building with this room only;

b) a building with this room only, adjacent to a sprinkler-protected building with direct
access from outside;
c) a room with direct access from outside.
Note 1: Any other solutions shall be agreed with the fire brigade/VdS.
Note 2: The following are not permitted e.g. in rooms of pump sets
66
- storage and/or production;

- house substations and devices supplied with combustible gases.
9.3.2 Compartments for pump sets shall be sprinkler-protected. Where the pump
compartment is separate, it may be impractical to provide sprinkler protection from the
alarm valve in the premises. Sprinkler protection may be provided from the nearest
accessible point on the downstream side of the outlet non-return valve of the pump via a
subsidiary stop valve secured in the open position, together with a water flow alarm
switch to provide visible and audible indication of the operation of the sprinklers. The
alarm devices shall be installed either at the alarm valve stations or at a permanently
manned location such as a gatehouse.
A 15-mm nominal diameter drain and test valve shall be fitted downstream of the water
flow alarm switch to permit a practical test of the alarm device.
9.3.3 The pump compartment shall be maintained at or above the following temperature:
− + 5°C for electric motor driven pumps and diesel engines with preheating unit;
− + 10°C for diesel engine driven pumps without preheating unit.
9.3.4 Pump compartments for diesel engine driven pumps shall be provided with
adequate ventilation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
9.4 Maximum temperature of water supply

The water supply temperature shall not exceed 40°C. Where submersible pumps are
utilised the water temperature shall not exceed 25°C, unless the suitability of the motor
has been proven for temperatures up to 40°C.
9.5 Valves and accessories

A stop valve shall be fitted in the pump suction pipe and a non-return and a stop valve
shall be fitted in the delivery pipe. In lift condition, when the centre line of the pump is
above the maximum water level, a stop valve in the suction pipe may be omitted.
Any taper pipe fitted to the pump outlet shall expand in the direction of flow at an angle
not exceeding 20°.
Valves on the delivery side shall be fitted downstream of any taper pipe in the direction of
flow only.
If required, means for venting all cavities of the pump casing shall be provided.
Arrangements shall be made to ensure a continuous flow of water through the pump
sufficient to prevent overheating when it is operating against a closed valve. This flow
shall be taken into account in the system hydraulic calculation. The outlet shall be clearly
visible and where there is more than one pump the outlets shall be separate.
Note: If the water is returned into the tank and the flow rate falls below 2% of the
permitted flow, this water volume will not have to be taken into account in the hydraulic
calculation. If the water volume is returned into the storage tank/reduced capacity tank,
the visible water flow may be led through an arm pipe with slide valve and free outlet.
67
9.6 Suction conditions

9.6.1 General
Wherever possible, horizontal centrifugal pumps shall be used, installed with a positive
suction head. i.e. in accordance with the following:
− At least two thirds of the effective capacity of the suction tank shall be above the level
of the pump centre line;
− The pump centre line shall be no more than 2 m above the lowest water level of the
suction tank (level ‘X’ in 8.3.5).
If this is not feasible, the pump may be installed under suction lift conditions or vertical
turbine pumps may be used.
In risks of hazard classes OH, HHS and HHP with operating times in accordance with
Class 1 (see 7.1.1), a cover shall be fitted above the pump centre line covering at least
five sixths of the effective capacity of the suction tank.
Note: Suction lift should be avoided. Especially with suction lift it is critical not to vary from
the requirements stated in 9.6.2 and shown in Figures 8.02 and 8.03.
9.6.2 Suction pipes

The pump suction shall be connected to a straight or eccentric taper pipe at least two
diameters long. This pipe shall not have any arm pipe or other fittings. The taper pipe
shall have a horizontal topside and a maximum included angle not exceeding 20º. Valves
shall not be fitted directly to the pump inlet.
If straight pipes at least 2,5 diameters long are to be connected to suction fittings
upstream of pumps, taper pipes in accordance with DIN EN 10253 or DIN 2616 may be
used.
The suction piping, including all valves and fittings, shall be designed in such a way as to
ensure that the available NPSH at the pump inlet exceeds the required NPSH by at least
1 m with the maximum demand flow and lowest water level (see ‘X’ in 8.02 and 8.03).
Suction piping shall be laid either horizontal or with a rise of 15° maximum towards the
pump to avoid the possibility of air locks forming in the pipe.
Pumps shall have a measuring point at a distance of at least half the suction fitting
diameter from the suction fitting. One measuring point shall be located at a distance of
the suction fitting diameter from the suction fitting. Both measuring points shall consist of
a bore 6mm in diameter and a welded sleeve for installing the gauge.
9.6.2.1 Positive head
Where more than one pump is provided the suction pipes may only be interconnected if
they are fitted with stop valves to allow each pump to continue operating when the other
is removed for maintenance. The connections shall be dimensioned as appropriate for
the flow rate required (see Table 9.01).
If more than one sixth of the effective water volume is between the centre line of the
pump and the lowest water level (see 8.3.5), a foot valve with pump primer shall be fitted.
The pipe diameter for a suction pipe shall not fall below DN 65. The pipe diameter shall
be dimensioned such that at maximum demand flow a velocity of 1,8 m/s is not
68
exceeded. The flow velocity may be increased to 2,5 m/s while a low pressure of 0,4 bar
is not exceeded.
9.6.2.2 Suction lift conditions
The pipe diameter for a suction pipe shall not fall below DN 80. The pipe diameter shall
be dimensioned such that at maximum demand flow a velocity of 1,5 m/s is not
exceeded. The flow velocity may be increased to 2,5 m/s while a low pressure of 0,4 bar
is not exceeded.
The suction pipes shall not be interconnected. This does not refer to ‘H’ circuits in
accordance with 9.2.
The height from the low water level (see 8.3.5) to the centre line of the pump shall not
exceed 3,7 m.
The suction pipe shall be positioned in the tank or reservoir in accordance with Figure
8.02 resp. 8.03 and Table 8.03. A foot valve shall be fitted at the lowest point on the
suction pipe. Each pump shall have automatic priming arrangements in accordance with
9.6.2.3.
9.6.2.3 Pump priming for suction lift
The automatic pump priming arrangement shall ensure that pumps are constantly kept
full of water. Each pump shall be fitted with a separate priming arrangement.
The arrangement shall consist of a tank situated at a higher level than the pump and with
a pipe connection sloping from the tank to the delivery side of the pump. A non-return
valve shall be fitted to this connection.
The priming tank, the pump and the suction pipework shall be kept constantly full of water
even where there is leakage from the foot valve referred to in 9.6.2.2. Should the water
level in the tank fall to two-thirds of the normal level, the pump shall start. Figure 9.01
shows two examples.
If the supply to the priming tank is taken from the public water mains forming a supply to
the sprinkler installation, the connection shall be made upstream of the non-return valve
on the public water mains connection.
The size of the priming tank and the pipe shall be in accordance with Table 9.03.
Hazard class Minimum tank capacity Minimum diameter of priming

l pipe DN
LH 100 25
OH, HHP and HHS 500 50
Table 9.03: Pump priming tank capacity and pipe size
An automatic pump start will not be necessary if the water level in the priming tank is
monitored in accordance with Clause 19. If the system is not monitored as specified in
Clause 19, an additional fault indication at the controller will be necessary. This indication
will have to be transmitted via general fault indication to a permanently manned location.
69
Figure 9.01: Pump priming arrangement for suction lift
70
9.7 Performance characteristics

9.7.1 General
The maximum pressure shall not exceed 12 bar. The performance characteristics of
pumps shall be recorded in accordance with 3.4.4.4.
The maximum system pressure is based on the maximum permitted pressure of the
components used.
9.7.2 Pre-calculated systems - LH and OH

cannot be given.
9.7.3 Pre-calculated systems - HHP and HHS with no in-rack sprinklers

cannot be given.
9.7.4 Calculated systems

The pump set shall be capable of providing at least the flow and pressure of both the
most favourable and the most unfavourable areas. The maximum flow demand (Qmax)
for supplying the most favourable area may exceed the permitted rate by up to 40%. The
pressure shall not fall by more than 30% (of the pressure prevailing with the permitted
rate). The flow demand for the most unfavourable area shall fall below the permitted rate
at all times (see Figure H.01).
9.7.5 Pressure and water capacity of boosted public water mains

If it is intended to connect a pump to a public water mains, a test shall first be carried out
to show that it can supply the flow rate equal to the maximum demand flow plus 20%, at a
pressure of at least 1 bar, as measured at the pump inlet. This test shall be carried out at
a time of maximum demand on the mains.
9.7.6 Pressure switches

9.7.6.1 Number of pressure switches
Two pressure switches shall be provided to start each pump set, connected in series with
normally closed contacts. The same level of safety is achieved by starting the pump via
two pressure switches with contacts closing when the pressure falls, with parallel
connections converging in the controller.
The nominal diameter of the pipe leading to the pressure switch shall be ½” minimum.
Two pressure switches maximum may be connected to this pipe.
9.7.6.2 Pump start
The pump set shall start automatically when the pressure in the trunk main falls to a value
of not less than 0,8 P, where P is the pressure at zero flow. Where two pump sets are
installed, the second pump shall start before the pressure falls to a value of not less than
0,6 P. Once the pump has started, it shall continue to run until stopped manually. Where
one of the pump sets is electric motor driven this shall be the first to start.
71
9.7.6.3 Testing the pressure switches
Means shall be provided for testing each pressure switch. If any isolating valve is
installed on the connection between the trunk main and any pump starting pressure
switch, a back pressure valve shall be installed in parallel with the isolating valve so that
a fall in pressure on the trunk main will be transmitted to the pressure switch even when
the isolating valve is closed. The same level of safety is achieved by self relieving ball
valves.
9.8 Electrically driven pump sets

Note: For VdS-approved controllers the safety requirements specified in this clause may
be regarded as fulfilled.
9.8.1 General
9.8.1.1 Where two electric motor driven pumps are used, Clause 8.8 on the choice of
water supply also specifies certain power supply requirements.
Where a sprinkler pump is supplied by several electric power sources, each power
source shall have its own electrically interlocked controller. Where a water rate is
delivered by several pumps, each pump shall have its own controller.
9.8.1.2 The electric supply system shall be available at all times.
9.8.1.3 Documentation, such as installation drawings, main supply and transformer

diagrams and connections for supplying the pump controller panel as well as motor,
control alarm circuits and signals shall be kept available in the sprinkler valve or pump
room and be up to date at all times.
9.8.1.4 The pump shall operate at nominal capacity within 15 seconds of the beginning of
any starting sequence.
9.8.2 Electricity supply

The operating voltage of public electricity networks and private power generators at
nominal operation of pump sets shall not fall below the motor nominal voltage by more
than 5%.
Where the sprinkler system is powered by two electrical networks, these shall be
merged only if the voltage is 110kV minimum.
9.8.2.1 The supply to the pump controller shall be solely for the use of the sprinkler
system and separate from all other connections. Where permitted, the electrical supply to
the pump controller shall be taken from the input side of the main switch on the incoming
supply to the premises and where this is not permitted, by a connection from the main
switch.
The fuses in the pump controller shall be delayed-action fuses, capable of carrying the
stalled motor current for a period of not less than 75% of the time needed for the motor
windings to fail and thereafter be able to carry the normal current plus 100% for a
minimum of 5 hours.
72
This may also be achieved by:

using high capacity fuses for the fuses in the pump controller, capable of carrying high
voltage current for 20 s minimum. The nominal current of the protection equipment shall
be greater than the operating current of the circuit.
The sprinkler controller shall only supply the equipment required for operating the
sprinkler system. This includes:
a) sprinkler pump
b) filling pump
c) booster pump for sprinkler pipework
d) air compressor
e) heating elements or heating bands of low capacity (3kW max.) used for keeping the
sprinkler system or parts of the pipework free of frost
f) motor driven slide valve
g) bildge pump (part of sprinkler system)
h) lighting of sprinkler equipment room
i) ventilation of sprinkler equipment room
j) monitoring panel
9.8.2.2 All cables shall be protected against fire and mechanical damage.
Cables to the terminal board of the motor or to the connection of submersible pumps shall
be laid in one piece. Connection points outside the controller for sprinkler systems and
the low voltage main distribution are not permitted. A terminal box shall be located in the
direct vicinity of the pump motor, if – in the case of two power sources – the cables from
the controllers to the sprinkler pump motor are outside the sprinkler equipment room, not
buried and separate.
To each cable one load only (controller, equipment, etc.) shall be connected.
The cables shall be flame-retardant and have a burning behaviour in accordance with
DIN EN 60332-3-22 A or DIN EN 60332-3-24, type C, e.g. cables of type NYY (DIN VDE
0276-603), halogen-free cables with improved behaviour in the case of fire in accordance
with DIN VDE 0276-604. The diameter of the conductor shall be 2,5 mm² Cu minimum.
Cables required for operating the sprinkler system shall be selected and laid so as to
keep them functional in the case of fire.
Flame-retardant cables (see above) (e.g. NYY) may be used without any further
requirements, provided that they are laid as follows:
a) buried with a covering of 70 cm minimum;

b) in floors and walls made of non-combustible materials with sufficient covering, e.g. in
concrete with a covering of 10 cm;
c) in sprinkler equipment rooms;
d) in electrical operating rooms in accordance with 4.1.1 o).
Otherwise the cables shall be laid as follows:
73
e) in “Cable systems with structural separations and busbar distributors” in accordance

with DIN 4102-12 (e.g. fire protection enclosures), if active parts, e.g. by structural
separations, are protected from water
− of class E 30 in rooms that are sprinklered or permitted exemptions from sprinkler
protection in accordance with 4.1.1 b), c), g), h), i), m) and n)
− of class E 90 in non-sprinklered areas
or the following is used:
f) fire-resistant cables of class E 90 in accordance with DIN 4102-12 with additional

functionality test under exposure to water after exposure to flaming by VdS and
protection against mechanical damage, designed as follows:
− in false ceiling spaces in accordance with 4.1.1 n) immediately underneath the
rough ceiling;
− in enclosed flues and ducts made of non-combustible materials;
− in installation flues and ducts in accordance with DIN 4102-11;
− directly underneath rough ceilings;
− in false floors;
− on cable trays that are fully covered by non-combustible building materials.
Where E 90 cables in accordance with DIN 4102-12 are used, they shall be laid in
accordance with the certificate of suitability by the building control authorities.
Where sprinkler systems are powered by two electrical power sources, the cables to the
controller and to the motors shall be laid at a distance of 3m minimum from each other,
unless the controller and the sprinkler pump system are located in the sprinkler
equipment room or the cables are buried.
For each cable the approved hangers shall be used in compliance with the installation
instructions (see certificate by material testing institute).
Note 1: All wiring associated with the electric motor driven pump, including the monitoring
circuits, should be in accordance with the appropriate regulations for electrical
installations. To protect cables from direct exposure to fire they should be run outside the
building or through those parts of the building where the fire risk is negligible and which
are separated from any significant fire risk by walls, partitions or floors with a fire
resistance of not less than 60 min, or they should be given additional direct protection.
Note 2: It is strongly recommended that the cables be buried.
9.8.2.3 Standby supply generators
Standby supply generators shall be powered by diesel engines.
If the operating parameters to be monitored are exceeded or fallen below, select the first
option “alarm” (no silencing) of DIN ISO 8528-4 Cl. 7.3.
The energy transfer from the standby supply generator to the sprinkler pump motor shall
not take place until the generator has reached its nominal operating data.
The standby supply generators shall be designed in consideration of the pump start
specifics (starting current behaviour).
74
In the case of a power failure standby supply generators designed for a sprinkler system
plus further loads shall start irrespectively of the operating condition of the sprinkler
system.
Standby supply generators supplying the sprinkler system only, shall start only if there is
a power failure at the sprinkler controller and the sprinkler system operates. Once the first
power source returns and is activated automatically, standby supply generators shall
continue to operate for 10 min.
The control panels for automatic standby supply and mains transfer shall be designed at
least as follows:
a) for mains operation

− 1 voltage monitoring equipment (three-phase)
b) for generator operation
− 1 voltage meter
− 1 ammeter per phase conductor
− 1 selector switch with the following positions:
− “automatic”
− “test” (with no load, but automatic load transfer in case of power failure)
− “generator” (manual load connection for testing)
− “disabled” (key switch inhibits start)
− 1 signal lamp “mains on”
− 1 signal lamp “generator on”
9.8.3 Switchboard
9.8.3.1 The main switch and power distribution for the premises shall be situated in a
room with at least fire-resistant separation made of non-combustible materials used for
no other purpose than for electrical power supplies. Door openings between this room
and any adjacent rooms shall have at least fire-retardant closures. Any other location
shall be approved by the authorities.
The circuit shall not have a ground fault circuit interrupter. The connection to the
controller of the sprinkler system shall be fused in the low voltage main distribution.
Before this fuse only one more shall be fitted up to the low-voltage-lateral point of
delivery.
The electrical connections in the main switchboard shall be such that the supply to the
pump controller is not isolated when isolating other services.
75
e1 = main fuse
e2 = fuse for sprinkler connection
e3 = main fuse for other loads
a1 = load break switch for sprinkler system
a2 = main switch for other loads
e2/a1 also permitted as circuit breaker
to the switchgear other loads

of the sprinkler
system
Figure 9.02: Example of sprinkler system connection in low voltage main distribution
9.8.3.2 Each switch on the dedicated power feed to the sprinkler pump shall be labelled:
SPRINKLER PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY –

NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE!
The letters on the notice shall be at least 10 mm high and white on a red background.
The load break switch for disabling the sprinkler system shall be secured against
inadvertent operation and marked especially.
9.8.4 Installation between the main switchboard and the pump controller
9.8.4.1 The current for calculating the correct dimension for the cable shall be determined
by taking the largest possible full load current and adding 50%. The cable shall
furthermore be able to carry the largest possible starting current for 10 seconds.
9.8.5 Pump controller

9.8.5.1 The pump controller shall be able :
a) to start the motor automatically on receiving a signal from the pressure switches;
b) to start the motor manually;
c) to stop the motor by manual operation only.
The controller shall be equipped with an ammeter.
76
9.8.5.2 Except in the case of submersible pumps, the pump controller shall be situated in
the same room (pump room) as the electric motor and pump. In the case of submersible
pumps a duplicate plate with its characteristics shall be affixed to the pump controller.
9.8.5.3 Contacts shall comply with utilisation category AC-3 of IEC 60 947.
9.8.6 Monitoring of pump operation

9.8.6.1 The following conditions shall be monitored:
− power available to the motor on all three phases;

− pump on demand;
− pump running.
9.8.6.2 All monitored conditions shall be visually indicated individually in the pump room,
faults shall be indicated audibly. They should also be visually and audibly indicated at a
location permanently manned by responsible personnel.
9.8.6.3 The visual fault indication shall be yellow. The audible signals shall have a signal
strength of at least 75 dB at a distance of 1 m and shall be able to be silenced.
9.8.6.4 A lamp test for checking the signal lamps shall be provided.
9.9 Diesel engine driven pumps

Note: For VdS-approved controllers the safety requirements specified in this clause may
be regarded as fulfilled.
9.9.1 General
A diesel engine shall be capable of operating continuously at full load at site elevation
with a rated output in accordance with ISO 3046-1:1986.
If the operating parameters to be monitored are exceeded or fallen below, select the first
option “alarm” (no silencing) of DIN ISO 8528-4 Cl. 7.3.
The pump shall be fully operational within 15 seconds of the beginning of any starting
sequence.
Horizontal pumps shall have a direct drive.
The automatic start and operation of the pump set shall not depend on any energy
sources other than the engine and its batteries.
9.9.2 Engines
The engine shall be capable of starting at an engine room temperature of +5°C.
Note: If a minimum temperature of +10°C at the installation place of the diesel engine is
guaranteed, the requirement of a pump start at +5°C will not apply.
The governor to control the engine speed shall keep the speed constant between no load
and full load conditions of the pump with a deviation of ± 5%. Under nominal load
conditions the speed shall not deviate from nominal speed by more than 1,5%. The
engine shall be constructed so that any mechanical device fitted to the engine which
could prevent the engine starting automatically, will return to the starting position.
77
9.9.3 Cooling system

The following types of cooling systems are acceptable.
a) cooling by water from the sprinkler pump directly into the engine-cylinder jackets via a
pressure reducing device if necessary, in accordance with the manufacturer's
specification. The outlet pipe shall be open so that the discharge water is visible;
b) a heat exchanger, where the water is taken from the sprinkler pump via a pressure
reducing device if necessary, in accordance with the manufacturer's specification. The
outlet pipe shall be open so that the discharge water is visible. The water in the closed
circuit shall be circulated by an auxiliary pump driven by the engine. If the auxiliary pump
is belt driven, there shall be multiple belts such that even if half the belts are broken, the
remaining belts are able to drive the pump. The capacity of the closed circuit shall
conform to the value specified by the engine manufacturers;
c) an air cooled radiator with a fan multiple belt driven by the engine. If half the belts break,
the remaining belts shall be capable of driving the fan. The water in the closed circuit
shall be circulated by an auxiliary pump driven by the engine. If the auxiliary pump is belt
driven, there shall be multiple belts such that even if half the belts are broken, the
remaining belts are able to drive the pump. The capacity of the closed circuit shall
conform to the value specified by the engine manufacturers;
d) direct air cooling of the engine by means of a multiple belt driven fan. When half the
belts are broken the remaining belts shall be capable of driving the fan.
Where cooling water is taken from the pump in quantities exceeding 2% of the maximum
calculated system demand rate, the flow shall be taken into account in the system
calculations.
9.9.4 Air filtration and intake

The air intake shall be fitted with a suitable filter.
Provision shall be made for a suitable air intake into the pump room to ensure the correct
operation of the engine.
9.9.5 Exhaust system

The exhaust pipe shall be fitted with a suitable silencer and the total back pressure shall
not exceed the engine-maker’s recommendation.
Where the exhaust pipe is higher than the engine, means shall be provided to prevent
any condensate flowing back to the engine. The exhaust pipe shall be positioned in such
a way as to prevent exhaust gases from re-entering the pump room.
No combustible materials shall be located near the exhaust pipe.
9.9.6 Fuel, fuel tank and fuel feed pipes

The quality of the diesel fuel used shall conform to the engine-maker's instructions. The
fuel tank shall contain fuel oil sufficient to enable the engine to run on full load for:
− 3 hours for LH;

− 4 hours for OH;
− 6 hours for HHP and HHS.
78
The fuel tank shall be of welded steel. Where there is more than one diesel driven pump
set, there shall be a separate fuel tank and fuel feed pipe for each engine.
The fuel tank shall be fixed at a higher level than the motor's fuel pump to ensure a
positive head, but not directly above the engine. The fuel tank shall have a sturdy fuel
level gauge.
Any valves in the fuel feed pipe between the fuel tank and the engines shall be placed
adjacent to the tank, have an indicator and be locked in the open position. Pipe joints
shall not be soldered. Metallic pipes or metallic hoses shall be used for fuel lines.
The feed pipe shall be situated at least 20 mm above the bottom of the fuel tank. A drain
valve of at least 20 mm diameter shall be fitted to the base of the tank.
The fuel tank vent should be terminated outside the building.
9.9.7 Starting mechanism

9.9.7.1 General
Automatic and manual starting systems shall be provided and shall be independent
except that the starter motor and batteries may be common to the two systems.
It shall be possible to start the diesel engine both automatically, upon receipt of a signal
from the pressure switches, and manually by means of a push button on the pump
controller. It shall be possible to shut down the diesel engine only manually.
The rated voltage of the batteries and starter motor shall be:
− 24 V for engines of capacity greater than 1640 cm³;

− 24 V or 12 V for engines of capacity less than or equal to 1640 cm³.
The starter motor and each battery power source shall have the design capacity to rotate
the engine at 0°C and 760 mmHg atmospheric pressure for not less than 10 cycles each
of not less than 15 s cranking and not more than 10 s rest. At the end of the energised
part of each cycle the engine cranking speed shall be not less than 120 r/min while power
is applied.
9.9.7.2 Automatic starting system
The automatic starting sequence shall make six attempts to start the engine, each one of
5 to 10 s duration, with a maximum pause of 10 seconds between each attempt. The
starting device shall reset itself automatically. It shall function independently of the line
power supply.
The system shall switch over automatically to the other battery after each starting
attempt. The control voltage shall be drawn from both batteries simultaneously. Facilities
shall be provided to prevent one battery having an adverse effect on the other.
9.9.7.3 Emergency manual starting system
Emergency manual start facilities shall be provided in accordance with the approval
requirements for controllers.
79
9.9.7.4 Test facility for manual starting system
A manual start test button and indicator lamp shall be provided to permit periodic testing
of the manual electric start system without breaking the cover over the emergency
manual start facilities button. The controller shall be marked, adjacent to the lamp, with
the wording:
OPERATE MANUAL START TEST BUTTON IF LAMP IS LIT
The manual start test button shall only be brought on line after an automatic engine start
followed by a shut down or after six repeated unsuccessful attempts to start
automatically. Either of the two conditions shall cause the indicator lamp to light and bring
the manual start test button on line in parallel with the emergency manual start push
button.
When a test manual start has been carried out, the circuit used for this purpose shall
automatically become inoperable and the indicator lamp shall be extinguished. The
automatic start facility shall be available, even when the manual start test button circuit is
activated.
9.9.7.5 Starter motor
The electric starter motor shall incorporate a moveable pinion which will engage
automatically with the flywheel gear rim. To avoid shock loading, the system shall not
apply full power to the starting motor until the pinion is fully engaged. The pinion shall not
be ejected from engagement by spasmodic engine firing. There shall be a means to
prevent attempted engagement when the engine is rotating.
The starter motor shall cease to operate and shall return to the rest position if the pinion
fails to engage with the flywheel gear ring, After a failure to engage, the starter motor
shall automatically make repeated attempts to achieve engagement.
When the engine starts the starter motor pinion shall withdraw from the flywheel gear ring
automatically by means initiated by an electro-mechanical speed sensor. Pressure
switches, for example on the engine lubrication system or water pump outlet, shall not be
used as a means of de-energising the starter motor.
Centrifugal speed switches or voltage generators used for sensing shall have a direct
coupling to, or be gear-driven by, the engine; flexible drives shall not be used.
9.9.8 Engine starter batteries

Engine starter batteries and chargers shall be as follows:
Two separate battery power supplies shall be provided and shall be used for no other
purpose.
Batteries shall be either open nickel-cadmium prismatic rechargeable cells complying with
DIN EN 60623 or lead acid positive batteries complying with the appropriate IEC and DIN
EN standards.
The electrolyte for lead acid batteries shall comply with the appropriate IEC and DIN EN
standards.
Batteries shall be selected, used, charged and maintained in accordance with the
requirements of these Guidelines and with any manufacturer's instructions.
80
A hydrometer, suitable for checking the density of the electrolyte, shall be provided for
non maintenance free batteries.
For class 1 systems only lead batteries with positive planté plate or positive tubular
plates as well as nickel-cadmium batteries shall be used. Any batteries with plates
equivalent to these with regard to their service life are permitted also. Car starter
batteries shall not be used. The batteries shall be able to ensure the starting and
control of the engine at a temperature of +5°C from trickle charge condition. During the
automatic starting procedure with six repeated attempts the voltage drop shall not
exceed 45% of the control voltage.
9.9.9 Battery chargers

Each starter battery shall be provided with an independent, continuously connected, fully
automatic, constant current and/or constant voltage charger. It shall be possible to
remove either charger while leaving the other operational.
Chargers for lead acid batteries shall provide a float voltage of 2,25 V ± 0,05 V per cell.
The nominal charging voltage shall be suitable for local conditions (climate, regular
maintenance, etc.). A boost charge facility shall be provided for charging to a higher
voltage not exceeding 2,7 V per cell. The charger output shall be between 3,5% and
7,5% of the 10 h capacity of the battery.
Chargers for nickel-cadmium batteries shall provide a float voltage of 1,445 V ± 0,025 V
per cell. The nominal charging voltage shall be suitable for local conditions (climate,
regular maintenance, etc.). A boost charge facility shall be provided for charging to a
higher voltage not exceeding 1,75 V per cell. The charger output shall be between 25%
and 167% of the 5h capacity of the battery.
9.9.10 Siting of batteries and chargers

Batteries shall be mounted on stands or stillages.
Note: The chargers may be mounted with the batteries and shall correspond to the
enclosure protection class of the controller.
Batteries and chargers should be located in readily accessible positions where the
likelihood of contamination by oil fuel, damp, pump set cooling water, or of damage by
vibration is minimal. The battery should be as close as possible to the engine starter
motor, subject to the above constraints, in order to minimise voltage drop between the
battery and starter motor terminal.
9.9.11 Starter alarm indication

The following conditions shall each be indicated both locally and at a responsibly manned
location by both warning lights and an additional audible signal for faults:
a) the use of any switch which prevents the pump starting automatically;
b) the failure of the engine to start by the end of the six cyclic attempts;
c) pump running.
The warning lights shall be appropriately marked.
The audible signals shall have an intensity of at least 75 dB at a distance of 1 m and be

silenceable. A test facility for the warning lights shall be provided.
81
9.9.12 Tools and spare parts

A standard kit of tools and spare parts as recommended by the engine and pump
manufacturers shall be provided.
9.9.13 Engine tests and exercising

Engine tests and exercising shall be as follows:
9.9.13.1 Supplier's test and certification of results
Each complete engine and pump set shall be tested on the supplier's test bed for not less
than 1,5 h at the rated flow. The following shall be recorded on the test certificate:
a) the engine speed with the pump churning;

b) the engine speed with the pump delivering water at the rated flow;
c) the pump churning pressure;
d) the suction head at the pump inlet;
e) the pump outlet pressure at the rated flow downstream of any outlet orifice plate;
f) the ambient temperature;
g) the cooling water temperature rise at the end of the 1,5 h run;
h) the cooling water flow rate;
i) the lubricating oil temperature rise at the end of the test run;
j) where the engine is fitted with a heat exchanger, the initial temperature and the
temperature rise of the engine closed circuit cooling water.
9.9.13.2 Site commissioning test
When commissioning an installation the automatic starting system of the diesel engine
driven pump set shall be activated with the fuel supply isolated for the six cycles each of
not less than 15 s cranking and not more than 15 s or less than 10 s rest. After
completion of the six starting cycles the fail to start alarm shall operate. The fuel supply
shall then be restored and the pump set shall start when the manual start test button is
operated.
The start and pause times modified compared to 9.9.7.2 can also be effected by means
of the emergency manual starting system.
Where the test may be done otherwise and without any further auxiliary means, an
isolation of the fuel supply may be omitted. In this case, the procedure shall be specified
in the operation manual which shall be affixed to the engine or provided if required.
82
10 Installation type and size
10.1 Wet pipe installations

10.1.1 General
Wet pipe installations are permanently charged with water under pressure. Wet pipe
installations should be installed only in premises where there is no possibility of frost
damage, and where the ambient temperature will not exceed 95°C.
Note: Wet pipe installations shall be vented.
10.1.2 Protection against freezing

Pipework subject to freezing may be protected by anti-freeze liquid or electrical trace
heating or subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions.
Note 1: The size of any one anti-freeze extension should not exceed 20 sprinklers.
Note 2: The total number of sprinklers on anti-freeze extensions should not exceed 100.
An anti-freeze solution shall be prepared with freezing point below the expected minimum
temperature for the locality (see 18.3.3).
In the case of a trace heating system, the piping shall be provided with non-combustible
insulation in accordance with DIN 4102, building material class A. Duplicate heating
elements shall be provided over the complete length of the frost-endangered pipework.
Even in the case of a failure of one of the two heating elements a minimum temperature
of 5°C shall be maintained. Each circuit shall be electrically monitored and triggered by
separate temperature sensors.
The design of the trace heating including insulation shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications.
The trace heating system shall be monitored for power supply failure and failure of the
heating elements or sensors. Any fault warning of the trace heating shall be transmitted
to a permanently manned location.
For subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions, see 10.5.
10.1.3 Sprinkler orientation

Where possible the sprinklers shall be fitted in the upright position to avoid mechanical
damage and the collection of foreign matter in the sprinkler fittings and to make it easier
to drain the pipe network.
10.1.4 Size of installations

The number of sprinklers to be controlled by a wet alarm valve, including any sprinklers in
a subsidiary extension, shall not exceed that shown in Table 10.01.
The number of sprinklers specified in Table 10.01 and Clause 19 may include those
sprinklers resulting from the maximum permitted protection areas according to Tables
11.01 resp. 11.02. For installations acc. 11.5 and 11.6 the permitted protection area shall
be assumed to be 9 m².
83
Where additional voids and machinery are protected, the number of sprinklers may be
increased by 200.
Hazard class Maximum number of sprinklers
LH 500
OH, including any LH sprinklers 1 000, except as allowed in Annexes D and F
HH, including any OH and LH sprinklers 1 000
Table 10.01: Maximum number of sprinklers per installation – wet pipe and
pre-action installations
The actual number of sprinklers installed shall not, however, exceed the number specified
in Table 10.01 and Clause 19 by more than twice the amount.
Example ceiling protection
Fire hazard: HHS3
Building surface (L x W): 160 m x 54 m
Required calculated sprinklers, ceiling protection:
160m ⋅ 54m
= 960 sprinklers
9m 2
One alarm valve station is sufficient, provided that not more than 2000 effectively
installed sprinklers are connected to this group.
Example rack protection
Rack length: 150 m
Rack width: 2,2 m
Number of racks: 10
Number of sprinkler levels: 8
Required calculated sprinklers, rack protection:
10 ⋅ 8 ⋅ 150m ⋅ 2,2m
= 2934 sprinklers
9m 2
Three alarm valve stations are sufficient, provided that not more than 2000 effectively
installed sprinklers are connected to each group.
Required calculated sprinklers in total: 3894 sprinklers
As the number of required calculated sprinklers falls below 5000, a water supply type 3 is
sufficient for installations of class 1.
84
If two or more storeys are supplied via one alarm valve station, drainage shall be
divided into storeys by check valves, and alarms shall be divided into storeys by water
flow alarm switches.
10.2 Dry pipe installations

10.2.1 General
Dry pipe installations are normally charged with air or inert gas under pressure
downstream of the dry alarm valve and water under pressure upstream of the dry alarm
valve.
Grid and loop systems shall not be used in dry pipe systems. (This also refers to pre-
action and alternate systems.)
A permanent air/inert gas supply to maintain the pressure in the pipe network shall be
installed. The installation shall be pressurised to within the pressure range recommended
by the alarm valve manufacturer.
Dry pipe installations shall only be installed where there is a possibility of frost damage or
the temperature exceeds 95°C, e.g. in drying ovens.
In the case of more than two dry alarm valve stations two compressors minimum shall be
installed.
For charging the pipework of dry pipe installations with compressed air, an air
compressor or an equivalent compressed air supply shall be provided as follows:
− effective supply quantity 8 m³/h

− maximum charging time 1h

All sprinklers in a dry pipe installation shall be fitted in the upright position, except where
dry pendent pattern or sidewall sprinklers are used.
Dry pendent sprinklers shall only be installed sideways or upwards. Where they are
installed sideways, the pipe shall be either galvanised or two nominal widths larger than
the connection thread of the dry pendent sprinkler.

The net volume of the pipework downstream of the alarm valve station shall not exceed
that shown in Table 10.02.
The values specified in Table 10.02 are benchmarks. The charging time of the pipework
is relevant (period of time between opening and water discharge at the test facility at the
end of the pipework).
If the charging time requirements are met, the pipework volume may be larger than that
specified in Table 10.02.
Note: It is strongly recommended that dry and alternate installations should not be used
for HHS applications, since the delay in water reaching the first operating sprinklers could
seriously impair the effectiveness of the system.
85
Design Maximum volume of pipework (m3)

Without accelerator or exhauster 1,5
With accelerator or exhauster 4,0
Table 10.02: Maximum size per installation – Dry and alternate installations
Accelerators and exhausters accelerate the opening of dry alarm valve stations. Sprinkler
installations for HHP and HHS shall generally be fitted with accelerators or exhausters.
The pipework downstream of the alarm valve stations of dry pipe installations shall be
dimensioned such that a charging time of 90 s is met by installations with a design
density of ≤ 5 mm/min and 60 s by installations with a higher design density. Charging
time is the time between opening and water discharge at the test facility at the end of the
pipework.
In multi-storey buildings not more than one storey shall be connected to an alarm valve
station.
10.3 Alternate installations

10.3.1 General
Alternate installations incorporate either an alternate alarm valve or composite set
comprising a wet alarm valve and a dry alarm valve. During the winter months the system
piping downstream of the alternate or dry alarm valve is charged with air or inert gas
under pressure and the remainder of the installation upstream of the alarm valve with
water under pressure. At other times of the year the installation operates as a wet pipe
installation.

All sprinklers in an alternate installation shall be fitted in the upright position, except
where dry pendent pattern or sidewall sprinklers are used.

The net volume of the pipework downstream of the alarm valve station shall not exceed
10.4 Pre-action installations

10.4.1 General
Pre-action installations are divided into two types:
10.4.1.1 Pre-action installation Type A
This is a dry pipe system in which the alarm valve station is activated by an automatic fire
detection system but not by the operation of the sprinklers. In the event of a fire detection
fault, the pre-action installation shall operate as a dry pipe installation with the specified
charging times.
86
The air/inert gas pressure in the installation shall be monitored at all times. Consideration
shall be given to fit a manually operated valve in an appropriate position to enable the
pre-action valve to be activated in an emergency.
pipework.
station.
Note: Type A pre-action installations should only be installed in areas where considerable
damage could occur if there were an accidental discharge of water.
10.4.1.2 Pre-action installation Type B (alternate installation)
This is a dry pipe system in which the alarm valve station is opened either by an
automatic fire detection system or by the operation of the sprinklers. Independently of the
response of the detectors, a pressure drop in the pipework causes the opening of the
alarm valve.
pipework.
station.
Note: Type B pre-action installations may be installed wherever a dry pipe system is
called for and the spread of fire is expected to be rapid, e.g. in high-rack storage. They
may also be used instead of ordinary dry pipe systems with or without an accelerator or
exhauster.

The sprinklers shall be installed in the upright position or as dry pendent sprinklers.
10.4.3 Automatic detection system

The detection system shall be installed in all rooms and compartments protected by the
pre-action sprinkler system and shall comply with the relevant parts of EN 54 as well as
VdS 2095, VdS Guidelines for automatic fire detection and fire alarm systems, planning
and installation, VdS 2496, VdS Guidelines for the triggering of fire extinguishing
systems.

The number of sprinklers to be controlled by a pre-action alarm valve shall not exceed
87
10.5 Subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions

10.5.1 General
Subsidiary dry pipe or alternate extensions shall be as specified in 10.2 and 10.3 except
that they will be of limited extent and form extensions to standard wet pipe installations.
They shall be installed only as follows:
a) as a dry pipe or alternate extension to a wet pipe installation in small areas where there
is possible frost damage in an otherwise adequately heated building;
b) as a dry pipe extension to a wet pipe or alternate installation in cold stores and high
temperature ovens or drying rooms.

Sprinklers in a subsidiary shall be fitted in the upright position where there is a possibility
of frost damage, except where dry pendent pattern sprinklers are used.
10.5.3 Size of subsidiary extensions

The number of sprinklers on any subsidiary extension shall not exceed 100. Where more
than two subsidiary extensions are controlled by one alarm valve, the total number of
sprinklers in the subsidiary extensions shall not exceed 250.
10.6 Subsidiary multiple control valve

Sprinkler system extension controlled by multiple control valve utilising sprinklers or
sprayers connected to a sprinkler installation via their own actuation valve (or multiple
control valve).
Water spray extensions may be connected to a sprinkler installation, provided that the
connection is not greater than DN 80 and that the additional water demand is taken into
consideration when designing the water supplies (see Clause 7).
These installations are installed where there are expected to be intensive fires with a very
fast rate of fire spread and where it is desirable to apply water over a complete area in
which a fire may originate and spread.
11 Spacing and location of sprinklers
11.1 General
11.1.1 All measurements of sprinkler spacing shall be taken in the horizontal plane
except where otherwise specified in these Guidelines.
In high rooms the sprinkler installation may not be able to provide adequate protection.
Therefore, the sprinkler spacing to the floor shall not exceed 15 m, except in rack storage
with sprinkler protection in intermediate levels. Any larger spacing shall be agreed with
the authorities.
88
11.1.2 A clear space shall always be maintained below the deflector of roof and ceiling
sprinklers of at least:
− 0,5 m for LH and OH except for suspended open ceilings;

− 0,8 m for suspended open ceilings;
− 1,0 m for HHP and HHS.
11.1.3 Sprinklers shall be installed upright, pendent or horizontal as specified by the

manufacturer.
The spacing of upright sprinklers from the upper edge of the pipe to the deflector with
pipes > DN 65 shall be at least 1,5 times the pipe diameter.
11.2 Maximum area per sprinkler

The maximum area of coverage per sprinkler shall be as given in Table 11.01 for
sprinklers other than sidewall and in Table 11.02 for sidewall sprinklers.
Hazard class Maximum area Maximum spacings in Figure 11.01 (m)

per sprinkler
Standard layout Staggered layout
S D S D
m²
m m m m
LH 21,0 4,6 4,6 6,1 6,1
OH 12,0 4,0 4,0 5,0 5,0
HHP and HHS 9,0 3,75 3,75 4,4 4,4
Table 11.01: Maximum coverage and spacing for sprinklers other than sidewall
0,5 S 0,25 S
S 0,75 S
S
S
0,5 S
0,5 S D D 0,5 D D D
0,5 D 0,5 D
0,5 D
Figure 11.01: Ceiling sprinkler spacing
89
Hazard Maximum Spacing along walls Room Room Rows of Spacing

class area per width length side wall pattern
between sprinkler
sprinkler (w) (l) sprinklers (horizontal
sprinklers to end of
plane)
wall
m² m m m m
LH 17,0 4,6 2,3 w ≤ 3,7 any 1 single line
3,7 < w ≤ 9,2 2 standard
≤ 7,4
> 9,2 2 staggered
1)
w >7,4 any 2 standard
2)
OH 9,0 3,4 1,8 w ≤ 3,7 any 1 single line
3,7 < w ≤ 6,8 2 standard
≤ 7,4
> 6,8 2 staggered
1)
w > 7,4 2 standard
1) An additional row or rows of roof or ceiling sprinklers is/are needed.
2) May be increased to 3,7 m provided the ceiling has a fire resistance of not less than 120 minutes (see
Annex R, Table R.6).
Notes:
The sprinkler deflectors shall be located between 0,1 m and 0,15 m below the ceiling and between 0,05 m and
0,15 m horizontally from the wall.
There shall be no obstruction at the ceiling within a square extending along the wall 1,0 m on each side of the
sprinkler and 1,8 m perpendicular to the wall.
Where beams or girders occur, the bays thus formed shall be protected separately.
Table 11.02: Maximum coverage and spacing for sidewall sprinklers
11.3 Minimum distance between sprinklers

Sprinklers shall not be installed at intervals less than 2 m except in the following cases:
− where arrangements are made to prevent adjacent sprinklers from wetting each
other, e.g. with horizontal baffles;
− intermediate sprinklers in racks (11.5.3 and 11.6.1.4).
− For sprinklers in ceiling openings 11.4.10 applies.
11.4 Location of sprinklers in relation to building, facilities and

equipment
11.4.1 Distance from walls
The maximum distance from walls and partitions to the sprinklers shall be the smallest
value applicable from the following list:
− 2,0 m for standard spacing;

− 2,3 m for staggered spacing;
− 1,5 m where the ceiling or roof is open joisted or the rafters are exposed;
− 1,5 m from the open face of open faced buildings.
The distance to the wall shall not fall below 0,1 m.
90
11.4.2 Distance from ceiling

Sprinklers shall wherever possible be situated with the deflector between 0,075 m and
0,15 m below the ceiling or roof except when they are fitted in false ceilings. Where this is
not practicable sprinklers may be installed at lower levels provided that the figures given
in 11.4.6 are adhered to and that the height b is the maximum possible.
Sprinklers shall never be installed lower than 0,3 m below the underside of ceilings made
of combustible materials or 0,45 m below roofs or ceilings made of non-combustible
materials. Where circumstances make it unavoidable to use the maximum distances of
0,3 m and 0,45 m, the area involved shall be as small as possible.
In the case of trapezoidal roofs the minimum sprinkler distance to the ceiling shall be
measured from the lowest part of the crimp and for the maximum distance from the centre
between lowest and highest part of the crimp.
Where ceilings are divided into bays by transverse and longitudinal joists and inside
these bays the minimum distances to the joists in accordance with 11.4.6 cannot be
adhered to, sprinklers shall be installed in all bays. In this case all sprinklers shall be
located centrally between the joists.
Where a smoke-proof space is formed in ribbed or joisted ceilings, whose width

(dimension between axes) does not exceed 2 m and whose length does not exceed
25 m, the sprinkler distance to the ceiling may exceed that specified above. The
sprinklers shall then extend into the space in their overall height in accordance with Table
11.03. If the space is not smoke-proof or longer than 25 m, the ceiling distances shall be
adhered to.
11.4.3 Slope of rooms

Sprinklers shall be installed with their deflectors parallel to the slope of the roof or ceiling.
Where the slope is greater than 30° a row of sprinklers shall be fixed at the apex or not
more than 0,75 m radially therefrom.
Note 1: With a roof slope < 30° the sprinklers shall be positioned such that the maximum
admissible ceiling distance is kept even to the apex.
Note 2: Table 11.03 and Clause 11.4.6 do not apply to sprinklers fixed at the apex.
11.4.4 Canopies
The distance from the edge of a canopy to the sprinklers shall not exceed 1,5m.
11.4.5 Skylights
Skylights with a volume greater than 1 m3 measured above the normal ceiling level shall
be sprinkler protected unless the distance from the normal ceiling level to the top of the
skylight does not exceed 0,3 m, or there is a tight fitting frame and glass fitted level with
the roof or ceiling.
It would be adequate to protect a skylight of 7 m2 maximum and a height of 1,5 m by

ceiling sprinklers with a sensitivity that is at least one class higher than required by these
Guidelines for the respective risk.
91
11.4.6 Beams, joists, etc.

When the deflector is positioned above the level of the underside of beams or joists etc.,
the dimensions of 11.4.2, Figure 11.02 and Table 11.03 shall be observed in order to
ensure that effective discharge of the sprinklers is not impaired or else the beam shall be
protected on either side as though it were a wall.
d
b
Figure 11.02: Sprinkler location relative to beams and joists
Figure 11.03: Diagram of sprinkler location in roof trusses
92
The distance from girders or beams to the sprinklers shall be at least 0,2 m, or
alternatively sprinklers may be positioned directly above a girder or beam non wider than
0,2m at a vertical distance of at least 0,15 m.
11.4.7 Roof trusses

Sprinklers shall be located at least 0,3 m laterally from truss members which are no more
than 0,1 m wide. If the width is greater than 0,1 m the minimum lateral distance shall be
0,6 m. Alternatively sprinklers may be positioned directly above a truss no wider than
0,2 m at a vertical distance of at least 0,15 m.
11.4.8 Columns
If roof or ceiling sprinklers are placed closer than 0,6 m to one side of a column, another
sprinkler shall be placed within 2 m from the column on the opposite side.
Minimum Maximum height of sprinkler deflector above (+) or below (-) bottom of
horizontal beam or joist (b in Figure 11.02)
distance from m
sprinkler vertical
axis to side of Conventional sprinkler Spray sprinkler Flat spray sprinkler
beam or joist (a in
Figure 11.02)
Upright Pendent Upright Pendent
m
0,20 -0,20 not allowed not allowed not allowed not allowed
0,40 0,00 not allowed 0,00 0,00
0,60 0,03 not allowed 0,02 0,06 -0,044
0,80 0,06 not allowed 0,03 0,12 -0,020
1,00 0,10 -0,20 0,05 0,20 0,004
1,20 0,15 -0,17 0,10 0,28 0,028
1,40 0,19 -0,12 0,13 0,36 0,052
1,60 0,26 -0,03 0,16 0,47 0,076
1,80 0,39 0,17 0,18 0,67 0,100
Note: Dimensions may be interpolated
Table 11.03: Sprinkler location relative to beams or joists
93
0,7
maximum height of sprinkler deflector above (+) or below (-) 0,6

Minimum horizontal distance from vertical sprinkler axis to
0,5
0,4 Standard sprinkler upright

bottom of beam or joist (b in Figure 11.02)
Standardsprinkler pendent
Spray sprinkler upright
0,3 Spray sprinkler pendent
Flat spray sprinkler
0,2
0,1
-0,1
-0,2
0 0,25 0,5 0,75 1 1,25 1,5 1,75 2
Lateral surface of beams and joists (a in Figure 11.02)
Figure 11.04: Sprinkler distances to joists and other elements
11.4.9 Platforms, landings, mezzanines, ducts etc.

Sprinklers shall be provided under platforms, landings, mezzanines, ducts, heating
panels, galleries, walkways etc. which are impermeable to water and:
a) rectangular, more than 0,8 m wide and less than 0,15 m from adjacent walls or
partitions;
b) rectangular and more than 1,0 m wide;
c) circular, more than 1,0 m in diameter and less than 0,15 m from adjacent walls or
partitions;
d) circular and more than 1,2 m in diameter.
Design density and area of operation for the sprinklers underneath the platform shall be
in accordance with Cl. 6 and with the respective application.
For 11.4.9.1 and 11.4.9.2 no reduction of the sprinklers to be considered for hydraulic
calculation in accordance with G.3.1 can be applied.
11.4.9.1 Platforms, landings, mezzanines, etc. with LH and OH risks
The number of sprinklers shall be increased around the edge of the platform in
accordance with 11.4.10. The distances between sprinklers shall not exceed 2 m or fall
below 1,5 m. If the minimum distance of 1,5 m cannot be observed due to constructional
reasons such as beams, smaller distances will be possible, provided that adjacent
sprinklers cannot spray each other.
The horizontal distance between the sprinklers and the edge of the platform shall not
exceed 0,5 m. The sprinklers in the platform edge area shall be capable of supplying the
minimum flow rate of the sprinklers in the rest of the area. For hydraulic calculation only
the sprinklers located at the longer edge of the platform need be considered.
94
11.4.9.2 Platforms, landings, mezzanines, etc. with HH risks
For dimensioning the pipework, the area of operation underneath each platform shall be
in accordance with the respective fire hazard class, unless the platform is smaller than
the area of operation.
In a second calculation the water supply is designed. If the maximum storage height
requires no higher design density than 10 mm/min, 45 m² per level shall be considered in
addition to the area of operation with the highest water rate (e.g. for ceiling protection of
the building), in any case not less than 90 m². If the design density exceeds 10 mm/min,
90 m² in addition to the area of operation with the highest water rate (e.g. for ceiling
protection of the building) shall be considered.
11.4.10 Escalators and stair wells

The number of sprinklers shall be increased around the ceiling opening formed by
escalators, stairs etc. Sprinklers shall not be more than 2 m nor less than 1,5 m away
from each other. If, owing to the design of the structure, e.g. girders, the minimum
distance of 1,5 m cannot be maintained, smaller spacing may be used provided adjacent
sprinklers are not able to wet each other.
The horizontal distance between the sprinklers and the opening in the ceiling shall not
exceed 0,5 m. If the allowable distance between sprinkler and ceiling is exceeded (e.g. in
the case of joists), these sprinklers shall be installed in addition to the sprinklers for
ceiling protection. The sprinklers in the region of the opening shall be capable of
providing the minimum flow rate for sprinklers in the rest of the ceiling protection. For
hydraulic calculation purposes, only the sprinklers on the longer side of the opening need
be considered.
11.4.11 Vertical shafts and chutes

At least one sprinkler shall be installed at the top of all shafts except where the shaft is
inaccessible and made of non-combustible materials and contains no combustible
materials except electrical cabling.
Note: The maximum permitted fire load acc. 4.1.1 n) relating to the cross sectional area
of the shaft shall not be exceeded.
In shafts with combustible surfaces, sprinklers shall be installed at each alternate floor
level and at the top of any trapped section.
11.4.12 Ceiling obstructions

The use of suspended ceiling material below the sprinklers is not allowed unless the
material has been shown not to impair sprinkler protection.
Where sprinklers are fitted below suspended ceilings, the ceiling material shall be of a
type which has been shown not to be subject to partial collapse under incipient fire
conditions.
95
11.4.13 Suspended open ceilings

Suspended open ceilings, i.e. ceilings having a regular open cell construction recurring
throughout their design, may be used beneath LH and OH sprinkler systems not involving
storage areas where the following conditions are met:
− the ceiling – not the suspended open ceiling – shall be made of non-combustible
materials;
− the total plan open area of the suspended open ceiling, including light fittings, shall
not be less than 70% of the ceiling plan area;
− the minimum dimension of the ceiling openings shall be no less than 0,025 m or no
less than the vertical thickness of the suspended ceilings, whichever is the greater;
− the structural integrity of the ceiling and any other equipment, such as light fittings
within the volume above the suspended ceiling, shall not be affected by operation of
the sprinkler system.
Sprinklers shall be installed as follows:
− sprinkler spacing above the ceiling shall not exceed 3 m;

− vertical separation between any conventional or spray sprinkler deflector and the top
of the suspended ceiling shall not be less than 0,8 m. This distance may be reduced
to 0,3 m if flat spray sprinklers are used;
− supplementary sprinklers shall be provided to discharge below light fittings or similar
obstructions exceeding 0,8 m in width.
Where obstructions within the ceiling void are likely to cause significant interference of
the water discharge they shall be treated as walls for the purpose of sprinkler spacing.
11.4.14 Drying ovens and extraction hoods

Drying ovens, extraction hoods and similar equipment shall be protected from the
inside. Sprinklers outside this equipment within a radius of 3 m shall have the same
nominal operating temperature as the sprinklers inside, but 141 °C maximum.
11.4.15 Vertical voids

Vertical voids (e.g. wall or façade voids) more than 100 mm in depth, which are limited
by vertical combustible materials and have an expansion of more than 100 m², shall be
sprinklered.
11.4.16 Cold rooms

Cold rooms shall be protected by dry sprinklers. If dry pendent sprinklers are
connected to a wet pipe system, 10.2.2 shall be complied with. The connections of the
dry sprinklers shall extend into the tempered area by 0,5 m minimum.
96
11.4.17 False ceilings and false floors

False floors ≤ 500 mm in height shall be protected by quick response flat spray
sprinklers; for higher false floors spray sprinklers shall be used.
The arrangement of sprinklers in voids shall disregard the combustibility of the false
ceilings. The protection areas of sprinklers in voids may be as follows, regardless of
5.4:
- 21 m² in voids > 1 m height with non-combustible ceilings
- 15 m² in voids > 1 m height with combustible ceilings
- 12 m² in voids > 0,5 m and ≤ 1 m
- 9 m² in voids ≥ 0,3 m and ≤ 0,5 m
In voids < 0,3 m the protection area shall be agreed with VdS.
11.4.18 Protection of cable trays

This clause only applies to cable trays located above, beside or up to a vertical distance
of 500 mm under the ceiling sprinklers or sprinklers in false ceilings.
If the sprinklers are installed above the cable trays, any possible obstructions resulting
from this shall be taken into account.
For the protection of the cable tray with a fire load between 7 kWh/m and 21 kWh/m the
ceiling protection sprinklers or sprinklers in false ceilings can be used, provided that the
adjacent sprinkler row does not exceed a distance between ceiling and deflector of
150 mm. The sprinklers shall be arranged such that the horizontal distance from the
centre of the cable tray to the sprinkler does not exceed half the allowable sprinkler
distance.
Above 21 kWh/m additional sprinklers shall be installed for protecting the cable tray. The
requirements of G 3.1 shall be fulfilled.
With cable trays the following cases shall be considered:
Note: The cable fire load shall be calculated in accordance with Annex S.
Case 1: Fire load ≥ 7 kWh/m Case 2: Fire load ≥ 21 kWh/m
max. 0,15 m
Max. half the Ceiling

allowable sprinkler protection
distance
The sprinklers shall be installed The cable tray shall be protected

≤ 0,15 m under the ceiling in the by additional sprinklers
cable tray area
97
11.5 Intermediate sprinklers in High Hazard occupancies

11.5.1 General
Sprinklers protecting double row racks shall be positioned in the longitudinal flues,
preferably in the intersection with transverse flues (see Figures 11.07 and 11.08). Up to a
flue width of 700 mm the sprinklers may be positioned in the longitudinal flues. If the flues
are wider than this, the sprinklers shall be positioned in the rack.
The protection of small parts rack storage in accordance with 11.5 shall be agreed with
VdS.
Sprinklers positioned outside of racks shall – as illustrated in Figure 11.05 – by no

means be further away from the nearer outer edge of the storage than 350 mm and not
further away from the further outer edge than 1600 mm.
Border case
= 1.600 Flue width > 700mm = 3.200

Sprinkler in rack
= 350 B/2 B/2
= 350 = 350
= 700 > 700 B = 700
Figure 11.05: Sprinkler layout in relation to flue width
Note: Exceptions are racks between 3,2 m and 6,4 m in depth with only one longitudinal
flue.
Whenever any rack or structural steelwork is likely to interfere significantly with the water
discharge from the sprinklers, additional sprinklers shall be provided and taken into
account in the flow calculation.
Note: For the number of sprinklers required see 6.2.3.3.
With a horizontal sprinkler spacing of less than 1,2 m additional sprinklers are not
required, provided that a staggered sprinkler spacing ensures the water discharge in
each flue.
98
Obstruction (e.g. rack support)
≤ 1,2 m
≤ 1,2 m
Figure 11.06 Abandonment of additional sprinklers with horizontal sprinkler spacing ≤ 1,2 m
It shall be ensured that water from sprinklers operating at intermediate levels can
penetrate the goods stored. The distance between goods stored in racking and placed
back to back shall be at least 0,15 m, and if necessary pallet stops should be fitted. There
shall be a clearance of at least 0,15 m from the sprinkler deflectors to the top of the
storage.
Note: Regarding flat spray sprinklers see 12.2.4.
11.5.2 Maximum vertical distance between sprinklers at intermediate

levels
The vertical distance from the floor to the lowest intermediate level and between levels
shall not exceed 3,50 m or two tiers, whichever is the lesser, as shown in Figures 11.07
and 11.08.
An intermediate level shall be installed above the top level of storage except where all the
roof or ceiling sprinklers are situated at less than 4 m above the top of the storage.
Alternatively, this may be compensated by a design density at the ceiling increased by
2,5 mm/min. Above 5 m distance an additional increase by 1 mm/min per metre or part
thereof is sufficient.
In no case shall the highest level of intermediate sprinklers be installed lower than one
tier level below the top of the storage.
99
Figure 11.07: Location of rack intermediate level sprinklers Category I or II goods
100
Figure 11.08: Location of rack intermediate level sprinklers Category III or IV goods
11.5.3 Horizontal position of sprinklers at intermediate levels

In the case of Category I or II goods, sprinklers shall where possible be installed in the
longitudinal flue at the intersection with every second transverse flue, with the sprinklers
staggered with respect to the next highest row (see Figure 11.07). The horizontal
distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 3,75 m and the product of the horizontal
distance and the vertical distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 9,8 m².
In the case of Category III or IV goods, sprinklers shall be installed in the longitudinal flue
at the intersection with each transverse flue (see Figure 11.08). The horizontal distance
between sprinklers shall not exceed 1,9 m and the product of the horizontal distance and
the vertical distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 4,9 m².
Where the horizontal distance between two sprinklers falls below 2 m, appropriate
provision shall be made to prevent sprinklers from wetting each other.
11.5.4 Numbers of rows of sprinklers at each level

The number of sprinkler rows per level shall be determined by the total width. When
racking is placed back to back the total width shall be calculated by adding together the
width of each rack and the distance between them.
One row of sprinklers per level shall be installed for every 3,2 m of rack width. They shall
be installed in the flues wherever possible.
101
11.5.5 HHS intermediate sprinklers in non-shelved racks

Intermediate sprinklers shall be provided for palletised rack storage and multiple row
drive through storage (see type ST4 in Table 6.02):
a) single row racks not more than 1,6 m wide shall be protected by single rows of
sprinklers fitted on the side of the stack not used for access as shown in Figures 11.05
and 11.06;
Note: Such racks are generally positioned against walls. The sprinkler rows shall by no
means be fitted on the side of the stack used for access. With racks more than 1,6m
wide the sprinklers shall be positioned in the racks.
b) double row racks not more than 3,2 m wide shall be protected by sprinklers positioned
centrally in the longitudinal flues, at the stack ends, and at the tier levels shown in
Figures 11.05 and 11.06;
c) double or multiple row racks more than 3,2 m wide, but not more than 6,4 m wide shall
be protected by two rows of sprinklers installed not more than 3,2 m apart; each row
shall have the same distance from the nearest shelf edge. The sprinklers at a particular
level in each line shall be located in the same set of transverse flues.
In each double or multiple row rack sprinklers shall be installed in each middle flue
(longitudinal flue). The detailed design shall be agreed with VdS Schadenverhütung.
The following figures show examples for Categories I and II as well as Categories III and IV.
Figure 11.09: Sprinkler layout at intermediate levels of multiple row racks – Materials of
Category I or II
For the hydraulic calculation 27 sprinklers maximum shall be considered. With more than
3 middle flues (longitudinal flues) this layout is extended accordingly.
102
Figure 11.10: Sprinkler layout at intermediate levels of multiple row racks – Materials of
Category III or IV
For the hydraulic calculation 27 sprinklers maximum shall be considered. With more than
3 middle flues (longitudinal flues) this layout is extended accordingly.
Where any rack or structural steelwork could significantly interfere with the water
distribution from a sprinkler, an additional sprinkler shall be provided.
Rack sprinklers shall be fitted with water shields to prevent them from wetting each other.
The water shields shall be fitted directly to the sprinklers.
11.5.6 HHS intermediate sprinklers below solid or slatted shelves in racks

(ST5 and ST6)
Intermediate sprinklers shall be provided underneath each shelf (including the top shelf if
the roof or ceiling sprinklers are more than 4 m above the goods or water access to the
goods is restricted), and located as shown in Table 11.04 and Figure 11.11. The vertical
distance between rows shall not exceed 3,5 m.
Single rows of sprinklers shall be positioned centrally underneath the shelves. Double
rows of sprinklers shall be positioned so that each row has the same distance from the
nearest shelf edge.
The distance from the end of the shelf parallel to the branch pipe lines to the nearest
sprinkler shall be half the sprinkler spacing along the branch lines or 1,6 m, whichever is
the smaller.
103
Shelf Rows of Maximum Maximum distance Minimum clearance between

width sprinklers distance between between rows of sprinkler deflector in any row
s sprinklers along sprinklers and storage immediately
rows below
m n m m m
s<1 1 2,8 - 0,15
1<s<3 1 2,8 - 0,15
3<s<6 2 2,8 2,8 0,15
Note: Regarding flat spray sprinklers see 12.2.4.
Table 11.04: Location of intermediate sprinklers in type ST5 and ST6 storage
Figure 11.11: Location of intermediate sprinklers in type ST5 and ST6 storage
In racks with solid shelves or walls accessible via grid platforms or solid shelves in
several tiers, sprinklers shall be arranged underneath each grid platform. With an aisle
width up to 1,4 m sprinklers may be positioned in mid-aisle with a maximum horizontal
spacing of 2,5 m. With an aisle width > 1,4 m two sprinkler rows with staggered layout
shall be positioned in the aisle near the racks. The horizontal sprinkler spacing shall not
exceed 5m, and the protection area of the sprinklers shall not be exceeded.
The a.m. requirements apply to solid platforms with fixtures impermeable to water, such
as platforms and mezzanines.
104
11.6 Alternative protection concept for “rack storage and high

rack storage”
11.6.1 Rack storage and high rack storage
11.6.1.1 Rating basis
High rack storage systems according to these Guidelines are racks with a storage height
of more than 7,5 m in HHS1 to HHS3 and more than 4,4 m in HHS4.
The maximum storage heights for rack storage (in accordance with Table 6.02) are the
threshold values for effective sprinkler protection with ceiling sprinklers.
For storage heights exceeding these threshold values rack sprinklers shall be installed in
tiers in addition to the ceiling sprinklers.
11.6.1.2 Spacing of tier levels
The distance between the tier levels of the rack sprinklers shall be the distance between
the deflectors of the sprinklers.
The following maximum vertical distances shall not be exceeded:
− HHS1 5,0 m
− HHS2 4,0 m
− HHS3 3,5 m
− HHS4 2,0 m
On the lowest tier level measurements shall be taken from the floor to the sprinkler
deflectors.
If a free space (access level) is available on the lowest tier level, which may not be used
for storage purposes, the maximum vertical distance may be exceeded by 5%. Design
density, horizontal sprinkler arrangement, etc. shall be in accordance with the effective
distance.
On the top tier level measurements shall be taken from the top of the storage to the
deflectors of the tier level below.
If these values cannot be complied with, any details of the protection concept shall be
agreed with VdS.
105
11.6.1.3 Design density
With rack protection in accordance with 11.6 for ST4, ST5 and ST6 the rack sprinklers
may have the following design density depending on the storage height:
Category Storage height in m Minimum design density

ST4, ST5, ST6 in mm/min
HHS1 4,0 5,0
HHS1 5,0 6,8
HHS2 3,1 5,0
HHS2 4,0 7,5
HHS3 2,1 5,0
HHS3 2,9 7,5
HHS3 3,5 10,0
HHS4 1,2 5,0
HHS4 1,6 7,5
HHS4 2,0 10,0
Table 11.05: Design criteria for rack sprinklers
Any systems shall be fully calculated. An interpolation of the values is possible.
The design density calculated for rack sprinklers positioned in tier levels results from the
distances between these levels in accordance with Table 11.05.
In accordance with Table 11.05 the design density of ceiling sprinklers shall be calculated
for the highest storage height above the topmost sprinkler tier level (7,5 mm/min
minimum).
11.6.1.4 Area of operation, sprinkler arrangement
The area of operation of each tier level shall be assumed to be 45 m². Irrespective of the
effective rack dimensions a rack length of 14 m with a theoretical depth of 3,2 m shall be
assumed. Even if the effective depth falls below 3,2 m, the flow rates of rack sprinklers
shall be calculated based on the theoretical depth.
If the longitudinal flue between double row racks falls below 100 mm, the rack sprinkler
arrangement shall be agreed with VdS.
In the case of rack depths greater than 3,2 m at least 2 sprinkler rows shall be installed
per rack level. The rack area of operation of 90 m² is a product of 14 m rack length and a
theoretical rack depth of 6,4 m. The middle flue shall be protected as well.
The area of operation of ceiling sprinklers shall be assumed to be 300 m² if the total
storage height requires a higher design density than 17,5 mm/min.
Area of operation:
HHS1………………9,7 m
HHS2………………7,5 m
HHS3………………5,2 m
HHS4………………3,0 m
106
The sprinklers on each tier level shall be installed staggered. The rack sprinklers shall, on
principle, be arranged such that they protect as many vertical flues as possible. If sheet
barriers are fitted above each sprinkler level, a staggered layout will not be required.
The horizontal sprinkler spacing in the rack depends on both rack construction and
platform assembly. The maximum distance on one sprinkler level is 2,5 m. If in the case
of a staggered sprinkler layout the maximum permitted vertical distance between the
sprinkler levels is fallen below, the horizontal sprinkler spacing may be increased in direct
relation of the maximum permitted tier level distance to the selected tier level distance.
However, the horizontal sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 4,0 m.
With a sprinkler spacing of ≤ 1,5 m an installation is possible irrespective of the flues. The
sprinklers on the sprinkler levels shall be installed staggered.
Example:
In HHS3 risks the distance between two sprinkler levels shall not exceed 3,5 m. If the
effective distance is 2,3 m, the maximum horizontal sprinkler spacing will be calculated as
follows:
2,5m ⋅ 3,5m
= 3,8m
2,3m
With three sprinkler levels or more each flue shall be protected on one level minimum,
depending on the number of levels. The maximum permitted vertical sprinkler spacing
shall be as follows:
HHS1……………10,5 m
HHS2……………..8,0 m
HHS3……………..7,0 m
HHS4……………..6,0 m
The vertical distance between sprinkler deflector and upper edge of stored goods shall be
at least 150 mm. This space shall not be impaired by the rack construction.
The sprinkler brackets shall be positioned lengthwise of the rack. The sprinkler deflector
shall be positioned at the same height or below adjacent obstructions; in the case of
manual loading of racks pendent sprinklers may be installed not more than 5 mm higher
(measured to the deflector).
Note: Rack deflection in the loaded condition shall be taken into account.
Where the horizontal distance between two sprinklers falls below 2 m, appropriate
measures shall be taken to prevent the sprinklers from wetting each other.
The number of tier levels to be taken into consideration for hydraulic calculation purposes
and the size of the ceiling area of operation may be reduced by the measures specified
below, only if no spray cans or flammable liquids are stored.
In the case of rack systems with more than four tier levels in which the horizontal sprinkler
spacing falls below 2,5 m, the number of tier levels to be taken into consideration may be
calculated as follows.
107
Note: The horizontal sprinkler spacing is calculated by dividing the rack length by the
number of sprinklers of one row; double sprinklers count as one sprinkler. In the case of
different numbers of sprinklers per row the average value shall be used.
x
N Z = N ges ⋅
2,5m
with:
NZ being the number of sprinkler tier levels to be taken into consideration;
Nges being the total number of sprinkler tier levels;
x being the average horizontal sprinkler spacing in the tier levels in m.
If the result of the calculation is not a whole number, the result shall be rounded up to the
nearest whole number. For rack protection purposes four sprinkler tier levels minimum
shall be taken into consideration.
The area of operation for each tier level shall be assumed to be 45 m² or 90 m². The area
of operation for ceiling sprinklers in wet pipe systems shall be assumed to be 300 m²,
provided that the total storage height requires a design density exceeding 17,5 mm/min.
If the horizontal sprinkler spacing falls below 2,5 m and if horizontal sheet barriers are
fitted above all sprinkler levels in the rack, the hydraulic calculation shall only be based
on the ceiling area of operation and on the areas of operation of the two hydraulically
most unfavourable tier levels in the rack. The supply pipes for rack protection shall be
dimensioned by assuming that the sprinklers in the four most unfavourable tier levels will
open.
The sheet barriers shall be installed immediately above a sprinkler level and fulfil the
following requirements:
− if the stored goods protrude over the rack, the sheet barrier shall lead at least to the
edge of the stored goods;
− they shall be made of sheet steel. If other non-combustible materials are to be used,
authorisation shall be obtained from VdS;
− horizontal sheet barriers shall not have gaps wider than 10 mm with rack elements
leading through them;
− the sum of all opening areas in a sheet barrier shall not exceed 5% of the total area;
− racks positioned closer than 700 mm to the wall shall have barriers leading to the wall
and sprinklers installed in the rack.
Note: If “Omega profiles” or similar profiles are used, it will not be necessary to provide a
sheet inside the profiles (see Figure 11.12).
108
Omega
gap 10cm max. profile
sheet barrier
Figure 11.12: Omega profile
If another sprinkler level and horizontal sheet barrier is fitted above the topmost stored
goods (see Figure 11.13) the ceiling area of operation may be reduced to 150 m². Above
the sheet barrier no storage is permitted.
ceiling area of
sheet operation
barrier
sheet capping 150m² min.
stored goods
≈ ≈
Figure 11.13: Sheet barrier and sprinkler level above topmost stored goods
11.6.1.5 Additional sprinklers due to obstructions to spray
Obstructions caused by the rack construction shall be compensated by additional

sprinklers. These sprinklers shall also be designed for the flow rate required.
11.6.1.6 Sprinkler layout in single racks at building wall
If the rack or pallets protruding from the rack is/are positioned at a distance of more than
0,7 m to the building wall or another rack, sprinklers shall be installed mid-rack.
If the rack or pallets protruding from the rack is/are positioned at a distance of ≤ 0,7 m to
the building wall, the following will apply:
− with rack and pallet widths ≤ 1,6 m and one pallet only, sprinklers shall be installed
outside the rack between rack and building wall. With two pallets in a row the
sprinkler layout shall be agreed with the authorities;
− with rack or pallet widths > 1,6 m and mixed occupancy (one or two pallets in a row)
on each sprinkler level, sprinklers shall be installed mid-rack and additionally outside
the rack between rack and building wall.
109
11.6.1.7 Choice of sprinkler system
Wet pipe systems should be used. If a backed-up power supply is required and the
danger of frost cannot be excluded, a pre-action system type B (quick dry pipe system)
shall be installed instead of a dry pipe system. The ceiling area of operation shall be
increased by 25% compared to that of wet pipe systems.
11.6.1.8 Water supply
The capacity of the extinguishing water storage tank (with full storage) shall be calculated
based on the water quantity of the hydraulic calculation.
The following formula may be used to estimate the required capacity:
V = 0,09 ⋅ ( A ⋅ B + R ⋅ C ⋅ D) ⋅ 1,4
V = capacity in m³
A = scheduled water design density at the ceiling in mm/min (Table 11.05, 7,5 mm/min
minimum)
B = area of operation at the ceiling in m²
C = number of sprinkler tier levels
D = required design density in the sprinkler tier levels in mm/min (acc. Table 11.05 ≥
5 mm/min)
R = rack area of operation in m²
11.6.1.9 Private reservoirs
The water capacity of private reservoirs shall provide an operating time of the sprinkler
system (without pressure tank) of not less than 10 min.
11.6.1.10 Power supply
For sprinkler systems in high rack storage with more than 80 sprinklers the power supply
shall be backed up.
11.6.1.11 Monitoring
The sprinkler system shall be monitored if the system requires a backed up power supply.
11.6.1.12 Operating time
The operating time of the sprinkler system may be reduced from 90 min to 60 min, if the
horizontal sprinkler spacing in the rack falls below 2,5 m and “special” or “quick” response
sprinklers are installed for ceiling protection.
This does not apply to the storage of spray cans or flammable liquids.
In the case of more than one sprinkler row per level and staggered sprinkler layout on the
branches of one level the spacing of 2,5 m refers to the nearest sprinkler on the adjacent
branch. The maximum sprinkler spacing of 4 m per branch shall not be exceeded for
reduction purposes.
110
11.6.2 Fixtures impermeable to water such as rack shelves

11.6.2.1 General
In racks with depths between > 1,2 m and < 3,2 m the sprinklers shall be installed
staggered at both outsides of the racks. The distance between sprinkler and outer edge
of the rack shall not exceed 100 mm. The vertical and horizontal sprinkler spacing shall
be the same as for small parts rack storage. This concept may also be used with racks
< 1,2 m in depth. Apart from these sprinklers, racks > 3,2 m in depth shall also have mid-
rack sprinklers.
Maximum vertical sprinkler spacing in racks with shelves impermeable to water:
HHS1………………….4 m
HHS2………………….3,1 m
HHS3………………….2,1 m
HHS4………………….1,2 m
The horizontal distance between the sprinklers of one intermediate level shall not exceed
4,0 m. The vertical distance between sprinkler deflector and upper edge of stored goods
shall be at least 150 mm.
The design discharge of the sprinklers at intermediate levels are calculated from the rack
or landing depth (calculationally at least 3,2 m) multiplied by the sprinkler distance and
the design density.
The areas of operation at intermediate levels are calculated from the rack or landing
length (calculationally 14 m max.) multiplied by the rack depth (calculationally at least
3,2 m or 6,4 m).
If the maximum possible storage height between two sprinkler levels falls below the
maximum storage height (4 m for HHS1; 3,1 m for HHS2; 2,1 m for HHS3 and 1,2 m for
HHS4), the calculation of the water supply can be based on an ideal number of levels.
The ideal number of levels is calculated as follows:
Y
nE =
h
nE = number of intermediate levels to be considered hydraulically
Y = total storage height of rack in m
h = maximum storage height (4 m for HHS1; 3,1 m for HHS2; 2,1 m for HHS3 and 1,2 m for
HHS4)
If the horizontal sprinkler distance is reduced below 2,5 m, the number of intermediate
levels to be considered for hydraulic calculation can be determined on the basis of
11.6.1.4.
If the shelves impermeable to water fulfil the requirements for barriers in accordance with
11.6.1.4, this clause can be applied to determine the size of the area of operation. It is
necessary to install a sprinkler level under each rack shelf impermeable to water.
111
With the additional installation of a sheet barrier above the upper sprinkler intermediate
level (see Figure 11.13) the ceiling area of operation may be reduced to 150 m².
11.6.2.2 Small parts racks
In small parts rack storage the storage height between two sprinkler levels shall not
exceed 3 m in HHS1 to HHS3 and 2 m in HHS4. The horizontal sprinkler spacing shall
not exceed 2,5 m.
11.6.2.3 Racks with solid shelves and grid platforms
Racks with solid shelves or walls accessible via grid platforms at several levels, shall
have sprinklers fitted underneath each grid platform. Up to a flue width of 1,4 m the
sprinklers in the flue centre may be arranged at a maximum horizontal distance of 2,5 m.
With a flue width > 1,4 m two sprinkler rows with staggered sprinkler layout shall be
provided in the flue near the racks. The horizontal sprinkler distance shall be 5 m max.,
the area per sprinkler, however, shall not be exceeded.
12 Sprinkler design characteristics and uses
12.1 General
Only new, approved sprinklers shall be used. They shall not be painted except by the
original manufacturer. They shall not be altered in any respect or have any type of
ornamentation or coating applied after despatch from the production factory, except as
specified in 12.9.
12.2 Sprinkler types and application

12.2.1 General
Sprinklers shall be used for the various hazard classes in accordance with Table 12.01,
and as specified in 12.2.2 to 12.2.4.
Hazard class Design Sprinkler type Nominal K factor

density
(mm/min)
LH 2,25 conventional, spray, flush 57
ceiling, flat, spray, recessed,
concealed and sidewall
OH 5,0 conventional, spray, flush 80
ceiling, flat spray, recessed,
concealed, and sidewall
HHP and HHS ≤ 10 mm/min conventional, spray 80 or 115
Ceiling or roof sprinklers
> 10 mm/min conventional, spray 115
≤ 12,5 mm/min
> 12,5 mm/min conventional, spray 115 or 1601)
HHS additional sprinklers conventional, spray, and flat 80 or 115
in high piled storage spray
1)
in accordance with the manufacturer’s data sheet.
Note: see also Annex J.
Table 12.01: Sprinkler types and K factors for various hazard classes
112
Sprinklers of K factor 57 may also be used as rack sprinklers, provided that the protection
concept of 11.6 is applied.
If sprinklers K 57 are used in racks in accordance with 11.6, the flow rate shall not exceed
70 l/min.
12.2.2 Flush ceiling, recessed and concealed pattern

Flush ceiling, recessed and concealed sprinklers shall not be installed in OH4, HHP or
HHS areas.
Concealed sprinklers shall not be installed with ceiling heights over 10 m.
Sprinklers without fixed deflectors, i.e. with retracted deflectors which drop to the
operating position on actuation, shall not be fitted:
a) where the ceiling is more than 45° from the horizontal;

b) in situations where the atmosphere is corrosive or likely to have a high dust content;
c) in racks or under shelves.
12.2.3 Sidewall pattern

Sidewall sprinklers shall not be installed in HHP or HHS installations or above suspended
ceilings. They may only be installed under flat ceilings.
Note: The operator should be informed about the restrictions for fixtures and furniture in
rooms where sidewall sprinklers are used.
12.2.4 Flat spray pattern

The use of flat spray sprinklers shall be restricted to false floor and false ceiling spaces,
suspended open ceilings and racks.
Where flat spray sprinklers are used in racks, the distance between top of stored goods
and deflector may be reduced to 100 mm.
12.2.5 Extended coverage sidewall sprinkler

This type of sprinkler may be used for special protection e.g. hotel bedroom, with an
approval by the authorities. Only “quick” response sensitivity shall be used.
Extended coverage sidewall sprinklers may be used in LH and OH1 hazards as well as in
installations according to Annex E. They may be used in rooms, which have a maximum
area of 120 m² with at least fire-retardant walls, a smooth ceiling and a maximum ceiling
height of 4,1 m. In one area only sprinklers with identical response sensitivity rating may
be used. The area per sprinkler must not exceed 21 m². In rooms with a maximum width
of 6,5 m, only one row of extended coverage sidewall sprinklers needs to be installed
along the longitudinal wall. In rooms with a width of between 6,5 m and 11 m, two rows of
extended coverage sidewall sprinklers must be installed along each of the longitudinal
walls. In this case, the sprinklers must be installed staggered.
The area of operation with extended coverage sidewall sprinklers is 120 m² and with
systems in accordance with Annex E it is 216 m².
The distance between two extended coverage sidewall sprinklers installed along the
same wall shall be between 3 m and 4,5 m. Extended coverage sidewall sprinklers shall
113
be installed at a maximum distance of 300 mm from the adjacent wall and at a distance of
100 mm to 250 mm from the ceiling. Extended coverage sidewall sprinklers shall be
installed at a minimum horizontal distance of 0,5 m from corners. The minimum design
pressure shall be 2,5 bar for ceiling heights up to 2,8 m and 3 bar for higher ceilings.
Note: The operator should be informed about the restrictions for fixtures and furniture in
rooms where sidewall sprinklers are used.
12.3 Flow from sprinklers

The water flow from a sprinkler shall be calculated from the following formula:
Q =k× p
where:
Q is the flow in litres per minute;
K is the constant given in Table 12.01;
P is the pressure in bar.
Where sprinklers K 57 are used in racks in accordance with 11.6, the flow rate shall not
exceed 70 l/min.
12.4 Sprinkler temperature ratings

Sprinklers shall be chosen with a temperature rating close to but not lower than 30°C
above the highest anticipated ambient temperature. Under normal conditions in
temperate climates a rating of 68°C to 74°C is suitable.
In unventilated false ceiling and false floor spaces, under skylights or glass roofs etc., it
may be necessary to install sprinklers with a higher operating temperature, up to 93°C or
100°C. Special consideration shall be given to the rating of sprinklers in the vicinity of
drying ovens, heaters and other equipment which gives off radiant heat.
Note: Sprinklers are colour coded to indicate their temperature rating according to Table
12.02:
Glass bulb Temperature rating Fusible link Temperature rating

°C °C
Orange 57 Uncoloured 57 - 77
Red 68 White 80 - 107
Yellow 79 Blue 121 - 149
Green 93 - 100 Red 163 - 191
Blue 121 - 141 Green 204 - 246
Mauve 163 - 182 Orange 260 - 302
Black 204 - 260 Black 320 - 343
Table 12.02: Colour codes
114
12.5 Sprinkler response sensitivity

12.5.1 General
Sprinklers of different sensitivities shall be used in accordance with Table 12.03.
Sensitivity rating in-rack Ceiling above in-rack Dry systems All others
sprinklers
Standard ’A’ No Yes Yes Yes
Special Yes Yes Yes Yes
Quick Yes Yes No Yes
Note 1: The sprinklers at the ceiling shall have a sensitivity equal to or of slower response than the sprinklers
situated in the racks.
Note 2: Most types of sprinklers are rated, in descending order of sensitivity, as one of the following types :
− quick response; RTI <50
− special response; RTI ≥ 50, ≤ 80
− standard response ‘A’; RTI > 80, < 200

Note 3: In wet pipe systems sprinklers with higher response sensitivity may also be used.
Note 4: In one area only sprinklers with the same response sensitivity should be used. In unfavourable
conditions sprinklers near the fire could otherwise open later than adjacent sprinklers of lower response
sensitivity.
Note 5: In voids ≤ 0,5 m sprinklers of response sensitivity “quick” shall be used.
Note 6: The sprinkler sensitivity ratings are specified in EN 12259 Part 1.
Table 12.03: Sprinkler sensitivity ratings
12.5.2 Buildings with smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems

If sprinkler systems are installed in rooms and buildings with smoke and heat exhaust
ventilation systems, it is important to ensure that the operation of the sprinkler system is
not impaired. Possible combinations are specified in Table 12.04.
Sprinklers ESFR sprinklers
Powered smoke exhaust possible in consideration of limited, see requirements of FM DS
cross ventilation 2-0 for ventilation
Natural smoke exhaust possible and recommended not recommended
activated by smoke combination in consideration
1)
detectors of layout
Natural smoke exhaust possible and recommended activation of exhaust after ESFR
activated by thermal combination in consideration (ESFR 68°C, RTI<50; RWA 141°C,
1)
elements of layout RTI>80);
observe constructive requirements
Natural smoke exhaust recommended combination recommended combination
activated by manual call
points
1)
e.g. by reduction of sprinkler distance to ceiling
Table 12.04: Combinations of smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems and
sprinkler systems
12.6 Sprinkler guards

When sprinklers are installed in a position at risk of mechanical damage, they shall be
fitted with a suitable metal guard.
115
12.7 Sprinkler water shields

Sprinklers installed in racks or under perforated shelves or platforms or similar locations
where water from a higher sprinkler or sprinklers may cause wetting close to the bulb or
fusible element, shall be fitted with metal water shields.
Water shields and their fastenings shall be designed such that

- they do not affect the water distribution of the sprinkler and
- water does not run back to the sprinkler on the rear side of the water shields.
Water shields shall have a diameter of at least 0,075 m. They shall be designed such that
between the centreline of the sprinkler and an imaginary line between the outer edge of
the water shields and the water outlet of the sprinklers, there is an angle of at least 60°.
Note:
It may be assumed that water shields with a surface of 0,02 m² fulfil the requirement
independently of the installation height of the sprinkler.
12.8 Sprinkler escutcheon plates

Escutcheon plates shall be made of metal or a thermosetting plastic material (Duroplast).
Escutcheon plates shall not be used to support ceilings or other structures.
No part of an escutcheon plate shall project from the ceiling below the top of the visible
portion of the heat sensitive element of the sprinkler.
116
12.9 Corrosion protection of sprinklers

Sprinklers installed in premises where corrosive vapours are prevalent shall be protected
in one of the following ways:
a) with a suitable corrosion resistant coating applied by the manufacturer;

b) with a Vaseline coating applied once before and once after installation.
The anti-corrosion treatment shall not be applied to sprinkler bulbs.
13 Valves
13.1 Alarm valve station

Each installation shall have an alarm valve station.
13.2 Stop Valves

All normally open stop valves which may cut off the water supply to the sprinklers shall:
− close in the clockwise direction;

− be fitted with an indicator that clearly shows whether it is in the open or closed
position;
− be secured in the open position by a strap and padlock or secured in an equivalent
manner.
With buried pipes stop valves shall
− have an aboveground indicator, or

− have an indicator in street caps that are constantly monitored for being operational
and whose electrical components in the street cap are designed according to
protection type IP 56, or
− have an indicator and be installed in an easily accessible underground flue.
Note 1: Stop valve downstream of the alarm valve station should be avoided, where
possible. Where stop valves are installed downstream of the alarm valve station, they
shall be monitored electrically.
Note 2: In locations such as high-rise buildings, where high static pressures are likely,
special care shall be taken to ensure that all stop, test, drain and flushing valves are
suitable for the installation pressures.
13.3 Ring main valves

Where sprinkler systems are fed by a ring main supply pipe arrangement on the
premises, valves shall be installed to isolate the ring into sections, in such a way that no
section shall include more than 4 alarm valve stations.
117
13.4 Drain valves

Drain valves shall be fitted as specified in Table 13.01 to allow drainage from:
a) immediately downstream of the alarm valve station or of its downstream stop valve
where such exists;
b) immediately downstream of any subsidiary alarm valve;
c) immediately downstream of any subsidiary stop valve;
d) between a dry pipe or subsidiary alarm valve station and any subsidiary stop valve
installed for testing;
e) any pipe which cannot be drained through another drain valve, with the exception of
drop pipes to single sprinklers in a wet installation up to a volume of 100 l, provided that
these do not have to be drained regularly.
The valves shall be fitted at the lower end of the pipework and sized as specified in Table
13.01. The outlet shall be not more than 3 m above the floor and shall preferably be fitted
with a brass plug. Instead of brass plugs galvanised steel plugs may be used also. In
systems that do not have to be drained regularly (wet pipe systems), the outlets do not
necessarily have to be installed at a maximum of 4 m from the ground.
Valve principally draining Minimum diameter d

of valve and pipe
LH installation DN 40
OH or HHP or HHS installation DN 50
Subsidiary installation DN 50
A zone DN 50
Distribution pipes with no Ø ≤ DN 50 DN 20
incline to the valve principally 50 DN < Ø ≤ DN 80 DN 32
draining
Ø > DN 80 DN 50
Branch pipes with no incline to Ø ≤ DN 50 DN 20
the valve principally draining Ø > DN 50 DN 25
Pipework with not incline to the valve principally draining between dry DN 15
or subsidiary alarm valve and a subsidiary stop valve installed for
testing purposes
Table 13.01: Minimum size of drain valves
13.5 Test facilities

13.5.1 Alarm and pump start test facilities
15 mm test valves shall be provided, as appropriate, to test:
a) the hydraulic alarm and any electric alarm pressure switch by drawing water from the
immediate downstream side of:
− a wet alarm valve, and any downstream main stop valves;
− an alternate alarm valve;
− a pre-action alarm valve;
118
b) the hydraulic alarm and any electric alarm pressure switch by drawing water
downstream of the main water supply stop valve and from the upstream side of:
− an alternate alarm valve;
− a dry pipe alarm valve;
− a pre-action alarm valve;
c) any water flow alarm switch installed downstream of the alarm valve station. The test
valve shall be connected downstream of the water flow alarm;
d) any automatic pump starting device;
e) any pump or pressure tank house sprinkler alarm flow switches installed upstream of the
alarm valve station.
13.5.2 Test facilities at the end of the pipework

A test facility shall be provided, incorporating a test valve with any associated fittings and
pipework, delivering a flow equivalent to the discharge from a single sprinkler with the
lowest K-factor of the group, connected at the hydraulically most remote location on a
distribution or branch pipe.
This test facility shall be accessible without any mobile tools and secured against
unauthorised operation (e.g. plug).
13.6 Flushing connections

Flushing connections, with permanently installed shut-off devices, shall be fitted on the
spur ends of the installation distribution pipes. They shall be of the same nominal size as
the distribution pipe and designed as follows:
− DN 50 minimum and
− with pipework > DN 50 they shall be fitted on the bottom of the pipework and provided
with a free outlet/inlet path of 200 mm minimum which is preferably horizontal.
Flushing connections shall be fitted with appropriate caps or plugs.
Note 1: It may be desirable in certain cases to fit flushing connections on branch pipes,
e.g. in the form of a blank tee.
Note 2: In addition to their use for flushing of the pipework, flushing connections may be
used to check that water is available and for carrying out pressure and flow tests.
Note 3: Pipework which is completely full of water may be damaged by the increase in
pressure due to temperature rises. If complete venting of air in an installation is likely to
occur, e.g. in the case of a gridded layout with flushing connections at the extremities,
consideration should be given to the fitting of pressure relief valves. Pressure relief valves
in sprinkler systems shall consist of metal components only. The performance of the
pressure relief valve shall be dimensioned such that in the case of a valve failure the
system is not released or the water supply compromised. Alternatively, pressure
equalising tanks may be used.
119
Figure 13.01: Flushing connections
13.7 Pressure gauges

Pressure gauge scale divisions shall not exceed:
a) 0,2 bar for a maximum scale value less than or equal to 10 bar;
b) 0,5 bar for a maximum scale value greater than 10 bar.
Note: The maximum scale value should be of the order of 150% of the known maximum
pressure to be applied.
13.7.1 Water supply connections

Each public water mains connection shall be fitted with a pressure gauge between the
supply pipe stop valve and the non-return valve ('A’ gauge).
Each pump supply shall be fitted with a damped pressure gauge on the supply pipe
immediately downstream of the outlet non-return valve and upstream of any outlet stop
valve.
13.7.2 Alarm valve stations

Each alarm valve station shall have a pressure gauge fitted at each of the following
points:
a) immediately upstream of the alarm valve station ('B' gauge);

b) immediately downstream of the alarm valve station ('C' gauge);
c) immediately downstream of subsidiary alarm valve stations, but upstream of any stop
valve.
13.7.3 Removal
Means shall be provided to enable each pressure gauge to be removed readily without
interruption of the water or air supply to the installation. If required, self relieving ball
valves shall be provided.
120
13.8 Relief valve

Where it is expected to have a water column enclosed leading to inadmissible pressure
expansion, a relief valve (safety valve) shall be installed. The relief valve should be
provided with a size not less than 6.4 mm to operate at pressures not greater than 12 bar.
The relief valve shall be installed above the alarm valve station on the riser.
14 Alarms and alarm devices
14.1 Water motor alarms

14.1.1 General
Each alarm valve station shall have its own water motor alarm. Each water motor alarm
shall be clearly labelled with the number of the sprinkler group.
The installation of water motor alarms (e.g. gongs) may be omitted if two sounders
(horns) and at each alarm valve station one additional alarm pressure switch and one
visible indicator (lamp) are installed. One of the two sounders shall have back-up power
supply and monitored transmission path.
The sounders shall be installed outside the sprinkler equipment room at a clearly audible
location and labelled “sprinkler alarm”.
The standard alarm pressure switch and the additional alarm pressure switch for
triggering the sounders/indicators shall be connected via separate monitored
transmission paths and separate zones.
Failure of an additional pressure switch of one alarm valve station shall not affect the
signal transmission of an additional pressure switch of another alarm valve station.
For several alarm valve stations located in one room only one redundant sounder is
sufficient (see Figures 14.01-14.02).
If both the alarm transmission to a permanently manned location and the triggering of
sounders are via the same control and indicating equipment, the circuit shall be in
accordance with Figure 14.02. In this case, failure of the central signal processing unit in
the sprinkler equipment room shall not cause failure of both the alarm transmission and
the triggering of redundant sounders.
121
Figure 14.01: Example: Triggering of sounders via a monitoring panel
Figure 14.02: Example: Triggering of sounders directly by control and indicating

equipment with approval as monitoring panel
122
14.1.2 Water motor and gong

The gong shall be installed outside the sprinkler equipment room at a clearly audible and
accessible location. The water motor shall not be installed any higher than 6 m above the
point of connection to the alarm valve. A strainer, readily accessible for cleaning, shall be
fitted between the motor nozzle and the alarm valve connection. The water outlet shall be
arranged so that any flow of water can be seen.
14.1.3 Piping to water motor

The piping shall be galvanised steel. The equivalent length of pipe between the alarm
valve and the water motor shall be not more than 25 m assuming an equivalent length of
2 m for each change of direction.
The pipe shall be fitted with a stop valve located within the premises and shall be
provided with a permanent drain through an orifice of not more than 3 mm in diameter.
The orifice plate may be integral with the pipe fitting, and shall be made either of stainless
steel or of a non-ferrous material.
14.2 Electrical water flow and water and air pressure switches
14.2.1 General
Electrical devices to detect the operation of sprinkler systems shall be either water flow
alarm switches or pressure switches.
14.2.2 Water flow alarm switches

Water flow alarm switches shall only be used in wet installations. A test facility for water
flow alarm switches shall be fitted downstream of each switch to simulate the operation of
a single sprinkler. The test facility for water flow alarm switches shall be fitted with a drain.
The draw-off pipe shall be galvanised steel or copper.
The pressure/flow characteristic of the fully opened test valve and draw-off pipe shall be
equal to that of the smallest nominal bore sprinkler installed downstream of the water flow
alarm switch. Any orifice plate shall be at the pipe outlet and shall be either stainless steel
or non-ferrous material.
The draw-off pipe of the water flow alarm switch shall be positioned in such a way that
the flow of water can be clearly seen during tests.
123
For testing the water flow alarm switch and for draining the pipe, a shut-off valve (test
valve) shall be fitted with a nominal diameter of at least DN 20 (see Fig. 14.03). With
this test facility, the water flow alarm switch shall respond at a pressure between 1,0
and 3,6 bar.
2
>5D
> DN 20
3
1 >5D
4
5 2
1 > DN 20
3
1 – water flow alarm switch 4 – nozzle (K = 30)

2 – shut-off valve 5 – hopper (optional)
3 – gauge (0-16 bar, class 1,6)
Figure 14.03: Test facility for water flow alarm switches
The test facility for water flow alarm switches may be omitted if the switch can either be
tested separately with a test facility of K-factor 20 or with a test facility in accordance
with 13.5.2.
14.2.3 Dry and pre-action systems

Each discrete section of the installation pipework should be provided with a low air/gas
pressure alarm, to provide a visual and audible warning in an area with responsible
manning.
14.3 Alarm transmission equipment to permanently manned

locations
Any automatic sprinkler electrical alarm connected to a permanently manned location
shall conform to EN 54-2 "Control and Indicating Equipment" and to the appropriate
requirements of VdS 2095, VdS Guidelines for automatic fire detection and fire alarm
systems, planning and installation, resp. VdS 2496, VdS Guidelines for the triggering of
fire extinguishing systems.
Each sprinkler system shall have an electrical alarm transmission to a permanently

manned location.
14.4 Monitoring of stop valves

The monitoring signal of stop valves shall be transmitted to a permanently manned
location.
124
15 Pipework
15.1 General
15.1.1 Underground piping
Pipes shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shall be
protected against corrosion.
Only the following pipes shall be used:
− ductile cast iron pipes in accordance with DIN EN 545

− steel pipes in accordance with DIN 2460
− pressure pipes made of polyethylene PE-HD in accordance with DIN 8075 and R
14.3.1 with quality mark by Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffe e.V. (quality association for
plastic products)
− pressure pipes made of unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) in accordance with
DIN 8061 resp. R 1.1.1 with quality mark by Gütegemeinschaft Kunststoffe e.V.
(Quality Association for Plastic Products)
− stainless steel pipes in accordance with DIN 17455 with plastic coating and welded
pipe joints
Steel pipes in accordance with DIN 2460 shall be welded by butt or slip-in weld socket
joints or joined by connecting sleeves. The steel pipes shall have a factory-made cement
mortar lining in accordance with DIN EN 10298. For exterior corrosion protection the
pipes shall have protective enclosure. The soil shall be classified in accordance with
DVGW worksheet GW 9 resp. DIN 50929 in order to determine the enclosure type in
accordance with DIN 30675-1.
The joints shall be provided with subsequent corrosion protection in accordance with the
manufacturer’s specifications. Quality of pipes, lining and enclosure shall be certified by a
works test certificate 2.2 in accordance with EN 10204.
The piping instructions for PE 80 and PE 100 pressure pipes by Kunststoffverband e.V.
(Plastics Association) shall be followed. Pipes and fittings shall be joined and connected
to valves by welding necks via sleeve welding with incorporated heating element resp.
hot plate butt welding.
The piping instructions for PVC-U pressure pipes by Kunststoffverband e.V. (Plastics
Association) shall be followed. Pipes and fittings shall be joined and connected to valves
by connecting sleeves resp. bounded socket joints.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to piping, for example by

passing vehicles.
15.1.2 Above ground piping

Piping shall be steel or copper or VdS-tested and approved pipe systems. When steel
pipes with a nominal diameter equal to or less than 150 mm are threaded, cut-grooved or
otherwise machined, they shall have a minimum wall thickness in accordance with ISO
65M.
125
When steel pipe ends are formed without significantly reducing the wall thickness, e.g. by
roll-grooving, they shall have a minimum wall thickness in accordance with ISO 4200
range D, in any case at least 2,6 mm.
Copper pipes shall be used in wet pipe systems only, installed in flow direction
downstream of the alarm valve. Pipes up to DN 50 shall be in accordance with EN 1057.
Pipes between DN 50 and DN 100 shall be in accordance with DIN EN 12449. Copper
pipes shall bear the quality mark by Gütegemeinschaft Kupferrohre e.V. (Quality
Association for Copper Pipes) and the DVGW quality mark (German Technical and
Scientific Association for Gas and Water). Pipes in accordance with DIN EN 1057 with
DVGW quality mark and VdS Approval may be used.
The minimum wall thickness of copper pipes shall be in accordance with Table 15.01.
Diameter Minimum wall thickness
≤ DN 40 1,5 mm
DN 50 – DN 80 2 mm
DN 100 2,5 mm
Table 15.01: Minimum wall thickness of copper pipes
Note: For dry, alternate or pre-action installations, galvanised steel should preferably be
used.
15.1.3 Welding
Pipes and fittings ≤ DN 50 shall not be welded on site; flame cutting, welding and any
other kinds of thermal processing on site are not at all permitted.
Sprinkler pipes shall be welded such that
− all joints are continuously welded;

− the insides of welding seams do not affect the water flow;
− the pipe is deburred and any slag is removed.
Welders shall be approved in accordance with EN 287-1.
Pipe joints shall not be welded if pipes or fittings such as bends are < DN 50, except
where the welding is done and inspected in the workshops of sprinkler companies whose
welding procedure and equipment is approved for the respective application by the
authorities.
Welded pipes shall be marked at a distance of 100 mm from each end with the name or
code of the installer. The individual markings at the pipe ends shall be permanent and
well legible at two opposite spots of the pipe periphery. The equipment for marking the
pipes shall be combined with the welding equipment.
Copper pipes shall be hard soldered using capillary solder fittings in accordance with DIN
EN 1254. The fittings shall bear the manufacturer’s code.
For soldered connections of copper with copper, hard solders CP 105 or CP 203 shall be
used in accordance with DIN EN 1044. The use of flux is not necessary.
For soldered connections of copper-zinc alloys (brass) or copper-tin alloys (red brass)
among themselves or with copper, hard solders AG 304 or AG 306 shall be used in
accordance with DIN EN 1044, using flux FH10 in accordance with DIN EN 1045.
126
Only solders and fluxes bearing the quality mark for hard solders and hard solder fluxes
by Gütegemeinschaft Kupferrohr e.V. (Quality Association for Copper Pipes).
The junction from steel to copper shall be a flange connection with the steel pipe being
provided with a steel flange PN 16 in accordance with DIN EN 1092-1 and the copper
pipe being provided with a solder flange in accordance with DIN 2501 made of red brass.
Stainless steel screws shall be used.
Up to DN 50 (copper pipe 54 mm x 2 mm) bolted connections may be used with screw

pipe connection and double nipple or similar constructions made of red brass.
Hard solder connections shall be performed by specially trained experts only. The
respective qualification certificate which shall not be any older than two years and
acquired at an institution approved by the authorities shall be submitted to the authorities.
Welded sleeves shall comply with DIN EN 10241. The boring for welded sleeves shall be
at least equal to the thread external diameter and not more than 2mm smaller than the
sleeve external diameter. The boring shall be deburred inside. The procedure of welding
sleeves onto pipes ≤ DN 50 shall be VdS-approved.
15.1.4 Mechanical pipe joints

Mechanical pipe joints shall be approved.
Pipe joints with flanges in accordance with DIN, capillary solder fittings in accordance
with DIN EN 1254, malleable cast iron fittings in accordance with DIN EN 10242
(including sealing material) do not require a VdS Approval.
15.1.5 Flexible pipes and joints

If relative movement is likely to occur between different sections of pipework within the
sprinkler system, e.g. owing to expansion joints or in the case of free-standing storage
racking, a flexible section or joint shall be fitted at the point of connection to the
distribution main. Before installation it shall meet the following requirements:
a) it shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of four times the maximum working
pressure or 40 bar, whichever is the greater, and shall not include parts which, when
subject to fire, might impair either the integrity or the performance of the sprinkler
system;
b) flexible pipes shall contain a continuous pressure-retaining stainless steel or non-ferrous
metal inner tube;
c) flexible pipes shall not be fitted in the fully extended position.
Flexible pipes and joints shall not be used to take up misalignment between a distribution
main and the feed pipes to intermediate sprinklers.
Expansion joints shall be steel bellow expansion joints in accordance with DIN 30681 PN
16. They shall bear the DIN DVGW mark and the register number. No reaction forces
shall be transmitted to pipe hangers and building.
The pipework for mobile equipment, such as mobile racks or machines, shall be
connected via pipe swivel joints or stainless steel hoses in accordance with DIN 3384 PN
16. The hoses shall bear the DIN DVGW mark and the register number. The expansion
joints and hoses shall be fitted where they are protected from external mechanical
impact.
127
15.1.6 Press fitting pipe systems
The pipe system may be installed in sprinkler systems, provided that the system is VdS-
approved for the type of system and type of installation. The manufacturer’s mounting
and installation instructions shall be met.
A press fitting pipe system comprises at least the following components:

- pipes;
- pipe fittings;
- transition pieces to other pipe qualities (materials) or valves;
- joining technique including the required materials, joining means, tools and
assessment principles for the quality of the pipe connection;
- pipe hangers, where required.
Components of different pipe systems shall not be combined.
Application is limited to the protection of LH and OH1-OH3 as well as exhibition halls,

cinemas, theatres and concert halls.
It shall be ensured that loads cannot fall onto the pipes, neither during normal operation
nor in the case of fire.
Generally, the requirements of the respective VdS Approval apply. The following shall be
met as a matter of principle:
a) application in sprinkler wet pipe and dry pipe system, downstream of the alarm valve
station in accordance with the VdS Approval;
b) installation as vertical main distribution pipe or distribution pipe spur is not permitted
for press fitting systems made of galvanised steel;
c) the hanger distances specified in 15.2.2 for copper pipes apply to all systems;
d) additives in the extinguishing water shall be permitted by the manufacturer and agreed
with VdS.
15.1.7 Subsurface piping

Pipes shall be installed in such a way that they are easily accessible for inspection,
repairs and modifications. They shall not be embedded in concrete floors or ceilings.
Note: Wherever possible, piping should not be installed in inaccessible spaces which
make inspection, repairs and modifications difficult.
Plastic and composite pipe systems may be installed in concrete floors or ceilings,
provided that the system has a VdS Approval for this type of installation.
The concrete installation dates shall be announced to VdS beforehand. VdS reserves the
right to do an on-site inspection or witness the pressure tests.
Note: If a pipe is installed in concrete floors or ceilings, the installer shall inform the
operator that any leakages or damage or modifications of the pipework will require an
extraordinary effort. For this purpose, the installer may e.g. hand the operator the form
enclosed in Annex Q to be signed and distributed accordingly.
15.1.7.1 Plastic and composite pipe systems
The pipe system may be installed in sprinkler systems, provided that the system is VdS-
approved for the type of system and type of installation. The manufacturer’s mounting
and installation instructions shall be met.
A plastic or composite pipe system comprises at least the following components:
128
- pipes;
- pipe fittings;
- transition pieces to other pipe qualities (materials) or valves;
- joining technique including the required materials, joining means, tools and
assessment principles for the quality of the pipe connection;
- pipe hangers, where required.
Components of different pipe systems shall not be combined.
Application is limited to the protection of LH and OH1-OH3 as well as exhibition halls,

cinemas, theatres and concert halls.
It shall be ensured that loads cannot fall onto the pipes, neither during normal operation
nor in the case of fire.
Generally, the requirements of the respective VdS Approval apply. The following shall be
met as a matter of principle:
a) installation is permitted only in sprinkler wet pipe systems. The room temperature
range shall be 10°C to 49°C;
b) installation as vertical main distribution pipe and distribution pipe spur is not
permitted;
c) if a plastic or composite pipe system is approved for installation between concrete
ceiling and false ceiling, the material of the false ceiling shall have a fire resistance of
at least 30 minutes. Fire loads above the false ceiling are not permitted;
d) free installation in accordance with 15.1.2 is not permitted;
e) only sprinklers in accordance with the approval of the pipe system shall be used. The
design temperature of the pipe shall at least be equal to the operating temperature of
the sprinklers;
f) coats of paint or similar are not permitted. This does not apply to procedures and
substances permitted by the manufacturer;
g) only the pipe ducts permitted by the manufacturer and by VdS shall be used;
h) installation only in rooms with unpolluted atmosphere;
i) additives in the extinguishing water are not permitted (e.g. anti-freezing agent,
foaming agent, other additives);
j) the bridging of expansion joints shall be avoided. Where this is not possible, the
bridging shall be in accordance with the respective approval. It is recommended to
agree the procedure with the architect or structural engineer in the planning phase.
15.1.8 Protection against fire and mechanical damage

Piping shall be installed in such a way that the pipes are not exposed to mechanical
damage. Where pipes are installed above gangways with low headroom, or at
intermediate levels, or in other similar situations, precautions shall be taken against
mechanical damage.
Pipework for sprinkler systems including water supply shall only be pass through
sprinklered areas, except where
− it is buried;
− it passes through rooms specified in 4.1.1 in which an exemption from sprinkler
protection is permitted;
− it is separated by at least fire-resistant components, together with any hangers;
− it passes on ground level, is sealed and covered by concrete slabs.
The pipework shall be visible, otherwise it shall be easily laid open at all times. This does
not apply to buried pipework and pipes including hangers that are separated by at least
fire-resistant components.
129
Note: The hangers shall be enclosed in accordance with the design loads specified in
these Guidelines.
15.1.9 Painting
Non-galvanised steel pipework shall be painted. Galvanised piping shall be painted
wherever the coating has been damaged, e.g. by threading.
Note: Extra protection may be needed for unusually corrosive conditions.
15.1.10 Drainage
Means shall be provided to enable all the pipework to be drained. Where this cannot be
done through the drain valve at the alarm valve, extra valves shall be fitted in accordance
with 13.4.
In the case of dry, alternate and pre-action installations branch pipes shall have a slope
towards the distribution pipe of at least 0,4% and distribution pipes shall have a slope
towards the appropriate drain valve of at least 0,2%.
Branch pipes shall always be connected to the side or top of distribution pipes.
15.2 Pipe hangers

15.2.1 General
Pipe hangers shall be fixed directly to the building or, if necessary, to machines, storage
racks or other structures. They shall not be used to support any other installations. They
shall be of the adjustable type in order to secure an even load bearing capability.
Hangers shall completely surround the pipe and shall not be welded to the pipe or fittings.
The part of the structure to which the hangers are secured shall be capable of supporting
the pipework. Pipes greater than DN 50 nominal diameter shall not be supported from
corrugated steel sheet or aerate concrete slabs.
Distribution pipes and risers shall have a suitable number of fixed points to take account
of axial forces.
No part of any hanger shall be made of combustible material. Nails shall not be used.
Hangers for copper pipes shall be provided with a suitable lining with sufficient electrical
resistance, in order to prevent contact corrosion.
Suitable are e.g. powder saponified ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymers applied with the
whirl sintering method, or a bracket lining with PTFE foil. If other materials are used, their
appropriateness shall be verified.
15.2.2 Spacing and location

Hangers shall generally be spaced no more than 4 m apart on steel pipe and 2 m apart
on copper pipe. For pipes of over DN 50 nominal diameter these distances may be
increased by 50% provided that one of the following conditions is met:
− 2 independent hangers are fitted directly to the structure;

− a hanger is used which is capable of bearing a load 50% greater than that called for
in Table 15.03.
130
When double hangers are used, the spacing shall be:
− 7 m with nominal diameters DN 80 to DN 100

− 8 m with nominal diameters ≥ DN 125
Note: If one hanger fails, the spacing of the remaining hangers shall not exceed 8 m.
At the end of the pipework two brackets with one pendulum each shall be fitted.
When mechanical pipe joints are used:
− there shall be at least one hanger within 1 m of each joint;

− there shall be at least one hanger on each pipe section.
The distance from any terminal sprinkler to a hanger shall not exceed:
− 0,9 m for 25 mm diameter piping;

− 1,2 m for piping greater than 25 mm diameter.
The distance from any upright sprinkler to a hanger shall not be less than 0,15 m.
Vertical pipes shall have additional hangers in the following cases:
− pipes more than 2 m long;

− pipes more than lm long feeding single sprinklers.
The following pipes need not be separately supported unless they are at a low level or
otherwise vulnerable to mechanical impact:
− horizontal pipes less than 0,45 m long;

− drop or rise pipes less than 0,6 m long feeding individual sprinklers;
− drop or rise pipes less than 1,0 m long feeding individual sprinklers and passing
through a false ceiling so that horizontal movement of the drop or rise pipe is
prevented.
Extension sleeves for threaded rods of hangers shall be secured, e.g. by a counter nut.
The same applies to threaded rods for fastening corrugated steel sheet hangers.
Fastening constructions to corrugated steel sheets, aerate or pumice concrete slabs shall
be agreed with VdS. The pipe hangers at the carrying construction shall have a spacing
of not more than 12 m, and the last sprinkler shall have a distance of not more than 6 m
from such a hanger.
If no operating equipment is located above the sprinkler pipe, no additional hanger is

required at the carrying construction, provided that the ceiling construction can bear a
single load of 1000 N.
Plugs in aerate or pumice concrete slabs shall have a distance of not less than 150 mm
from the edge of the slab.
Where fastenings to corrugated steel sheets, aerate or pumice concrete cannot bear
twice the calculated load according to Table 15.03, the requirement may be reduced to
the single calculated load, provided that the hangers spacing is reduced proportionately.
131
With aerate or pumice concrete slabs the additional hanger at the carrying construction
may be omitted, if the fastening is stuck through the slab and welded or screwed to a
steel plate.
Sprinkler pipes passing through sleeves and recesses in the building construction and
bearing on, shall be fastened by pipe hangers every 25 m, gridded branch pipes every
50 m. The spacing of bearing points shall not exceed 6 m. The pipe hanger shall not be
designed as a fixed bearing. Where sprinkler branch pipes pass through sleeves, the free
pipe end shall be supported as well. The nominal diameter of sleeves for branch pipes
shall not exceed DN 80.
Where the bearing area in pipe sleeves has a length of 10 cm minimum, this area may be
regarded as “two independent hangers”.
Where sprinkler pipe hangers are fastened to wooden beams, the minimum values
specified in Table 15.02 shall be complied with.
Nominal diameter Bolt diameter Wood screw diameter

mm mm
≤ DN 50 6 2x6
> DN 50 ≤ DN 100 8 2x8
> DN 100 ≤ DN 150 10 2 x 10
>DN 150 ≤ DN 200 12 2 x 12
Table 15.02: Fastening to wooden beams
In the case of double hangers the number of wood screws resp. bolts shall be increased
in accordance with Figure 15.01 subject to the type of hanger.
Single 2 wood screws 1 bolt

hangers
Spacing
≤5m
Double 4 wood screws 2 bolts 1 through bolt

hangers
Spacing
5m to 8m
Figure 15.01: Hangers for the fastening to wooden beams
132
Screw bolts shall have washers on both sides, unless the pipe hanger has the same
bearing area. The strength of the wooden beams shall be 0,1 m. The screw bolts shall be
located at a distance from the lower beam edge that is at least 3 times their diameter.
Wood screws shall be screwed in up to a depth of at least 8 times their diameter and be
fixed at the side of the wooden beam. The distance between screws and lower beam
edge shall be at least 5 times their diameter.
Where threaded rods of support systems are screwed into blind holes, e.g. in the case of
anchors, the other side of the rod shall be able to pass through the thread by at least
2cm.
Beam clamps for pipes up to DN 65 shall be fastened to beams only if their bearing areas
do not deviate from the horizontal by more than 10°. The clamps shall only be loaded by
vertical traction. The clamp screws shall be mounted to the sloping area of the beam.
Any other types of beam clamps shall be approved by the authorities.
Sound absorbing inlays shall be used in pipe hangers only if the authorities require it. The
type of sound absorbing inlay shall be agreed with the authorities in each individual case.
15.2.3 Design
Hanger materials shall consist of steel of at least 3 mm thickness. In galvanised design
2,5 mm are sufficient. Exempted are loops made of hot-dip galvanised material, which
may have the minimum dimensions 25 mm x 1,5 mm for pipes up to DN 50.
The minimum cross sections of pipe hangers (except for pipe brackets) are specified in
Table 15.03.
Nominal pipe Minimum load capacity at Minimum cross section2)
diameter (d) 20°C1)
mm N mm²
d ≤ 50 2.000 30 (M8)
50 < d ≤ 100 3.500 50 (M10)
100 < d ≤ 150 5.000 70 (M12)
150 < d ≤ 200 8.500 125 (M16)
200 < d ≤ 250 10.000 150 (M18)
250 < d ≤ 300 12.500 180 (M20)
1)
When the material is heated to 200°C the load bearing capacity shall not deteriorate more than
25%.
2)
The nominal cross section of threaded rods shall be increased so that the minimum cross section
is still achieved.
Table 15.03: Minimum cross section for pipe hangers
Pipe hangers for the suspension of single pipes, which do not fulfil the requirements, shall
be approved.
133
15.2.4 Anchorage in concrete ceilings

Anchors shall be approved by the building control authorities as follows:
− for individual fastening in cracked concrete (European Technical Approval in

accordance with European Technical Approval Guideline 001/Part 1-4 Opt. 1-6), or
− for multiple fastening of non-bearing constructions (European Technical Approval in
accordance with European Technical Approval Guideline 001/Part 6).
Note: Comparable national approvals such as any still valid general building control
approvals by German Institute for Construction Technology (DIBt) for anchors for
lightweight ceiling lining and false ceilings are equivalent to approvals in accordance
with ETAG 001/Part6.
The anchors shall be dimensioned in accordance with the building control approval. The
relevant load is the 1,4-fold of the effective load.
Anchors shall fulfil the requirements of the following table as regards tensile strength
(steel failure, NRk,s) and thread (if applicable).
Use for ceiling anchorage of pipes of Minimum thread of Characteristic

nominal width D by means of one anchor anchor tensile strength
per anchorage spot (steel failure)
NRk,s
[N]
D ≤ DN 50 M8 ≥ 6.000
DN 50 < D ≤ DN 100 M10 ≥ 10.500
DN 100 < D ≤ DN 150 M12 ≥ 15.000
DN 150 < D ≤ DN 200 M16 ≥ 25.500
DN 200 < D ≤ DN 250 M20 ≥ 30.000
DN 250 < D ≤ DN 300 M20 ≥ 37.500
Table 15.04: Minimum tensile strength and minimum thread
When anchors approved for multiple anchorage of non-bearing constructions are used, it
shall be ensured even in the event of theoretical failure of one anchor the pipework
remains functional.
Note: This may be achieved e.g. at pipe deflexions or end anchorage of projecting pipes
by using one anchor approved for multiple anchorage of non-bearing constructions for
every two independent anchorage spots (pipe hangers) or by reducing the hanger
distances at these spots. The distance of the penultimate hanger from the pipe end shall
not exceed 3 m, and 2,5 m for pipes DN 25. The fastening of pipe deflexions shall be
designed such that after an assumed failure of a hanger at a deflexion a hanger distance
of 6 m is not exceeded. Redundancies are not required, provided that at the relevant
spots an anchor approved for individual anchorage in cracked concrete is used.
15.3 Pipework in concealed spaces

Where sprinkler protection is required in concealed spaces such as false ceilings and
floors, the pipework shall be designed as follows:
134
15.3.1 False ceilings above OH occupancies

Sprinklers above the ceiling may be fed from the same branch pipes as the sprinklers
below the ceiling.
15.3.2 All other cases

The sprinklers in false ceilings and floors shall be fed from separate branch pipes.
16 Signs, notices and information
16.1 Block plan

16.1.1 General
A block plan of the premises shall be placed close to a main entrance where it can be
readily seen by the fire brigade or others responding to an alarm. The plan shall show:
a) the installation number and the location of the corresponding alarm valve station and
water motor alarm;
b) each separate area of hazard classification, the relevant hazard class and the maximum
storage height;
c) by means of colour shading or hatching the area covered by each alarm valve and, if
required by the fire brigade, indication of routes through the premises to those areas;
d) the location of any subsidiary stop valves.
16.2 Signs and notices

16.2.1 Location plate
A location plate of weather-resistant material and lettering shall be fixed on the outside of
the external wall as close as practical to the entrance nearest the installation main alarm
valve stations. The plate shall bear the wording:
ALARM VALVE STATION
in letters not less than 35 mm high, and
INSIDE
in letters not less than 25 mm high. The wording shall be in white letters on a red
background.
16.2.2 Signs for stop valves

A sign shall be fitted close to the main and any subsidiary stop valves bearing the words:
SPRINKLER STOP VALVE
The sign shall be rectangular with white letters not less than 20 mm high on a red
background.
135
Where the stop valve is enclosed in a room with a door the sign shall be fixed on the
outside of the door, and a second sign, bearing the words « Keep locked shut » shall be
fixed on the inside of the door. The second sign shall be circular with white letters not less
than 5 mm high, on a blue background.
16.2.3 Alarm valve station

16.2.3.1 General
Where the sprinkler system comprises more than one group, each alarm valve station
shall be prominently marked with the number identifying the group it controls.
16.2.3.2 Fully calculated installations
In fully calculated installations a durable notice shall be fixed to the rise pipe next to each
alarm valve station. The notice shall include the following information:
a) the group number;

b) the hazard classification or classifications of the areas protected by the group;
c) for each hazard class area within a group:
1) the design requirements (area of operation and density of discharge);
2) the pressure-flow requirement at the 'C' gauge or flow test facilities for the most
unfavourable and most favourable areas of operation;
3) the pressure-flow requirement at the pump delivery pressure gauge for the most
unfavourable and most favourable areas of operation;
4) the height of the highest sprinkler above the level of the 'C' gauge;
5) the height difference between the 'C' gauge and the pump delivery pressure gauge.
16.2.4 Water supply connections to other services

Stop valves controlling water supplies from sprinkler system supply pipes or trunk mains
to other services shall be appropriately labelled; e.g. ‘Firefighting hose reels’, ‘Domestic
water supply’, etc. The labels shall have raised or embossed lettering and be fixed to stop
valves to inhibit unauthorised removal.
16.2.5 Suction and booster pumps

16.2.5.1 Pre-calculated installations
cannot be given.
16.2.5.2 Fully calculated installations
An installer's data sheet shall be displayed beside the pump, giving the following
information:
a) the pump manufacturer's data sheets;

b) a schedule listing the technical data specified in 3.4.4.4;
c) a copy of the installer's pump characteristics sheet, similar in presentation to Figure
H.01;
d) the pressure loss, at flow Qmax, between the pump outlet and the most hydraulically
remote group 'C' gauge.
136
16.2.6 Electric switches and control panels

16.2.6.1 Alarm transmission
Where water flow into an installation initiates an automatic alarm to the fire brigade or to a
remote control station, a notice to that effect shall be fixed adjacent to the alarm valves.
16.2.6.2 Diesel engine driven pump
The alarms specified in 9.9.11 at both the diesel engine controller and the responsibly
manned location shall be marked as appropriate:
a) fail to start, e.g. diesel engine driven pump failure to start;

b) disabled condition, e.g. diesel engine driven pump starter switched off;
c) operation sprinkler pump, e.g. sprinkler pump running.
The manually operated shut-down mechanism (see 9.9.7) shall be labelled as follows:
SPRINKLER PUMP SHUT-OFF
16.2.6.3 Electric motor driven fire pump
Each switch on the dedicated power feed to an electric sprinkler fire pump motor shall be
labelled as follows:
SPRINKLER PUMP MOTOR SUPPLY

NOT TO BE SWITCHED OFF IN THE EVENT OF FIRE
16.2.7 Testing and operating devices

All valves and instruments used for testing and operation of the system shall be
appropriately labelled. Corresponding identification shall appear in the documentation.
17 Commissioning and approval inspections
17.1 Commissioning inspections

17.1.1 Pipework
During installation all pipework shall be inspected for cleanliness on the inside. Moreover,
after installation the entire pipework shall be thoroughly flushed via its flushing
connections.
All installation pipework shall be hydrostatically tested for not less than 24 hours, to a
pressure of not less than 15 bar, or 1,5 times the maximum pressure to which the system
will be subjected, (both measured at the alarm valves), whichever is the greater.
The pressure test in plastic and composite pipe systems shall be in accordance with the
respective installation instructions. The installer shall issue a pressure test report.
Dry pipework shall also be tested pneumatically to a pressure of not less than 2,5bar for
not less than 24 hours. Any leakage that results in a loss of pressure greater than
0,15 bar for the 24 hours shall be corrected.
137
Any faults disclosed, such as permanent distortion, rupture or leakage, shall be corrected
and the test repeated.
Note: If climatic conditions do not allow hydraulic testing to be carried out immediately, it
should be carried out as soon as conditions permit.
17.1.2 Equipment
The system shall be tested in accordance with the routine control programme. Any
deficiencies shall be corrected.
17.1.3 Water supplies

Water supplies shall be tested in accordance with 7.5 over the required operating time at
100% of the nominal delivery rate of the pump. If the maximum flow demand (Qmax)
exceeds 100% of the nominal delivery rate, this quantity shall be delivered for at least 15
minutes in this test run. Diesel motor driven pumps shall also be tested in accordance
with 18.3.3.4 and 18.3.3.5.
17.2 Installation certificate and documents

17.2.1 Required documents for VdS Schadenverhütung
Upon completion of the installation the installer shall issue an installation certificate and
send it to VdS without being asked. The following documents shall be attached to the
installation certificate:
− hydraulic calculation relevant for rating the water supply;

− drawing of reduced capacity tank/storage tank;
− power supply details;
− pressure test report (not required for extensions of less than 11 sprinklers);
− flushing test report (not required for extensions of less than 11 sprinklers);
− pump test report in accordance with 17.1.3;
− handover document to the operator;
− list of companies, institutions etc. responsible for maintaining the operational
readiness in case of sprinkler systems installed in buildings occupied by several
companies etc.;
− manufacturing document for the welding procedure of prefabricated pipes;
− for reduced capacity and storage tanks made of reinforced concrete:
− test report on the concrete quality;
− test report and reinforcement approval by a test engineer for structural design.
17.2.2 Required documents for the operator

a) Installation certificate stating that the system complies with all appropriate requirements
of these rules, or giving details of any deviation from the requirements;
b) a complete set of operating instructions and "asbuilt" drawings including identification of
all valves and instruments used for testing and operation and an operator’s programme
for inspection and checking (see 18.3).
138
18 Maintenance of operational readiness
18.1 General
Sprinkler, water spray and foam extinguishing systems have a high success rate in
extinguishing fires, also in hazards with high fire loads. To maintain operational readiness
of these extinguishing systems, regular inspections and repairs shall be carried out. This
clause specifies the minimum measures to be taken and the parties responsible for
carrying them out. Given the diversity of system designs, however, it is impossible to
specify the full range of control and repair measures.
The operator shall carry out regular inspections (see 18.3).
The operator shall appoint one responsible staff member (“sprinkler warden”) and one
deputy to be in charge of servicing and controlling the extinguishing system. They shall
see to it that the operating and maintenance instructions of the installer and any legal
regulations are met.
After control and repair works the entire system shall be returned to the proper
operational condition.
On all works carried out for maintaining the operational readiness the operator shall keep
a log book to be kept on the premises (e.g. VdS 2212).
Note: The operator should notify all persons involved of the intent to carry out the a.m.
works and/or of the results.
Any modification or servicing of water extinguishing systems, such as inspections,

maintenance works or repairs shall be carried out by installers who are VdS-approved for
the respective type of system, have the system-specific spare parts and the required
data.
Note: The VdS-approved installers for water extinguishing systems are listed in VdS
2490.
18.1.1 Replacement sprinklers

A stock of spare sprinklers shall be kept on the premises as replacements for operated or
damaged sprinklers. Spare sprinklers, together with sprinkler spanners as supplied by the
manufacturer, shall be housed in a cabinet or cabinets located in a prominent and easily
accessible position where ambient temperature does not exceed 38°C.
The number of spare sprinklers shall be not less than:
a) 6 for LH installations;
b) 24 for OH installations;
c) 36 for HHP and HHS installations.
The stock shall be replenished promptly after spares are used.
Where installations contain high-temperature sprinklers, sidewall or other variations of

sprinkler pattern or contain control valves, an adequate number of these spares shall also
be maintained.
139
Old spare sprinklers no longer approved (e.g. those with a response sensitivity RTI > 200)
shall be replaced by approved sprinklers or complemented by them not later than in the
following cases:
− when sprinklers are installed in racks with PP/PE/PS materials or storage containers;
− when substantial extensions or modifications of installations are carried out.
18.1.1.1 Replacement of installed old sprinklers
Installed sprinklers operate under a variance permit, subject to the following exceptions:
− rack sprinklers in storages with PP/PE/PS materials or storage containers, where the
sprinklers are no longer approved for the application; they shall be replaced by
sprinklers approved for the relevant hazard;
− applications in which the performance of old sprinklers is doubtful (e.g. insufficient
response sensitivity in low voids with increased fire load).
After considerable reconstruction or change of use in existing sprinkler systems the a.m.
variance permit does not apply.
Old sprinklers shall be replaced by new approved sprinklers not later than 50 years after
installation.
18.1.2 Precautions and procedures when a system is not fully operational

18.1.2.1 Minimising the effects
Servicing, alterations and repairs of systems which are not fully operational shall be
carried out such as to minimise the time and extent of non-operation.
When an installation is rendered inoperative the operator shall implement at least the
following measures:
a) the fire authorities shall be informed if the alarm is connected to the fire
brigade;
b) alterations and repairs to an installation or its water supply (except possibly a

life safety installation, see Annex F) shall be carried out during normal working
hours;
c) any hot work shall be subject to a permit system. Smoking and naked lights
shall be prohibited in affected areas during the progress of the work;
d) when an installation remains inoperative outside working hours all fire doors
and fire shutters shall remain closed;
e) fire extinguishing appliances shall be kept in readiness, with trained personnel

available to handle them;
f) as much as possible of the installation shall be retained in an operative

condition by cutting off pipework feeding the part or parts where work is taking
place;
g) in the case of manufacturing premises, when the alterations or repairs are

extensive, or it is necessary to disconnect a pipe exceeding 40 mm diameter,
or to overhaul or remove a main stop valve, alarm valve or check valve, every
effort shall be made to carry out the work while any machines are turned off;
140
h) any pump which is out of commission shall be isolated by means of the valves
provided.
i) The staff responsible for monitoring the respective areas shall be informed and
the areas shall be permanently inspected.
Note: Where possible, parts of the zones should be reinstated to provide some protection
overnight by using blinders and blanks within the pipework; the blinders and blanks shall
be fitted with visible indicator tags numbered and logged to ensure their removal after the
works have been finished.
18.1.2.2 Planned shut-down
Only the operator shall give permission for a sprinkler group or zone to be shut down for
any reason other than an emergency.
Before a system is wholly or partly shut down every part of the premises shall be checked
to ensure that there is no indication of fire.
Where premises are subdivided into separate occupancies constituting buildings in

communication or into risks protected by common sprinkler installations, all occupiers shall
also be advised that the installation is to be turned off.
Particular attention shall be given to situations where installation pipework passes

through walls or ceilings where these may feed sprinklers in areas needing special
consideration.
18.1.2.3 Unplanned shut-down
When an installation is rendered inoperative as a matter of urgency or by accident, the

precautions in 18.1.2.1 shall be observed as far as they are applicable with the least
possible delay. The authorities shall also be notified as soon as is possible.
18.2 Action following sprinkler operation

18.2.1 General
The water to an installation or zone of an installation that has operated shall not be shut off
until all fire has been extinguished.
The decision to shut down an installation or zone which has operated because of fire
shall be taken only by the fire brigade.
Following shut-down after operation of an installation, the operated sprinkler heads shall
be replaced by heads of the correct type and temperature rating, and the water supply
restored. Unopened sprinklers around the area in which operation took place shall be
checked for damage by heat or other cause and replaced as necessary.
Components removed from the system shall be retained by the operator for possible
examination by an authority.
18.3 Operator’s control programme

General
The installer shall provide the operator with instructions on the controls of the system to
be carried out. This includes action to be taken in respect of faults and operation of the
141
system, with particular mention of the procedure for emergency manual starting of
pumps, and details of the weekly control as per 18.3.3.
Note: In the case of installations without any significant safety deficiencies,
− inspected by VdS at least once a year,

− being subject to the conclusion of a servicing contract with a VdS-approved installer,
and
− being subject to appropriate organisational measures,
the daily and weekly controls may be adjusted accordingly and by agreement with VdS.
18.3.1 Special controls

During the cold season sprinkler systems shall be especially protected against freezing.
The pipework of dry pipe systems shall be drained before and during each frost period. For
further details on the protection of sprinkler systems against freezing see VdS 2373.
The following controls shall be carried out and recorded:
− accumulators
The electrolyte level and density of all cells of accumulators (including those in diesel
engine starter batteries and those for controller power supplies) shall be controlled. If
the density is low, the installer shall check the battery charger. If the charger is
working normally, the installer shall replace the battery or batteries affected.
− control of compressor oil levels
Any procedures stipulated by the component manufacturers shall be carried out
additionally.
18.3.2 Daily controls

Daily controls shall be carried out on all weekdays. Maximum interval between controls
due to Sundays and holidays shall be three days. In the case of systems whose
operational status is monitored automatically in accordance with Clause 19, daily controls
are not necessary. In this case, controls shall be carried out at least once a week.
The following shall be checked and recorded:
− fill levels in water tanks (storage tanks, reduced capacity tanks, ground and elevated
tanks and pump priming tanks);
− fill levels in pressure tanks;
− fill levels in fuel tanks;
− fill levels in foam concentrate tanks;
− pressure in pressure tanks;
− pressure upstream of alarm valves;
− pressure in pipework of dry, alternate and pre-action installations;
− functionality of the heating equipment (during heating period) in the sprinkler
equipment room, for wet pipe systems, etc.
142
18.3.3 Weekly control

18.3.3.1 General
Each part of the weekly routine shall be carried out at intervals of not more than 7 days.
18.3.3.2 Controls
The following shall be controlled and recorded:
a) the correct operational position of all main stop valves;

Note: The slide valves in pipes, e.g. upstream and downstream of the pump, from the
water supplies to the extinguishing system, upstream of alarm valves being able to
interrupt the water flow, shall be secured in the open position such that unauthorised
persons cannot adjust them. The slide valves in pipes, e.g. test pipe, pipe leading to the
fire department supply connections, draining pipe of tanks being able to decrease the
water flow, shall be secured in the closed position such that unauthorised persons cannot
adjust them.
b) any water levels in rivers, canals, lakes that are relevant for the water supply of the
system.
18.3.3.3 Water motor alarm control
Each water motor alarm shall be sounded for not less than 30 s and simultaneously the
connection to the fire brigade or the permanently manned location shall be checked.
Note: The procedure shall be agreed with the alarm signal recipient.
18.3.3.4 Automatic pump starting control
The automatic pump starting control shall include the following:
a) fuel and engine lubricating oil and cooling water levels in diesel engines shall be
checked;
b) water pressure on the starting device shall be reduced, thus simulating the condition of
automatic starting;
c) when the pump starts, the starting pressure shall be checked and recorded;
d) the oil pressure, cooling water temperature and engine speed on diesel engines shall be
checked, as well as the flow of cooling water through open circuit cooling systems
For pump start controls the test run shall last until the normal operating data of the driving
motor, such as power consumption, oil/cooling water temperature, are reached. In the case
of electric motors the power consumption is measured.
18.3.3.5 Control of manual diesel engine restart
Immediately after the pump start as per 18.3.3.4, the following diesel engine controls shall
be carried out:
a) the engine shall be run for the time recommended by the manufacturer, or at least until
the operating temperature has been reached; the engine shall then be stopped and
immediately restarted using the manual start button;
b) the water level in the primary circuit of closed circuit cooling systems shall be controlled.
143
Oil pressure, engine temperatures and coolant flow shall be monitored throughout the
control. Oil pipes shall be controlled and a general control made for leakage of fuel,
coolant or exhaust fumes.
This also applies to diesel engines of standby supply generators.
18.3.4 Monthly control
The following shall be controlled and recorded:
− visual control of pipework, sprinklers, nozzles and pipe hangers;

− function control of automatic priming and refill equipment for reduced capacity tanks,
pump priming tanks and elevated reservoirs;
− control of permitted storage heights; control of minimum spacing between sprinkler
deflector or nozzles and top of stored goods;
− sprinkler systems with foam proportioning;
− function control of the proportioning unit and any of its fittings without the use of water
or foaming agent.
18.3.5 Quarterly control

General
The following controls and inspections shall be made and recorded at intervals of not
more than 13 weeks by the operator/person responsible (“sprinkler warden”). These
checks may also be carried out during the servicing by a VdS-approved installer:
18.3.5.1 Control of fire hazard classification
The effect of any changes of structure, occupancy, storage configuration, heating, lighting
or equipment etc. of a building on hazard classification or installation design shall be
identified in order that the appropriate modifications may be carried out.
Note: Following significant modifications the correct hazard classification should be agreed
with the authorities or an approved installer.
18.3.5.2 Sprinklers, multiple controls and sprayers
Sprinklers, multiple controls and sprayers affected by deposits shall be carefully cleaned.
Painted or distorted sprinkler heads, multiple controls or sprayers shall be replaced by a
VdS-approved installer.
Particular attention shall be paid to sprinklers in spray booths, where more frequent
cleaning and/or protective measures are necessary.
18.3.5.3 Pipework and pipe hangers
Pipework and hangers shall be random-checked for corrosion and painted as necessary.
Bitumen-based paint on pipework, including the threaded ends of galvanised pipework,

and hangers shall be renewed as necessary.
Note: Bitumen-based paint may need renewal at intervals varying from 1 to 5 years
according to the severity of the conditions.
144
Tape wrapping on pipes shall be repaired as necessary.
The pipework shall be controlled for electrical earthing connections. Sprinkler pipework
shall not be used for earthing electrical equipment and any earthing connections from
electrical equipment shall be removed and alternative arrangements made.
18.3.5.4 Protection against freezing
The specific gravity of the anti-freeze solution shall be verified quarterly for unheated
areas during the frost period, and generally quarterly for permanent cold storage.
18.3.5.5 Electrical supplies
Any secondary electrical supplies from diesel generators shall be checked for satisfactory
operation.
18.3.5.6 Stop valves
All stop valves controlling the flow of water to sprinklers shall be operated to ensure that
they are in working order, and securely refastened in the correct mode. This shall include
the stop valves on all water supplies, at the alarm valves and all zone or other subsidiary
stop valves.
18.3.5.7 Water flow alarm switches
Water flow alarm switches shall be controlled for correct function and allocation to the
area of protection.
18.3.5.8 Trace heating and localised heating systems
Heating systems to prevent freezing in the sprinkler system shall be checked for correct
function.
18.3.5.9 Monitoring system

Function control of the monitoring system (at least 1 transmitter per monitoring line);
including transmission to permanently manned location.
18.4 Servicing programme by VdS-approved installer

Each routine of the schedule shall be carried out by a competent person of the VdS-
approved installer who shall provide the operator with a signed, dated report of the
inspection and advise of any rectification carried out or needed, and advise of any
external factors, which may have affected the results.
Any procedures stipulated by the component manufacturers shall be carried out in

addition to this programme.
18.4.1 Half-yearly servicing routine by VdS-approved installer

18.4.1.1 General
The following checks and inspections shall be made and recorded at intervals of not more
than 6 months.
145
18.4.1.2 Control of pump start
If in the event of a power failure an electric motor is supplied by an emergency power

supply, the automatic changeover shall be tested.
18.4.1.3 Dry alarm valves
Dry alarm valves, and any accelerators and exhausters in dry pipe installations and
subsidiary extensions shall be submitted to a trip test.
To avoid flooding the entire pipework, an additional valve may be fitted downstream of
the alarm valve. This shall be secured in the open position.
Every five years the dry pipe installation shall be checked by carrying out the trip test with
total flooding via the test facility in the presence of the authorities.
18.4.1.4 Sprinkler systems with foam proportioning
A function test of the foam proportioning unit shall be carried out with water, but without
foaming agent. The functioning of all mechanical and electrical components of the foam
proportioning unit shall be tested without using any foam concentrate.
Foam tanks and components permanently in contact with foam concentrate shall be
checked for visible signs of defects, e.g. leakages and fouling of seals.
18.4.2 Yearly servicing by VdS-approved installer

18.4.2.1 General
than 12 months.
18.4.2.2 Wet alarm valves
Mechanically moveable components shall be checked for smooth movement.
18.4.2.3 Automatic pump flow test and public mains flow test (direct connection)
Each water supply pump or direct connection in the installation shall be tested at the full load
condition. The entire operational area of the pump (pump curve) or of the direct connection
shall be checked. The required pressure/flow values shall be reached.
Note: Appropriate allowances shall be made for pressure losses in the supply pipe and
valves between the source and the gauge at the measuring point.
18.4.2.4 Diesel engine failed-to-start test
The failed-to-start alarm shall operate after the sixth cycle of cranking, when the following
sequence is carried out:
a) the fuel supply shall be isolated;

b) the engine shall be cranked for not less than 15 s;
c) cranking shall be stopped for not less than 10 s and not more than 15 s;
d) (b) and (c) shall be repeated a further five times;
e) the fuel supply shall be restored.
Immediately after this test the engine shall be started using the manual starting system.
146
18.4.2.5 Float valves on water storage tanks
Float valves on water storage tanks shall be checked for correct function.
18.4.2.6 Strainers and screens
Strainers and screens in the water supply shall be inspected at least annually and cleaned
as necessary.
18.4.2.7 Sprinkler systems with foam proportioning
The foam quality of sprinkler systems with foam proportioning shall be checked by the
manufacturer or by a trained expert in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
The availability of specified quantities of concentrate in operational foam concentrate
tanks and the available reserve quantity should be checked in accordance with the
appropriate requirements.
A function test of the foam proportioning unit and any of its fittings shall be carried out
using foam concentrate via the test pipe. The functioning of the foam proportioning unit
shall be tested at a flow of 500 l/min. Appropriate flow measuring devices shall be fixed
(or available). The foam proportioning percentage shall comply with the foam concentrate
manufacturer’s specifications or come within the tolerances specified by the
manufacturer. During the test the water/foam concentrate mixture shall be led into an
appropriately dimensioned collecting tray via an appropriate connection. The operator is
responsible for a controlled disposal of the water/foam concentrate mixture. Any
contamination of the water supply by foam concentrate shall be prevented. Immediately
after expiry of the period specified for the proportioning, the water/foam concentrate
mixture shall be drained from the test pipe. The period specified for the proportioning
shall not exceed 3 min. The design concentration of the foam concentrate shall be
verified by appropriate measures (e.g. refractometer, conductivity measurement device).
Following the test, any components in contact with the foam concentrate, which are free
of foam concentrate while in operational status, shall be flushed with water.
Any components permanently filled with foam concentrate mixture shall be drained and
thoroughly flushed with water before refilling with foam concentrate or foam concentrate
mixture.
18.4.3 3-year inspection by VdS-approved installer

18.4.3.1 General
than 3 years.
18.4.3.2 Water supply stop valves, alarm and non-return valves
All water stop valves, alarm and non-return valves shall be controlled and replaced or
repaired as necessary.

Storage and pressure tanks
All tanks shall be examined for corrosion externally and internally. The tanks shall be
cleaned, repainted and/or have the corrosion protection refurbished, as necessary.
The test intervals for pressure tanks shall be in accordance with the Pressure Equipment
Directive and the appropriate legal regulations.
147

At not more than 15-year intervals, all storage tanks shall be drained, cleaned, and
examined internally. The structure shall be repaired, as necessary.
18.4.6 25-year inspection/12,5-year inspection

More details regarding procedure and extent of the inspection are given in the leaflet VdS
2091.
The entire pipework of wet pipe systems shall be inspected every 25 years, and the entire
pipework of dry pipe systems shall be inspected every 12,5 years. The pipework shall be
pressurised with 10 bar minimum and thoroughly flushed after the test, as necessary.
Missing test facilities (see 13.5.2) at the end of the pipework shall be added. For every
100 sprinklers one branch pipe, or a total of at least three pipes, whichever is the
greatest, shall be checked for incrustation and corrosion. Any damage affecting the
performance of the system shall be removed. In addition, different diameters of main
distribution pipes and distribution pipe spurs shall be checked, with at least one pipe each
of three diameters.
The inspection of pipe sections of wet pipe systems may generally be limited to the
number of alarm valve stations to be checked as per Table 18.01.
Wet pipe systems
Number of alarm valve stations Number of alarm valve stations to be checked
(pipework)
up to 10 1
up to 20 2
up to 30 3
up to 40 4
up to 50 5
etc.
Table 18.01: Random inspections of pipework
Where the stations are located in several buildings, at least the pipework of one alarm
valve station per building shall be inspected.
If the pipework of several alarm valve stations within one building requires inspection,
especially those areas should be checked in which operational influences may have
caused damage to the pipework.
The scope of inspections for dry pipe systems shall not be reduced.
The characteristics of the installed sprinklers of each installer shall be randomly tested by
the VdS Laboratories. The scope of random tests is specified in Table 18.02.
148
Total number of sprinklers Number of sprinklers to be submitted

up to 5.000 20
up to 10.000 40
up to 20.000 60
up to 30.000 80
up to 40.000 100
more than 40.000 determined by VdS according to hazard
Table 18.02: Random tests of sprinklers
Where dry pendent sprinklers are installed, these shall also be randomly tested by the VdS
Laboratories every 12,5 years. The scope of random tests is specified in Table 18.03.
Total number of dry pendent sprinklers Number of sprinklers to be submitted

up to 100 5
up to 200 10
more than 200 in accordance with Table 18.02
Table 18.03: Random tests of dry pendent sprinklers
Sprinklers should mainly be taken from those areas in which operational influences may
have caused damage to the sprinklers, e.g.:
− frequent change of water due to sprinkler system extensions;

− highly corrosive ambient conditions;
− influence of the water used;
− periodical temperature variations;
− vibrations;
− radiant heat.
Where the sprinklers are located in different buildings, at least 20 sprinklers per building
shall be submitted.
In the case of different operational influences within one building it may be necessary to
check a larger number of sprinklers. VdS will determine the number according to the
hazard in question.
Additional measures shall be taken if
− the error rate possibly causing failure > 2,5%;

− the error rate possibly causing impairment > 25%;
− the sum of both > 25%.
Two further random tests may be carried out to confirm or verify the result, with the error
rate being assessed for all sprinklers submitted. If after the third random test the error
rate of all the tested sprinklers exceeds the a.m. values, appropriate measures shall be
taken, e.g. the sprinklers of the respective system shall be removed. Where the negative
results refer to parts of the system whose ambient conditions are not representative for
the entire system, VdS shall evaluate the system with regard to the ambient conditions.
This may involve new random tests in a different part of the system, in which case the
negative results of former random tests are disregarded.
149
Note 1: Further random checks will only make sense if the a.m. error rates may be fallen
below by all samples taken (sum of all individual samples). This shall apply to a second
random check of the same scope if the error rate of the first random check
− possibly causing failure does not exceed 5%;

− possibly causing impairment does not exceed 50%;
− the sum of both does not exceed 50%.
A third random check of the same scope will only make sense if the total error rate of both
prior random checks
− possibly causing failure does not exceed 3,25%;

− possibly causing impairment does not exceed 37,5%;
− the sum of both does not exceed 37,5%.
From an economic point of view it is advisable to consider whether a second or third
random check makes sense with regard to the size of the system. The minimum scope of
the random check shall be in accordance with Table 18.01. Any increase shall be agreed
with VdS.
If possible, one random check should include sprinklers of the same construction, installed
in areas typical for the system. If the system includes sprinklers of different construction,
samples representative of each construction should be submitted.
Note 2: A failure of individual sprinklers will be assumed if the sprinkler does not open,
the K factor is reduced by 30%, or the water is not distributed. An impairment will be
assumed if the K-factor is reduced by more than 10%, or in the case of inherent
obstructions to spray.
For the sprinkler system the VdS-approved installer shall submit to VdS a document
confirming the tasks carried out.
For 12,5/25-year inspections the requirements specified in VdS 2091 shall be met.
18.4.7 Modifications by VdS-approved installer

Any modifications to sprinklered areas, e.g. partitions, false ceilings, new machines or
modified operating equipment, require an adjustment of the sprinkler protection.
150
19 Monitoring of sprinkler systems

In the following cases the operational status of sprinkler systems shall be monitored
automatically:
− OH systems with more than 3000 sprinklers;

− HHP and HHS systems with more than 750 sprinklers;
− high rack storage systems with more than 80 sprinklers.
This requirement may also apply to sprinkler systems of other fire hazard classes,
especially in the case of increased requirements for life safety reasons.
19.1 Stop valves

System parts whose failure or wrong adjustment may interrupt the flow of extinguishing
water, prevent an alarm or the automatic start of pumping devices (e.g. sprinkler
pumps) shall be permanently monitored for operational status.
The following shall be monitored for correct adjustment:
− stop valves fitted in the extinguishing water flow, such as slide valves in the main
water pipe, or slide valves for feed valves;
− stop valves that are fitted not directly in the extinguishing flow, but may impair the
extinguishing water flow, such as slide valves in the test pipe;
− stop valves of pressure switches upstream of alarm devices, in fuel pipes, of fill
level indicators, of monitoring equipment, in pipes of pump priming tanks;
− stop valves in the connection between accelerator or exhauster and dry pipework.
19.2 Fill level

The sufficient storage of extinguishing water and fuel shall be monitored. This shall
include e.g. the fill level of:
− storage tanks, such as intermediate, ground and elevated tanks;

− pressure tanks;
− fuel tanks;
− pump priming tanks.
The monitoring device shall be easy to check.
19.3 Pressure
The operating pressure of main water pipes, pressure tanks and dry pipe systems shall
be monitored.
19.4 Power supply

The power supply of the sprinkler system shall be monitored for power failure,
disablement of the sprinkler pump controller, faulty controls of diesel engines or backup
power generators.
151
Regarding diesel engines and backup power generators the primary side of the
chargers and the control voltage shall be monitored.
19.5 Lines
Switching and control lines for the transmission of switching commands shall be
monitored automatically for broken wire and short circuit, provided that these faults
would impair the operation of the sprinkler system. This does not apply to circuits that
fully run in the transmission and receiving equipment.
Lines for receiving and transmitting fault warnings shall be monitored for broken wire
and short circuit.
19.6 Detector lines

In the case of individual indications not more than 60 fault detectors shall be included
in one detector line. In all other cases not more than 15 fault detectors are permitted.
19.7 Sprinkler pump

While the sprinkler system is in operational status, any operation of the sprinkler pump
shall be indicated as a fault.
19.8 Sprinkler equipment room

The sprinkler equipment room shall be monitored for keeping the minimum
temperature as well as for flooding (if possible due to local conditions).
19.9 Fault warning

Any faults of the sprinkler system shall be indicated visually and audibly at a
permanently manned location within the company. The audible signal shall be
silenceable; the visual indication shall not extinguish until the fault has been remedied.
If the company does not have any permanently manned location, the fault warning
shall be transmitted automatically to staff members (e.g. via a telephone dialling
device).
Faults of the sprinkler system and faults of the monitoring system shall be indicated
separately. As long as a fire alarm is indicated, the monitoring system or monitoring
module of the control and indicating equipment shall not indicate any fault warnings.
19.10 Power supply of monitoring system

The power supply requires two power sources. One power source shall be an electrical
network operated without interruption. The other power source shall be an accumulator
automatically and uninterruptedly taking over the power supply of the monitoring
system. The power sources shall have fixed connections to the monitoring system.
The failure of one power source, even due to faults such as broken wire or short circuit,
shall not lead to a failure of the other power source.
19.11 Power supply from electrical network

The power supply from the electrical network shall be designed such that an unlimited
operation of the system and alarm devices is ensured. The power supply from the
152
electrical network shall be able to supply the charging current for the accumulator
regular operation.
The power supply from the electrical network requires a separate circuit with a
separate, specially labelled fuse. Upstream of this fuse and up to the low-voltage-
lateral point of delivery of the electrical network (point of delivery into the building in
which the monitoring system is located) only one more fuse may be fitted. A
disablement of other equipment shall by no means interrupt the circuit.
The charging device shall be designed such that it can automatically charge the
accumulator from end-of-discharge voltage to 80% of its nominal capacity within 24 h
maximum. The charging process shall take no longer than 72 h.
19.12 Power supply from accumulators

For systems with automatic fault warning at a not permanently manned location, the
capacity of the accumulator shall be designed such that in the case of faulty network
supply an unqualified operation of the system is ensured for not less than 72 h. After
72h the necessary alarm devices shall be operable for not less than 0,5 h.
For systems with automatic fault warning at a permanently manned location (provided
that an appropriate troubleshooting service is permanently available), the capacity of
the accumulator shall be designed such that in the case of faulty network supply an
unqualified operation of the system is ensured for not less than 30 h. After 30 h the
necessary alarm devices shall be operable for not less than 0,5 h.
For systems with automatic fault warning at a permanently manned location with a
permanently available troubleshooting service), the capacity of the accumulator shall
be designed such that in the case of faulty network supply an unqualified operation of
the system is ensured for not less than 4 h. After 4 h the necessary alarm devices shall
be operable for not less than 0,5 h. Separate equipment shall be available for the
network power supply of monitoring system and charging device, and it shall be
possible to immediately connect an emergency generating unit for supplying the
charging device. The emergency generating unit shall be able to supply the monitoring
system for not less than 30 h.
The accumulator shall not be connected to any loads other than the sprinkler system.
Accumulators shall be located sufficiently ventilated, dry and frost-proof rooms. They
shall be positioned where they are protected from anticipated external impact as may
lead to damage. Maintenance and inspection on the spot shall be possible.
19.13 Requirements to components of monitoring systems

Any components of monitoring systems shall be at least protection type IP 54.
The functioning of the monitoring system shall be verifiable.
Fault warnings for stop valves shall be released according to the shifting travel of the
valves to be monitored. The shifting travel is the way from the just about closed
condition to the completely open condition of the valve.
Any stop valves fitted in the extinguishing water flow and any other stop valves that are
permanently open while the sprinkler system is operational, shall, during closing,
release a fault warning at not more than 20% of the shifting travel from the operational
status of the valve.
153
Any stop valves not fitted in the extinguishing water flow and closed while the sprinkler
system is operational, shall release a fault warning before the water flow starts and at
the latest at 10% of the shifting travel from the operational status of the valve.
Fault warnings of stop valves of alarm devices and pressure switches shall be released
even in intermediate positions.
Fill level indicators of tanks shall release a fault warning if the nominal fill level is
reduced by more than 10%. Pressure tanks shall release a fault warning if overfilled by
more than 10%. Fuel tanks shall release a fault warning if the nominal fill level is
reduced by more than 25%.
The pressure monitoring of sprinkler systems immediately connected to public water

mains shall release a fault warning, if the static pressure falls below the minimum
pressure of the hydraulic calculation.
Where reduced capacity tanks are refilled from public water mains, a fault warning
shall be released, if the pressure in the water mains falls below 1 bar.
In pressure tanks an operating pressure reduced by more than 10% shall release a
fault warning.
In dry pipe systems an operating pressure in the pipework reduced by more than 20%
shall release a fault warning.
154
Annex A
Classification of Hazards
Tables A.01, A.02 and A.03 contain lists of minimum hazard classification. They shall
also be used as guidance for occupancies not specifically mentioned.
Schools and other educational institutions (certain areas)
Offices (certain areas)
Hotels (certain areas, see 5.2.1)
Prisons
Table A.01: Light hazard occupancies (LH)
Type of Ordinary hazard group

business
OH1 OH2 1) OH3 2) OH4
Ceramics glass factories
Chemicals cement photographic dyers paint application
works laboratories soap factories shops with water-
photographic film soluble substances
manufacturers
Engineering sheet metal engineering car workshops

product factories (garages)
manufactur electronics factories
ers radio equipment
factories
washing machine
factories
Food and abattoirs animal fodder alcohol distilleries
beverages bakeries manufacturers
biscuit factories corn mills
breweries dehydrated vegetable
chocolate and
factories soup manufacturers
confectionery farms
factories sugar manufacturers
dairies
Miscellaneo hospitals laboratories broadcasting studios cinemas and
us hotels (physical) railway stations theatres
libraries laundries operating rooms concert halls
excluding car parks (non- convention rooms
book stores automatic) tobacco
restaurants museums manufacturers
schools TV studios
(LH, see
5.2.1)
offices (LH,
see 5.2.1)
Paper book binders waste paper
cardboard processing
manufacturers
paper factories
155
Type of Ordinary hazard group

business 1)
OH1 OH2 OH3 2) OH4
Rubber and cable manufacturers
plastics (excluding PP/PE/PS
or materials with
similar fire behaviour,
see HHP1)
injection moulding
(plastics excluding
PP/PE/PS or materials
with similar fire
behaviour, see HHP1)
plastic manufacturers
and plastic goods
(excluding foam
plastics, PP/PE/PS or
materials with similar
fire behaviour, see
HHP1)
Shops and data department stores exhibition halls 4)
offices processing shopping centres
(computer
room
excluding
tape
storage)
offices (LH,
see 5.2.1)
Textiles and leather goods carpet manufacturers cotton mills
clothing manufacturers (excluding rubber and flax preparation
foam plastics) plants
cloth and clothing hemp preparation
factories plants
footwear
manufacturers
(excluding synthetic
leather shoes)
knitting manufacturers
linen manufacturers
mattress
manufacturers
(excluding foam
plastics)
sewing manufacturers
weaving mills
woollen and worsted
mills
Timber and woodworking plywood
wood manufacturers manufacturers
furniture factories
(without foam plastics)
furniture showrooms
upholsterers (without
foam plastics)
1) Areas where there is panting; large quantities of flammable liquids or similar high fire load areas shall
be treated as OH3.
2) Warehouses generally and high rise buildings according to Annex D in order to ensure flexibility.
3) Where combustible panels are used for insulation purposes, a higher hazard classification should be
considered.
4) Very high ceilings require special consideration.
Table A.02: Ordinary hazard occupancies
156
HHP1 HHP2 HHP3 HHP4

cable manufacture fire lighter cellulose nitrate firework
PP/PE/PS or manufacture manufacture manufacture
materials with similar candle wax and
fire behaviour expanded plastics,
paraffin factories expanded rubber and
carpet manufacturers carpet manufacturers expanded plastics
(with unexpanded (with rubber and products (M4)
plastics) expanded plastics) tires for motor
floor cloth and chipboard factories5) vehicles and freight
linoleum vehicles
paint, colour and
manufacture varnish manufacture
footwear paper machines
manufacturers with
synthetic or plastic saw mills
shoes tar processing
injection moulding depots for buses,
synthetics PP/PE/PS unloaded lorries and
or materials with railway cars
similar fire behaviour
(M3)
match manufacturers
print shops
paint shops with
solvent
plastic manufacture
and plastic goods
PP/PE/PS or
materials with similar
fire behaviour
refrigerator factories
resin, soot and
turpentine
manufacture
rope manufacturers
rubberware
manufacture
rubber substitute
manufacture
synthetic fibre
manufacture
(excluding acrylic)
wood wool
manufacture
5)
Additional local application may be necessary.
Table A.03: High hazard process occupancies
157
Annex B
Process for Categorising Stored Materials
B.1 General
The overall fire hazard of stored goods (defined as a product and its packaging) is a
function of its heat release rate (kW) which in turn is a function of its heat of combustion
(kJ/kg) and its burning rate (kg/sec).
The heat of combustion is determined by the material or mix of materials in the goods.
The burning rate is determined by both the materials involved and the configuration of the
material.
To categorise products, this method first addresses the material involved to produce a
« material factor » and then modifies this where necessary due to the configuration of the
goods to determine the category. Where no modification is required, the « material
factor » is the sole determinant of the Category.
Where stored goods and/or packaging contain polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene

or plastics with similar fire behaviour, they shall be categorised in accordance with B.2,
B.3 and B.4. The sprinkler system shall be designed according to the higher category
resulting from the two methods, with K.7 being the highest category.
B.2 Material factor

Figure B1 shall be used to determine the Material Factor when goods consist of mixtures
of materials. When using Figure B1, the stored goods shall be considered to include all
packaging and pallet material. For the purpose of this evaluation, rubber should be
treated in the same way as plastic.
The storage of rubber tires is subject to special requirements.
The following four material factors shall be used in determining the Category. (For
categorising polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene and plastics with similar fire
behaviour see also B.4.)
B.2.1 Material Factor 1

Non combustible products in combustible packaging and low or medium combustibility
products in combustible/non-combustible packaging. Products having little plastic content
as defined below (see Figure B.01):
− unexpanded plastic content less than 5% by weight (including the pallet);

− expanded plastic content less than 5% by volume.
Examples :
− metal parts with /without cardboard packaging on wood pallets;

− powdered foods in sacks;
− canned foods;
− non-synthetic cloth;
− leather goods;
158
− wood products;
− ceramics in cardboard/wood cases;
− metal tools in cardboard/wood packaging;
− plastic or glass bottles of non-flammable liquids in cartons;
− large electrical appliances (with little packaging).
Figure B.01: Material Factor

Materials having higher energy content than Material Factor 1 materials, for instance
those containing plastics in greater quantities (as defined in Figure B.01).
Examples:
− wood or metal furniture with plastic seats;

− electrical equipment with plastic parts or packaging;
− electric cables on reels or in cartons;
− synthetic fibres.

Materials which are predominantly unexpanded plastic (see Figure B.01) or materials of
similar energy content.
Examples:
− accumulators without electrolyte;

− plastic briefcases;
− personal computers;
− unexpanded plastic cups and cutlery.
159

Materials which are predominantly expanded plastic (more than 40% by volume) or
materials of similar energy content (see Figure B.01).
Examples:
− foam mattresses;
− expanded polystyrene packaging;
− foam upholstery.
Storage configuration Material Factor

1 2 3 4
Exposed plastic container with Cat. III or IV not not not
non-combustible contents applicable applicable applicable
Exposed plastic surface - unexpanded Cat. III Cat. III Cat. III Cat. IV
Exposed plastic surface - expanded Cat. IV Cat. IV Cat. IV Cat. IV
Open structure Cat. II Cat. II Cat. III Cat. IV
Solid block materials Cat. I Cat. I Cat. II Cat. IV
Granular or powdered material Cat. I Cat. II Cat. II Cat. IV
No special configuration Cat. I Cat. II Cat. III Cat. IV
Note: See B.3.1 to B.3.7 for explanations of the storage configurations.
Table B.01: Categories as a function of stored materials configuration
B.3 Effect of stored materials configuration

After determining the material factor, the stored materials configuration shall be consulted
in Table B.01 to determine the most appropriate Categorisation. If an appropriate
category is given in Table C.01 the higher of the two values shall be used (see B.4).
The stored materials configurations specified in the table are described below.
B.3.1 Exposed plastic container with non-combustible content

This applies only to plastic containers containing non-flammable liquids or solids in direct
contact with the container.
Note : This configuration does not apply to metal parts in plastic storage boxes.
Category III: Containers with non-flammable liquids
Category IV: Containers with non-combustible solids
Examples:
− plastic bottles of soft drinks or liquids with less than 20% alcohol;
− plastic tubs or drums of inert powder such as talcum.
160
Note: The non-combustible contents act as a heat sink and reduce the burning rate of the
containers. Liquids are more effective than solids since they conduct heat more
efficiently.
B.3.2 Exposed plastic surface - unexpanded

The Category should be III or IV when the commodity has exposed plastic surfaces
comprising one or more sides or more than 25% of the surface area.
Example:
- metal parts in PVC storage containers
B.3.3 Exposed plastic surface - expanded

Exposed expanded plastics are more severe than unexposed plastics. They shall be
treated as Category IV.
B.3.4 Open structure

Materials having very open structures generally present a higher hazard than materials
with a closed structure. The high surface area together with high air access encourages
rapid burning.
The increase in hazard can be very substantial particularly with ordinary combustibles.
Examples:
− cardboard;
− in empty boxes assembled it is Category II (due to ready air access);
− in rolls stored vertically it is either Category III or greater (Special Risk) depending on
the storage method (closely stacked, banded or unbanded etc.).
B.3.5 Solid block materials

Materials in solid block form have a low surface area to volume/mass ratio. This reduces
the burning rate and permits a reduction in Category.
Example:
− blocks of solid rubber, PVC floor tiles in block storage etc.

Note: This configuration does not apply to blocks of expanded plastics (Category IV).
B.3.6 Granular or powdered materials

Granular materials excluding expanded plastics that will spill out during a fire tend to
smother the fire and are thus less hazardous than their basic material counterparts.
Example:
− plastic granules used for injection moulding stored in cardboard boxes

Note: This configuration does not apply to rack storage.
B.3.7 No special configuration

Goods that have none of the above characteristics, e.g. goods in cartons.
161
B.4 Additional categorising method for polypropylene,

polyethylene, polystyrene and plastics with similar fire
behaviour
Where stored goods and/or packaging contain polypropylene, polyethylene, polystyrene
or plastics with similar fire behaviour, they shall be categorised in accordance with B.2,
B.3 and Table B.02. The sprinkler system shall be designed according to the higher
category resulting from the two methods. If the percentage by weight of PP/PE/PS
materials exceeds that permitted according to L4, K.7 shall be applied for designing the
sprinkler system.
Stored goods2) Packaging1)

V1 V2 V3 V4
L1 Cat. I Cat. II Cat. III Cat. IV3)
L2 Cat. II Cat. II Cat. III Cat. IV3)
L3 Cat. III Cat. III Cat. III Cat. IV3)
L4 Cat. IV3) 4) Cat. IV3) 4) Cat. IV3) 4) Cat. IV3) 4)
1) see B.4.1
2) see B.4.2
3) When installing horizontal sheet barriers in racks in accordance with 11.6.1.4 , choose Cat. III.
4) In the case of categorisations due to PE/PP/PS with rack storage and quick response sprinklers and
packaging in cartons, Cat. III is possible.
Note: PP/PE/PS = Polyethylene (PE) / Polypropylene (PP) / Polystyrene (PS) and plastics with similar fire
behaviour
Table B.02: Categorisation of stored goods and/or packaging containing polypropylene,

polyethylene, polystyrene or plastics with similar fire behaviour
B.4.1 Packaging
Packaging shall be categorised in accordance with Table B.02 and the following:
V1 Non-combustible packaging, wood pallets and combustible edge protection are

permitted. The edge protection shall not include more than 20% of the surface area of
the packed goods. If the edge protection is made of foam, it shall not include more than
5% - and in the case of edge protection covered by combustible or non-combustible
materials not more than 10% - of the surface area of the packed goods. Packaging
made of wood, paper or plastics is not permitted. Beverage crates made of PP/PE/PS,
empty or with PET bottles, see Annex C.
V2 Wood crates, wood pallets, wood packaging, paper, carton, corrugated cardboard and
unexpanded plastics (excluding PE/PP/PS unless they are used as foil or edge
protection). Foams (excluding foams used for edge protection purposes) are not
permitted. Where foam is used for edge protection purposes, it shall not include more
than 5% - and in the case of edge protection within crates and cartons not more than
10% - of the surface area of the packed goods. Packaging made of PP/PE/PS materials
are permitted where the entire mass ratio per packaging unit (stored goods and
packaging) falls below 15% and not more than 10% of the entire surface made of
PP/PE/PS while the rest of the surface is made of non-combustible material. This
excludes tote boxes (KLT) and similar plastic boxes.
V3 Packaging types V1 resp. V2 in connection with foams or PP/PE/PS materials. The
foam percentage of the packaging, relating to the volume of the packed goods, shall not
exceed 15% - within crates and cartons 30%. Packaging made of PP/PE/PS materials
are permitted where the entire mass ratio per packaging unit (stored goods and
162
packaging) falls below 15%. The entire mass ratio of PP/PE/PS per packaging unit may
be 30%, provided that not more than 20% of the surface area is made of PP/PE/PS and
the rest is made of non-combustible material. This excludes tote boxes (KLT) and similar
plastic boxes.
V4 Packaging made of PP/PE/PS materials are permitted where the entire mass ratio per
packaging unit (stored goods and packaging) falls below 30%. The entire mass ratio of
PP/PE/PS per packaging unit may be 45%, provided that not more than 20% of the
surface area is made of PP/PE/PS and the rest of the surface area is made of non-
combustible material; apply K.7 where the mass ratio is higher. This excludes tote boxes
(KLT) and similar plastic boxes.
Where in spite of chaotic storage no accumulation of materials or packaging made of
PP/PE/PS occurs and this can be evidenced to VdS, the a.m. threshold values in
percent for the respective stored goods/packaging may be assigned to the entire
storage.
B.4.2 Stored goods

For categorising the stored goods according to Table B.02 the following shall be
observed:
L1 Non-combustible goods, also food in glasses or tin cans

L2 Goods of low and medium combustibility, such as wood, paper, cardboard. Foams are
permitted up to a ratio of 15% relating to the gross volume, provided that they are
enclosed by non-combustible material. PP/PE/PS materials are permitted up to a mass
ratio of 15%, provided that not more than 10% of the surface consist of PP/PE/PS and
the rest of non-combustible material. This excludes e.g. paper and carton in rolls stored
vertically, and corrugated cardboard stored vertically, toilet paper.
L3 Goods of high combustibility, such as vertically stored paper and carton rolls, wood piles
permeable to air, stored material with a foam ratio of up to 15% relating to the gross
volume, and goods with a foam ratio of up to 30% of the gross volume enclosed by non-
combustible material are permitted. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to 15%
are permitted. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to 30% are permitted,
provided that not more than 20% of the surface consist of PP/PE/PS and the rest
consists of non-combustible material.
L4 Goods with a higher foam ratio than specified in L3. Goods with a mass ratio of
PE/PP/PS of up to 30% are permitted. Goods with a mass ratio of PE/PP/PS of up to
45% are permitted, provided that not more than 30% of the surface consist of PP/PE/PS
and the rest consists of non-combustible material; for any higher mass ratio apply K.7.
Note: PP/PE/PS = polyethylene (PE) / polypropylene (PP) / polystyrene (PS) and plastics
with similar fire behaviour.
163
Annex C
Alphabetic Listing of Stored Products and
Categories
Table C.01 is applicable where any packaging of the goods, with or without pallets, is no
more hazardous than a cardboard box or a single layer of corrugated cardboard
wrapping.
Product Category Comments

Accumulators with II Plastic accumulator without electrolyte requires special
electrolyte protection in accordance with Annex B
Adhesives III
Adhesives without I
solvents
Asphalt paper II In horizontal rolls
Asphalt paper III In vertical rolls
Batteries, dry cell II See also accumulators
Beer I
Beer II Containers in plastic or wooden crates
Beverage crates III
(plastic) with empty
glass bottles
Beverage crates II Non-flammable beverages
(plastic) with full glass
bottles
Beverage crates III
(plastic) without bottles
or with full PET bottles
Beverage crates K7 In the case of block storage and under the following
(plastic) with empty conditions in OH 3 risks foam proportioning is not required:
PET bottles - blocks < 50 m² with appropriate aisles
- quick response sprinklers
- storage height 1,50 m max.
Books II
Candles See wax/paraffin
Canvas - tar- III
impregnated
Carbon black II
Cardboard (all types) III In rolls stored horizontally
Cardboard (all types) II Stored flat
Cardboard cartons III Empty, heavy weight, made up boxes
Cardboard cartons II Empty, light weight, made up boxes
Carpet tiles III
Carpets - without II
plastics
Carton - waxed, flats II
Carton - waxed, made- III
up
Cellulose II Baled, without nitrite and acetate
Cellulose pulp II
164

Ceramics I
Cereals II Boxed
Charcoal II Excluding impregnated charcoal
Charcoal, powder III
Cloth, synthetic III Stored flat
Cloth, wool or cotton II
Clothes II
Coconut matting II
Confectionery II
Cork II
Cotton - baled II Special measures may be necessary, such as
an increased area of operation
Crockery I
Electrical appliances I Predominantly metal construction (not more than 5%
plastics)
Electrical appliances III
Electrical cable or wire Storage in racks requires in-rack sprinklers in tier levels
Esparto, alfagrass III Loose or baled
Fertilizer solid II May require special measures
Fibreboard II
Firelighters (barbecue) III
Flax II Special measures may be necessary, such as
Flour II In sacks or paper bags
Foods - tinned I In cardboard boxes and trays
Foodstuffs II In sacks
Furniture - upholstered II With natural fibres and materials but
excluding plastics
Furniture - wooden II
Furs II Flat in boxes
Glass fibre I
Glassware I Empty
Grain II In sacks
Hemp II Special measures may be necessary, such as
Hides II
Jute II
Knitwear II See clothes
Laminated board II
Leather goods II
Linen II
Linoleum III
Matches III
Mattresses II
165

Mattresses IV With foamed plastics
Meat II Chilled or frozen
Metal goods I
Milk powder II In bags or sacks
Office material III
Paints I Water based
Paper II Sheets stored horizontally
Paper III Weight < 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. tissue paper), rolls stored
horizontally
Paper IV Weight < 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. tissue paper), rolls stored
vertically
Paper III Weight > 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. newspaper), rolls stored
vertically
Paper II Weight > 5 kg/100 m², (e.g. newspaper), rolls stored
horizontally
Paper - bitumen III
coated
Paper - pulp II Rolled or baled
Paper - waste III Special measures may be necessary, such as an increased
area of operation
Pillows II Feathers and down
Polypropylene and IV See B.4 and Annex K7
polyethylene or Rack storage: tier level sprinklers with max. horizontal
plastics with similar fire spacing of 1,5m and ceiling sprinklers with “special”
behaviour – storage response sensitivity.
containers
For all other storage types: max. storage height 3m; only
non-combustible pallets, e.g. steel and closed containers
shall be used; stacking height per pallet shall not exceed
1m; sprinkler shall have “special” response sensitivity.
In the case of block storage and OH3 risk a foam
proportioning is not necessary under the following
conditions:
- blocks < 50 m² with appropriate aisles,
- quick response sprinklers,
storage height 1,50 m max.
Polypropylene and See B.4 and polypropylene and polyethylene storage
polyethylene containers
Rags II Loose or baled
Resins III
Roof felt in rolls III Horizontal storage in rolls
Roof felt in rolls III Vertical storage in rolls
Rope - natural fibres II
Shoes II Max. 5% plastics or rubber
Shoes III More than 5% plastics or rubber
A 08
Soap II
Soap II Water-soluble
Spirituous liquors I 20% or less alcohol in glass bottles (others see Annex K)
Spirituous liquors III More than 20% alcohol in glass bottles (others see Annex
K)
String - natural fibres II
166

Sugar II In bags or sacks
Textiles See clothes
Timber III In ventilated stacks
Timber II Not in ventilated stacks
Timber - unsawn II
Tires By agreement with VdS
Tobacco II Leaf and finished goods
Vegetable fibres II Hay, straw, hemp, cotton etc
Special measures may be necessary, such as an increased
area of operation
Wax (paraffin) IV By agreement with VdS, proportioning of film forming foam
concentrate
Wicker work III
Wine I
Wood See timber
Wood - chipboard, II Stored flat, excluding ventilated stacks
plywood
Wood pulp II Baled
Wood veneer sheets III
Wood wool IV Baled
Table C1: Stored Products and Categories
167
Annex D
Requirements for Multi-Storey Buildings
D.1 Scope
This Annex specifies requirements particular to the sprinkler protection of multi-storey
buildings when zoning is adopted. It applies only to OH sprinkler installations of the wet
pipe type.
Note: See also Annex E – Special requirements for high rise systems.
D.2 Zoning of installations

Installations with sprinklers connected to a wet alarm valve station in OH risks may be
either zoned or not.
The number of sprinklers to be controlled by any one wet alarm valve station in Ordinary
Hazard may exceed 1000 (see Table 10.01), with the following restrictions:
a) the installation shall be zoned in accordance with D.3;

b) zoned installations shall not include any hazard greater than OH3;
c) car parks and areas involving the unloading and storage of goods shall be on a separate
unzoned installation;
d) the building shall be sprinkler protected throughout on all floors;
e) the total number of sprinklers controlled by any one alarm valve station shall not exceed
10000.
D.3 Requirements for zoned installations

D.3.1 Extent of zones
No zone shall:
a) include more than 500 sprinklers;

b) encompass more than one ownership;
c) cover more than one floor level, which may however include a mezzanine floor that is
not greater than 100 m².
D.3.2 Zone subsidiary stop valves

Each zone shall be independently controlled by a single zone subsidiary stop valve,
installed in a readily accessible position at the floor level of the zone it controls. Each
valve shall be secured open and be labelled to identify the area of protection it controls.
D.3.3 Flushing Valves

Each zone shall be fitted with a valve not less than 20 mm nominal diameter, either on
the end of the distribution pipe hydraulically most remote from the water supply, or on the
end of each distribution pipe spur, as appropriate. The valve outlet shall be fitted with a
brass plug cap.
168
D.3.4 Monitoring
Zoned sprinkler installations shall be provided with tamper proof devices to monitor the
status of:
a) each stop valve (i.e. either fully open or not fully open), including subsidiary stop valves,
capable of interrupting the flow of water to sprinklers;
b) water flow into each zone immediately downstream of each zone subsidiary stop valve,
to indicate the operation of each zone, by means of a water flow alarm switch capable of
detecting a flow equal to or greater than that from any single sprinkler;
c) water flow through each main installation alarm valve station.
D.3.5 Zone test and drainage facilities

Permanent test and drainage facilities shall be provided immediately downstream of the
water flow alarm switch on each zone. The test facility shall simulate operation of any
single sprinkler head. Adequate provision shall be made for the disposal of waste water.
D.3.6 Installation alarm valve station

The alarm valve station of a zoned sprinkler installation shall have two stop valves, one
on each side of a single alarm valve with a bypass connection of the same nominal bore
around all three valves, fitted with a normally closed stop valve (see Figure D.01). Each
of the three stop valves shall be fitted with tamper proof devices to monitor their status
(i.e. fully open or not fully open).
Figure D.01: Alarm valve bypass arrangement for zoned multi-storey building
installations
169
D.3.7 Installation monitoring and alarms

The monitoring devices required by D.3.4 and D.3.6 shall be electrically connected to a
control and indicating panel, located on the premises, where the following indications and
warnings shall be given:
a) by means of green visual indicators that each monitored stop valve is in its correct
operational position;
b) by means of audible devices and yellow visual indicators that one or more alarm valve
stations are not fully open;
c) by means of audible devices and yellow visual indicators that one or more zone
subsidiary stop valves are not fully open;
d) by means of audible devices and yellow visual indicators that the static pressure in any
trunk main supplying the system has fallen to a value 0,5 bar or more below the normal
static pressure;
e) by means of audible devices and red visual indicators that water is flowing into the
installation;
f) by means of audible devices and red visual indicators that water is flowing into one or
more zones.
Facilities shall be provided at the indicator panel for silencing the audible alarms but the
visual indicators shall continue to operate until the installation is restored to the normal
standby condition.
Any change in the panel alarm or fault indication after the audible alarm has been
silenced shall cause it to resume sounding until it is again silenced or the panel reset to
the normal standby condition.
D.4 Block Plan

Where installations are arranged in zones, the site block plan shall additionally indicate
the positions of the zone control valves.
170
Annex E
Special Requirements for High Rise Systems
E.1 Scope
This Annex specifies requirements particular to the sprinkler protection of multi-storey
buildings with a height difference between the highest and lowest sprinkler or pump
system exceeding 45 m. The requirements are applicable to buildings intended for use
with occupancies where the hazard is classified as not greater than OH3.
Note: Special fire engineering solutions are needed for high rise systems with hazards
greater than OH3, and specialist advice from VdS shall be sought.
E.2 Design criteria

E.2.1 Hazard group
High rise sprinkler systems shall comply with the requirements for OH3 protection.
E.2.2 Subdivision of high rise sprinkler systems

High rise sprinkler systems shall be sub-divided into sprinkler installations such that the
height difference between the highest and lowest sprinkler on any one installation does
not exceed 45 m (see Figures E.0l and E.02).
E.2.3 Zoning
High rise sprinkler systems shall be zoned in accordance with Annex D as well as D.3
and D.4.
E.2.4 Standing water pressures at back pressure and alarm valves

The minimum standing pressure at any back pressure or alarm valve inlet shall be no
less than 1,25 times the static head difference between the valve and the highest
sprinkler on the group.
Back pressure valves controlling the flow of a group should operate correctly with a ratio
of service pressure to installation pressure not exceeding 1,16:1, as measured by valve
lift and pressure equalisation upstream of the back pressure valve.
E.2.5 Calculation of distribution pipework for pre-calculated systems

All systems shall be fully calculated. Thus, no details regarding pre-calculated systems
are given.
E.2.6 Water pressures

Pipework, fittings, valves and other equipment shall be capable of withstanding the
maximum pressure likely to be encountered.
Note 1: To overcome the problem of pressures in excess of 12 bar, hydraulic alarm

gongs may be driven via a pressure reducing valve or from a secondary water supply
such as public water mains, controlled by a diaphragm valve connected to the main group
control valve alarm port.
171
Note 2: The maximum permitted pressure of the components is relevant for the maximum
installation pressure.
E.3 Water supplies

E.3.1 Types of water supplies
The system shall have at least one superior single water supply.
All systems shall be fully calculated, see E.2.5.
Figure E.01: Typical layout of high rise system with pump supply
172
Figure E.02: Typical layout of high rise system with gravity tanks and booster pumps
173
Annex F
Additional Requirements To Increase Life Safety
Note: Every sprinkler system is designed for life safety purposes. The requirements
specified in this Annex increase the reliability and should therefore be required by the
building control authorities as special life safety requirements. For theatres see F.6.
F.1 Subdivision into zones

Installations shall be subdivided into zones, in accordance with Annex D as well as D.3
and D.4, with a maximum of 200 sprinklers per zone.
F.2 Wet Pipe Installations

Sprinkler installations for life safety shall be of the wet pipe type and any subsidiary dry
pipe or alternate extension shall comply with 10.5.
F.3 Sprinkler type and sensitivity

Conventional, spray or sidewall sprinklers shall be used. The sensitivity shall be “quick”
response, except that “Standard A” and “special” response may be used in rooms not
less than 500 m² in area or not less than 5 m in height.
F.4 Alarm valve station

During servicing and maintenance of the installation alarm valves, the sprinkler
installation shall be fully operational in all aspects.
Note: In some countries alarm valve stations shall be redundant.
F.5 Water Supplies

The system shall have at least one superior single water supply.
Note: In some countries duplicate water supplies are required for life safety installations.
F.6 Theatres
National requirements shall be complied with.
In theatres with separated stages (i.e. where there is a safety curtain between the stage
and auditorium) the safety curtain shall be provided with a line of drenchers controlled by
a quick opening valve (e.g. a plug valve) fitted in an accessible position. The water supply
for the drenchers shall be taken upstream of any alarm valve station. The stage shall be
protected by a water spray installation with automatic and manual activation.
Alternatively, stages with a total height that is not greater than 12 m may be protected by
sprinklers.
All workshops, dressing rooms, scenery, storerooms and spaces below the stage shall be
sprinklered.
174
F.7 Additional precautions for maintenance

Only one zone of a multi-zone installation shall be shut down at a time. An installation or
zone shall be shut down for the minimum time necessary for maintenance.
The partial or complete shut-down of a life safety sprinkler installation shall be avoided
wherever possible. Only the smallest part of the installation necessary shall be isolated.
When a zone (or zones) is charged or recharged with water after draining, the flushing
valve(s) (see D.3.3) shall be used to check that water is available in the zone (or zones).
Individual alarm valves in a duplicate alarm valve station, where required, shall be
separately serviced, provided the water supply to the installation is maintained.
The following procedure shall be followed before servicing duplicate alarm valve stations:
− the stop valves to the duplicate alarm valve shall be checked and if necessary
opened. One of the stop valves to the alarm valve to be serviced shall be closed and
an alarm test (see 18.3.2.3) carried out immediately on the other alarm valve;
− if water is not available, the stop valve shall be opened immediately, and the fault
rectified before proceeding.
175
Annex G
Methods for sizing pipework
G.1 Calculation of pressure losses in pipework

G.1.1 Pipe friction loss
Frictional pressure loss in pipes shall be hydraulically calculated. The Hazen-Williams
formula should be used:
6,05 x 105
p = 1,85 4,87
x L x Q1,85
C xd
where:
p is the pressure loss in the pipe, in bar;
Q is the flow through the pipe, in litres per minute;
d is the mean internal diameter of the pipe, in millimetres;
C is a constant for the type and condition of the pipe (see Table G.01);
L is the equivalent length of pipe and fittings, in metres.
The values of C to be used in sprinkler installation and water supply calculations shall be
as indicated in Table G.01.
Type of pipe Value of C
cast iron 100
ductile iron 110
mild steel 120
galvanised steel 120
spun cement 130
stainless steel 140
reinforced glass fibre 140
Table G.01: C values for various types of pipe
The pressure loss due to velocity may be ignored.
G.1.2 Static pressure difference

The static pressure difference between two inter-connecting points in a system shall be
calculated from:
p = 0,098 h
where:
p is the static pressure difference, in bar;
h is the vertical distance between the points, in metres.
176
G.1.3 Flow velocity

The flow velocity shall not exceed:
− 6m/s through any valve or flow monitoring device;

− 10m/s at any other point in the system,
for the stabilised flow condition at the demand point involving an area of operation or
where the system includes intermediate sprinklers the total number of sprinklers assumed
to be in simultaneous operation.
Note: The flow velocity in the pipework (including suction pipe) refers to the pipework
calculation for the area of operation with the highest water rate, not to the effective flow
quantity, i.e. to the intersection of the water supply characteristic and the pipework
characteristic. For fittings it is important to observe for which flow velocity the fitting has
been approved. The NPSH value for avoiding cavitation shall be calculated based on the
full load flow rate.
G.1.4 Fitting and valve friction losses

The pressure loss due to friction in valves, in fittings and in couplings where the direction
of water flow is changed through 45° or more, shall be calculated using an equivalent
length and applying the formula specified in G.1. The appropriate equivalent length to be
used shall be one of following:
a) as specified by the equipment manufacturer; tested in the VdS Laboratories;

b) as taken from Table G.02, provided that it is no lower than a).
If there is a bend, tee or cross where there is a change in direction of flow and there is
also a change in diameter at the same point, the equivalent pipe length and pressure loss
shall be expressed in pipe length of the smaller diameter.
177
Fittings and valves Nominal diameter1)

DN
20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 150 200 250
Equivalent length2) of straight steel pipe for a C value of 120
90° screwed elbow 0,63 0,77 1,04 1,22 1,46 1,89 2,37 3,04 4,30 5,67 7,42
(standard)
90° welded elbow 0,30 0,36 0,49 0,56 0,69 0,88 1,10 1,43 2,00 2,64 3,35
(r/d=1.5) 0,34 0,40 0,55 0,66 0,76 1,02 1,27 1,61 2,30 3,05 3,89
45° screwed elbow 1,25 1,54 2,13 2,44 2,91 3,81 4,75 6,10 8,61 11,34 14,85
(standard)
Standard screwed - - - - 0,38 0,51 0,63 0,81 1,13 1,50 1,97
tee or cross
(flow through - - - - 2,42 3,18 3,94 5,07 7,17 9,40 12,30
branch)
Gate valve - straight - - - - 12,08 18,91 19,71 25,46 35,88 47,27 61,85
way
Alarm or back - - - - 2,19 2,86 3,55 4,56 6,38 8,62 9,90
pressure valve - - - - 16,43 21,64 26,80 34,48 48,79 64,29 84,11
(swinging type)
Alarm or back
pressure valve
(mushroom type)
Butterfly valve
Globe valve
1) Values for DN 125 may be interpolated.
2) These equivalent lengths can be converted as necessary for pipes with other C values by multiplying by the
following factors:
C value 100 110 120 130 140
Factor 0,714 0,850 1,000 1,160 1,330
Table G.02: Equivalent length of fittings and valves
178
For reductions in the pump suction pipe the following equivalent pipe lengths shall be
adhered to:
Nominal pipe Reduction for pump suction Reduction + expansion for
diameter pipe1) throttle section2)
DN Inches
20 ¾ - -
25 1 - -
32 1¼ - -
40 1½ - 0,5
50 2 3,3 0,6
65 2½ 5,0 1,0
80 3 5,0 1,0
100 4 7,0 1,3
125 5 9,0 1,7
150 6 11,0 1,5
200 8 15,0 4,5
250 10 19,0 4,0
1) The equivalent lengths are valid only for reductions by one nominal diameter. For reductions by two
nominal diameters these lengths shall be multiplied by factor 3,5, for reductions by three nominal
diameters by 9,5, for reductions by four nominal diameters by 19, and for reductions by five nominal
diameters by 32.
2
Note: Interpolation factor = 1,75 x saltus – 2,75 x saltus + 2
2) The table values are valid for throttle sections with reduction and expansion by one nominal diameter each.
For reduction and expansion by two nominal diameters the table values shall be multiplied by 4,25, for
reduction and expansion by three nominal diameters by 11. Throttle sections with different reductions and
expansions may also be calculated based on these equivalent pipe lengths. For calculating the nominal
diameter saltuses the reduction is relevant. The equivalent length shall be inserted in the pipework and
nominal diameter prior to the reduction.
Table G.03: Equivalent lengths of reductions in the pump suction pipe and reduction +
expansion for throttle sections
G.1.5 Accuracy of calculations

Calculations shall be carried out with the accuracy of measurements given in Table G.04.
Quantity Unit Round to
Length m 0,01
Height m 0,01
Equivalent length m 0,01
Flow l/min 1,00
Pressure loss mbar/m 1,00
Pressure mbar 1,00
Velocity m/s -0,10
Area m² 0,01
Density of water application mm/min 0,10
Table G.04: Accuracy of hydraulic calculations
179
Furthermore the following degree of accuracy for calculations shall be adhered to:
− the algebraic sum of pressure loss in a loop shall equal 0 mbar + 1 mbar;
− where the water flows join together at a junction, the calculation shall be balanced to
within 1 mbar;
− the algebraic sum of water flow at a junction shall equal 0 l/min + 0,1 l/min.
G.2 Pre-calculated systems

cannot be given.
G.3 Fully calculated systems

G.3.1 Design density – minimum design discharge
The minimum design discharge (in l/min) at each sprinkler within the area of operation is
determined by:
− the required minimum pressure at the sprinkler;

− the product of the effective area per sprinkler and the required design density in
accordance with Cl. 6. Alternatively, the area per sprinkler can be the mean of a
square group of 4 sprinklers (see Fig. H03-H.06).
Additional sprinklers installed to balance obstructions by fixtures such as ventilation

ducts, smaller platforms, foreman’s offices etc. shall be taken into account as follows
when calculating flow rate and head:
− If an area of operation ≥ 144 m² contains more than five additional sprinklers, the
sixth and any further sprinkler shall be considered in the hydraulic calculation.
− If an area of operation < 144 m² contains more than two additional sprinklers, the
third and any further sprinkler shall be considered in the hydraulic calculation.
In the case of ribbed ceilings or similar partly open ceilings in which ceiling sprinklers
represent obstructions, the additional sprinklers shall be relevant for the hydraulic
calculation.
Throttle sections may be installed to limit the water rate of the hydraulically most
favourable area of operation. In these sections the velocity shall not exceed 20 m/s. The
throttle section shall be at least 1m long. The nominal diameter of the throttle section
shall not be reduced by more than three pipe diameter levels relating to the original pipe.
Throttle sections shall not have any branch pipes, if the velocity exceeds 10 m/s. The
following nominal diameters shall not be fallen below in throttle sections:
Hazard Density of discharge Nominal diameter
LH 2,25 mm/min DN 32
OH / HHP / HHS up to 10,0 mm/min DN 50
more than 10,0 mm/min DN 65
180
The area covered by each sprinkler shall be defined by the centre lines drawn midway
between adjacent sprinklers at right angles to the line joining the sprinklers and by the
boundary of the area covered (see Figure H.02).
Where in-rack sprinklers are installed, the calculation shall be carried out taking into
account the simultaneous flow and pressure requirement for roof or ceiling sprinklers and
the intermediate level sprinklers.
G.3.2 Locations of the area of operation

G.3.2.1 Hydraulically most unfavourable location
Variations in sprinkler spacing, layout, elevation, range centres, sprinkler orifice size and
pipe sizes, as well as all possible locations, whether on the distribution pipes or between
distribution pipes where these are connected by branch pipes, shall be considered when
determining the hydraulically most unfavourable location of the area of operation (see
Figures H.03, H.05 and H.06.
Note: Proof of the correct position of the hydraulically most unfavourable area of
operation in the case of gridded installations entails displacing the area of operation by
one sprinkler pitch in each direction along branches, and in the case of looped
installations by one sprinkler pitch along distribution pipes.
G.3.2.2 Hydraulically most favourable location
All possible locations, whether on the distribution pipes, or between distribution pipes
where these are connected by branch pipes, shall be considered when determining the
hydraulically most favourable location of the area of operation (see Figures H.04 to H.06).
G.3.3 Shape of the area of operation

G.3.3.1 Hydraulically most unfavourable location
The area of operation shall be as near as possible rectangular, even if this means that an
adjacent area is only partly loaded. The type of roof, e.g. shed or saddle roof, and the
type of storage are not relevant.
The area of operation limitation shall be at walls or structural separations or centrally

between sprinklers.
The following shall be considered:
a) in the case of terminal and looped configurations, the far side of the area shall be
defined by the branch, or pair of branches where there is an end-centre layout.
Sprinklers not constituting a full branch or pair of branches shall be grouped as close as
possible to the distribution pipe on the next up-stream branch row to the rectangular
area (see Figures H.03 and H.06);
b) in the case of gridded configurations where branches run parallel to the ridge of a roof
having a slope greater than 6°, or along bays formed by beams greater than 1,0 m
deep, the far side of the area shall have a length L parallel to the branches, such that L
is greater than or equal to two times the square root of the area of operation;
The area of operation shall be as far as possible symmetrical with respect to the sprinkler
layout (see Figure H.05).
181
G.3.3.2 Hydraulically most favourable location
The area of operation shall be as near as possible square. The following shall be
considered:
a) in the case of terminal and looped configurations, the area shall where possible include
sprinklers on one distribution pipe only. The number of sprinklers calculated to be
operating on branches, or pairs of branches in end-centre installations, shall be located
on each branch or pair of branches at the hydraulically most favourable location.
Sprinklers not forming a full branch or pair of branches shall be located on the next
branch row at the hydraulically closest locations (see Figures H.04 and H.06);
b) in the case of gridded configurations, the area shall be located on branches at the
hydraulically most favourable location. Sprinklers not forming a full branch length shall
be located on the next branch row at the hydraulically closest locations (see Figure
H.05).
G.3.4 Minimum sprinkler discharge pressure

The pressure at the hydraulically most unfavourably situated sprinkler when all the
sprinklers in the area of operation are open, shall be not less than that required by G.3.1
or the following in table G.05, whichever is the higher.
Hazard class K factor minimum Minimum pressure

bar
LH 57 0,7
OH 80 0,35
HHP/HHS roof or ceiling protection 80 0,5
In-rack sprinkler 80 21)
In-rack sprinkler 115 11)

1)
Rack protection shall be designed in accordance with 11.6 with a minimum pressure of 0,5 bar for rack
sprinklers.
Table G15: Minimum pressure
G.3.5 Minimum pipe diameters

The minimum allowable pipe diameter is 20 mm for LH and 25 mm for OH, HHP and
HHS.
The water supply of an individual sprinkler DN 20
may be designed in DN 20 with LH, OH
and HH hazards, galvanised or by means
of a VdS-approved flexible hose, provided
sprinkler
that the connection to the branch or
distribution pipe spur runs laterally or distribution pipe
upwards (see example in Figure G.01).
Figure G.01: Connection to water supply
182
Pipe diameters on the installation side of the alarm valve station may decrease only in the
direction of water flow, except in the case of grid and loop configurations.
Note: This excludes throttle sections used with great non-uniformities and designed and
calculated such that cavitation is excluded.
The length of branch pipes fed from one end is limited to 30 m. 20 sprinklers max. may
be fitted.
The length of branch pipes fed from both ends is limited to 60 m. 40 sprinklers max. may
be fitted.
Upright sprinklers may not be directly connected to any pipe ≥ DN 65. Pendent sprinklers
may not be directly connected to any pipe > DN 80. For larger diameters an arm pipe
shall be fitted so that the minimum distance from the sprinkler deflector to the edge of the
main pipe is 1,5 times the diameter of this pipe.
183
Annex H
Figures with examples (informative)
Figure H.01: Typical pump curve
The hydraulics of any systems shall be fully calculated.
Figure H.02: Determination of area covered per sprinkler (see G.3.1)
184
Figure H.03: Most unfavourable areas of operation in comb and double-comb sprinkler
layouts (see G.3.2)
Note: The areas of operation shall be arranged as square as possible. Only if special fire
developments are to be expected (e.g. due to a certain arrangement of fire loads), the
area of operation should be “longish”!
Figure H.04: Most favourable areas of operation in one-sided and two-sided sprinkler
layouts (see G.3.2)
185
Figure H.05: Most favourable and unfavourable areas of operation in a gridded pipe
layout (see G.3.2)
Figure H.06: Most favourable and unfavourable areas of operation in a looped pipe
layout (see G.3.2)
186
Annex I
Approved components
The following components are subject to approval by the authorities:
a) sprinklers;
b) wet alarm valve assemblies;
c) dry alarm valve assemblies
− dry alarm valve stations without accelerator and exhauster;
− dry alarm valve stations with accelerator and exhauster;
− subsidiary valve stations without accelerator and exhauster;
− subsidiary valve stations with accelerator and exhauster;
d) alarm motors and gongs;
e) water flow alarm switches;
f) pipe couplings
− elastic pipe couplings;
− pipe joints;
g) pipe hangers
− pipe hangers and accessories (type test only if not in compliance with requirements
of these Guidelines);
h) pressure switches;
i) sprinkler pump sets;
j) pre-action alarm valve assemblies Type A;
k) pre-action alarm valve assemblies Types B;
l) monitoring systems, control and indicating systems for sprinkler monitoring;
Note: If fault signals of the sprinkler system are indicated at control and indicating
equipment, this shall also be approved as monitoring panel.
m) controllers
− for electrical motors of sprinkler pumps;
− for diesel engines of sprinkler pumps;
n) feed valves;
o) stone traps;
p) flow measuring devices;
q) check valves;
r) relief valves;
s) valves and slide valves;
t) plastic sprinkler escutcheons;
u) reduced capacity tanks < 20 m³ (VdS can also carry out a detail test during approval);
v) pipe swivel joints;
187
w) steel bellow expansion joints (excluding expansion joints acc. DIN 30681 PN 16 with
DIN-DVGW quality mark);
x) corrosion protection agents;
y) foam proportioners;
z) foam pumps;
aa) foam concentrate membrane tanks;
bb) cables acc. DIN 4102-12, class E 90 (if additional function test with water is required).
Components for which no approval is required:
− pipe hangers and accessories (if in compliance with requirements of 15.2.2 of these
Guidelines);
− compressors, tank filling pumps and pressure tanks;
− strainers;
− diesel engines;
− pressure tanks;
− electrical motors;
− gauges acc. DIN;
− pipe joints with flanges acc. DIN, capillary solder fittings acc. DIN EN 1254, malleable
cast iron fittings acc. DIN EN 10242 (incl. sealing material);
− safety valves (type examination tested);
− water storage tanks;
− air filling devices;
− emergency power supplies;
− water level indicators;
− pipe trace heating.
Marking
Sprinkler valve stations shall bear the mark of the approved installer. This obligation
applies to every second and further licence holder of a product resp. to each first licence
holder and all further if the manufacturer is the installer.
188
Annex J
New technology (Informative)
These Guidelines cover only the types of sprinklers specified in Table 12.01. During the
years preceding the preparation of these Guidelines new technologies were being
developed for special applications, including in particular the following:
− large drop sprinklers;

− residential sprinklers;
− special in-rack sprinklers.
Note: For early suppression fast response sprinklers (ESFR) see Annex L.
These sprinklers should only be used in accordance with the results of large scale fire
test data and where the design criteria are fully acceptable to the authorities involved.
It is intended that they will be included in future editions of these Guidelines.
189
Annex K
Protection of Special Hazards
National requirements shall be taken into consideration. The following hazards need
special consideration.
K.1 Aerosols
Protection for aerosol storages shall be in accordance with table K.01.
Precautions shall be taken to avoid projection of aerosol containers, e.g. storage in pallet
cages.
The maximum area of aerosol storage and any containment shall be considered and the
authorities shall be consulted.
Maximum storage height Sprinkler K Minimum Area of

factor density operation
m mm/min m²
alcohol based hydrocarbon
based
STI - Free 1,5 - 115/160 12,5 260
standing
storage or - 1,5 115/160 25,0 260
block storage
Maximum vertical height between Sprinkler K Minimum Area of
sprinkler rows factor density operation
m mm/min m²
alcohol based hydrocarbon
based
ST4 levels ≤ 1,8 - 115/160 1) 12,5 plus in- 260
Palletised 115/80 2) rack sprinklers3)
rack storage
- levels ≤ 1,8 115/1601) 25,0 plus in- 260
115/802) rack sprinklers3)
1) ceiling sprinklers for areas of operation and min. density for ceiling protection
2) intermediate level sprinklers
3) the intermediate level sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with Category III or IV layout but at the
maximum vertical height separations between sprinkler rows given in columns 2 and 3.
Table K.01: Protection criteria for aerosol storage
K.2 Clothes in multiple garment hanging storage

K.2.1 General
This clause describes special provisions for the protection of intensive hanging garment
stores having multiple row or garment racks at two or more levels. They may have
automatic or semi-automatic garment delivery, picking or transportation systems. Access
to elevated garment storage levels within a warehouse is usually by walkways and
ramps. A common feature of hanging garment storage is that there is no fire-resistive
separation between the decks. Walkways, aisles, ramps and garment racks create a
190
significant obstruction to ceiling level sprinkler protection. Protection of hanging garments

stored in carousels or vertical blocks without aisles is beyond the scope of this annex.
Each garment rack shall be limited to two rows of hanging garments and a storage height
of 3,5m between intermediate levels of sprinklers.
K.2.2 Categorisation
This clause applies to all types of garments, irrespective of their storage category.
K.2.3 Sprinkler protection

Each garment rack shall be limited to two rows of hanging garments and a storage height
of 3,5 m between intermediate levels of sprinklers. Each rack shall be separated by an
aisle of at least 0,8 m width. The garment racks shall be protected by a single row of
sprinklers. The spacing between the sprinkler rows shall not exceed 3,0 m.
The sprinklers installed directly above the garment racks shall be stagger spaced in the
vertical plane, at horizontal intervals of not more than 2,8 m along the length of the rack.
There shall be a sprinkler not more than 1,4 m from the rack end. The clearance between
the top of the garments and the sprinkler deflector shall be at least 0,15 m (see Figure
K.01).
Each sprinkler row (in each level) protecting garment storage racks should be capped by
a continuous solid horizontal baffle of at least the length and width of the garment row.
The baffle should preferably be of a non-combustible material.
The upper level of sprinkler rack protection and baffle may be omitted providing the
clearance between the top of the garments and the deflectors of the ceiling sprinklers
does not exceed 3 m height.
Sprinklers shall be installed below all obstructions such as access ramps, main aisles,
walkways and transportation routes, with the exception of aisles, not exceeding 1,2 m
wide, between sprinkler protected garment storage rows.
K.2.4 Sprinklers in operation

The hydraulic calculation shall be based on the following:
Rows: 3
Levels: ≤3
Sprinklers per row: 3
Where there are more than 3 levels of sprinkler protection, 3 rows of 3 sprinklers on 3
protected levels shall be assumed to operate. Where there are 3 levels or less, 3 rows of
3 sprinklers should be assumed to operate on all protected levels.
K.2.5 Ceiling sprinklers

Ceiling sprinklers shall be designed for a density of 7,5 mm/min over an area of operation
of 260 m², providing the uppermost level of racks is capped and protected by rack
sprinklers.
191
If the uppermost level or the barrier is omitted, the ceiling sprinklers shall be designed on
the basis at least of Category III goods. The stack height shall be measured from above
the uppermost intermediate level sprinklers.
K.2.6 Automatic shutdown

Operation of the sprinkler system shall automatically stop all automatic distribution
systems within a warehouse.
K.2.7 Type of system

All installations shall be of the wet pipe type.
ceiling
3m
aisle
3m
2,8 m
3,5 m
0,8 m
rack end
1,4 m
min. 0,15 m
capping
Figure K.01: Typical sprinkler protection for hanging garments
K.3 Flammable liquid storage

The maximum area of flammable liquid storage and any containment shall be in
accordance with legal regulations.
The use of a film forming foam and wetting agent is recommended.
Film forming foam shall be used with flammable liquids that have a flash point below
55°C.
Flammable liquids shall be classified into four classes according to their flash point (FP),
as shown in Tables K.02 and K.03. Tables K.02 and K.03 shall be used for flammable
liquids stored in non-pressurised metal drums with a capacity greater than 20 l but not
greater than 208 l. Table K.04 shall be used for flammable liquids stored in non-
pressurised metal drums with a capacity less than 20 l.
192
Class Flash Storage Permitted Ceiling sprinklers

point methods storage
Density Area of operation
°C mm/min m2
on side ≤ 12 drums high
1 FP > 100 10 450
on end ≤ 6 drums high
2 FP ≤ 100 25 450
3 FP ≤ 55 25 450
on side or
4 FP ≤ 21 1 drum high 25 450
on end
Table K.02: Flammable liquids in metal drums with a capacity > 20 l and ≤ 208 l in free-
standing storage or block storage (ST1)
Class Flash Storage Intermediated Ceiling sprinklers

point methods sprinkler level in
Figure 11.08 1) 2) Density Area of operation
°C configuration m/min m2
on side each 12th tier 10

1 FP > 100 th 450
on end each 6 tier 10
on side each 6th tier 25
2 FP ≤ 100 450
on end each tier 10
on side each 3rd tier 25
3 FP ≤ 55 450
on end each tier 10
on side or
4 FP ≤ 21 each tier 25 450
on end
1) Horizontal distance between sprinklers shall not exceed 1,9 m.
2) Drums shall be stored at a height of one drum per tier. Storage layouts with two or more drums per row
cannot be protected in accordance with this concept.
Table K.03: Flammable liquids in metal drums (ST4) with a

capacity >20 l and ≤ 208 l
Class Flash Storage Maximum Ceiling sprinklers

point methods storage height
Density Area of operation
°C m mm/min m2
ST1 5,5 10
1 FP > 100 450
ST5/6 4,6 7,5
ST1 4,0
2 FP ≤ 100 12,5 450
ST5/6 4,6
ST1 1,5
3 FP ≤ 55 12,5 450
ST5/6 2,1
ST1 1,5
4 FP ≤ 21 12,5 450
ST5/6 2,1
Table K.04: Flammable liquids in metal drums with a capacity of ≤ 20 l in free-standing

storage resp. block storage (ST1) or storage with solid or slatted shelves (ST5, ST6)
193
K.4 Pallets - idle

Idle pallets stored in solid piles or on pallets shall be protected with ceiling sprinklers
according to Table K.05.
Idle pallets stored in racks shall be protected with ceiling and in-rack sprinklers according
to Table K.06.
Type of Maximum Ceiling sprinkler

pallet storage Density Area of operation
height mm/min m2
m
Wood or
cellulose
3,8 see Table 6.02 Category IV
material
pallets
Plastic
pallets,
Design in accordance with K7
material
acc. K7
All other 3,3 25,0 300
plastics 3 20,0 300
2,7 17,5 300
2,3 15,0 300
2 12,5 300
1,6 10,0 300
Table K.05: Protection of solid piled or palletised pallets (ST1)
Type of pallets In-rack sprinklers Ceiling sprinklers
Wood and Category IV As for Category IV, with sprinkler

cellulose rated at 93°C or 100°C see Table
material pallets 6.03
All plastics Category IV including one level of Density 25 mm/min
sprinklers above top level of storage, Area of operation 300 m2
sprinklers K=115 and minimum
operating pressure 3 bar
Table K.06: Protection of rack storage of idle pallets (ST4)
K.5 Spirituous liquors in wooden barrels

Barrels may be stored to a height not exceeding 4,6 m with ceiling sprinklers only. For
greater storage heights intermediate sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with
Category III/IV requirements. In both cases the ceiling sprinklers shall be installed with a
density of 15 mm/min over an area of operation of 360 m².
Note 1: Drainage or boundaries should be provided to limit the spread of liquid spills.
Note 2: For the purposes of these Guidelines, spirituous liquor is defined as that
containing more than 20% alcohol.
194
K.6 Non-woven synthetic fabric

K.6.1 Free standing storage
Ceiling sprinklers shall be installed using the criteria shown in table K.07.
Storage Maximum storage Design density Area of operation (wet or

methods height1) pre-action system2)
2
m m/min m
1,6 10,0
2,0 12,5
260
2,3 15,0
ST1 2,7 17,5
Free standing or 3,0 20,0
block stacking 3,3 22,5
3,6 25,0 300
3,8 27,5
4,1 30,0
1) The vertical distance from the floor to the sprinkler deflectors, minus 1 m, or the highest value shown in the
table, whichever is the lower.
2) Dry and alternate installations should be avoided.
Table K.07: Non-woven synthetic fabric: design criteria with roof or ceiling protection
only
K.6.2 Rack storage

In-rack sprinklers should be used in accordance with Category IV requirements. Ceiling
sprinklers should have a minimum design density of 12,5 mm/min over 260 m².
K.7 Risks with storage of plastics – Storage with containers of

unexpanded polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE) and
polystyrene (PS) or stored PP/PE/PS materials and plastics
with similar fire behaviour
K7.1 to K7.4 specify different concepts for the storage of the a.m. materials.
K7.1 Palletised racks – ST4
K7.2 One-row or multiple-row post pallet storage ST2 and ST3 and free-standing
storage ST1 up to 3 m storage height
K7.3 Free-standing storage ST1 up to 4,6 m storage height
K7.4 Storage in production areas (One-row or multiple-row post pallet storage ST2 and
ST3 and free-standing storage ST1)
K.7.1 Palletised racks – ST4

Single-wall storage containers permeable to water made of polypropylene (PP) and
polyethylene (PE) for rack storage shall be classified as Category III (HHS3). All other
storage risks with storage containers made of polypropylene (PP) and polyethylene (PE)
shall be classified as storage risks with high fire hazard Category IV (HHS4).
195
Note: Storage containers are classified as permeable to water if a density of 20 mm/min

causes a water level of not more than 10 mm in a container filled with actual storage
goods. This aim of permeability may generally be achieved by providing the container
bottom with 50 evenly spread bores of 5 mm diameter per m² container base area. The
water permeability of the container shall not be considerably affected by stored goods or
layers. A container with a base area of 600 mm x 400 mm will have a permeability in
accordance with the a.m. requirements if 12 bores of 5 mm diameter are evenly spread
over the container bottom.
The sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with Tables K.7-1 and K.7-2.
Sprinklers of sensitivity rating “Special” or “Quick” shall be used for ceiling protection. For
rack protection sprinklers shall be used whose RTI value is lesser or equal to the RTI
value of the ceiling sprinklers.
Containers (4) Drenchable Non- Sheet barriers

packaging (1) combustible
packaging
Category IV III III --
Horizontal sprinkler 1,50 1,90 1,90 --

spacing (m)
Vertical sprinkler spacing 2,00 3,50 3,50 --

(m)
Operating time (min) 90 90 90 --
Table K.7-1: Classification and design as per K.7 for systems as per 11.5
Containers (4) Drenchable Non- Sheet barriers

packaging (1) combustible (2)
packaging
Category IV III III III
Horizontal sprinkler 1,50 2,50 2,50 1,50

spacing (m)
Vertical sprinkler spacing 2,00 3,50 3,50 3,50

(m)
Operating time (min) 60(3) 60(3) 60(3) 60(3)
Table K.7-2: Classification and design as per K.7 for systems as per 11.6
Note (1): If drenchable packaging, e.g. cartons, is used, it is required that the packaging
in cartons does not leave any plastic surfaces uncovered.
Note (2): The horizontal solid sheet barriers shall be provided above each sprinkler level
(see also 11.6.1).
Note (3): A reduction of the operating time is possible, provided that the requirements of
11.6.1.12 are met.
Note (4): Open PE/PS/PP plastic surfaces, i.e. unpacked, are treated as containers;
granulates in bags are Category III with a horizontal distance of 1,5 m.
196
Where rack storage with intermediate sprinklers is classified as HHS3 due to the use of
sheet barriers, the number of intermediate levels to be considered in the hydraulic
calculation shall be in accordance with 11.6.1.4 and the operating time with 11.6.1.12.
The maximum storage height for pallet racks ST 4 without intermediate sprinklers shall
not exceed 2,1 m for HHS3 and 1,2 m for HHS4. Above the topmost sprinkler level the
storage height shall not exceed 1,5 m. Where the a.m. storage height cannot be adhered
to, the rack shall be designed such that above the topmost stored goods another sprinkler
level can be installed. With a horizontal sheet barrier in accordance with 11.6.1.4 above
the topmost stored goods the ceiling area of operation may be reduced to 150 m²,
providing no spray cans or flammable liquids are stored. Above the sheet barrier no
storage is permitted.
K 7.2 One-row or multiple-row post pallet storage ST2 and ST3 and free-
standing storage or block storage ST1
Classification shall be in HHS4.
The specifications in 7.2 also apply to expanded plastics.
For storage types ST1, ST2 and ST3 the maximum storage height is 3 m.
For the storage of plastics, block storage with a surface of 150 m² max. is permitted.
Between the blocks aisles of at least 2,4 m width are required.
Only non-combustible pallets with closed surface, e.g. steel pallets, shall be used. The
storage height per pallet shall not exceed 1 m. Each pallet with so-called KLT (tote
boxes) shall be closed with a storage unit cover plate for pallets (P 1208/1210 VDA
recommendation 4500). Other storage containers shall be closed with a cover on the
topmost level.
The sprinklers shall have sensitivity rating “Quick” or "Special".
Film forming foam concentrate shall be added to the extinguishing water.
Note: If other sprinkler concepts are verified as adequate protection by appropriate fire
tests, the above requirements can be adapted. Means of adaptation could be e.g. to
abandon foam proportioning and/or adapt the percentage of non-combustible pallets
and/or cover plates. This may be the case with minor plastics accumulations, e.g. during
modifications or retrofitting, by agreement with the Inspection Services of VdS
Schadenverhütung.
With PP/PE/PS materials the a.m. requirements apply to container storage. A subdivision
of the stored goods with non-combustible cover plates/covers at a vertical distance of 1 m
each will not be necessary if PP/PE/PS materials are stored in cartons.
K 7.3 Free-standing storage ST1 up to 4,6m storage height

This protection concept specifies the requirements for free-standing storage (ST1) of
plastic containers and materials made of unexpanded PP/PE/PS with a storage height up
to 4,6 m.
Storage means that a surface of more than 2 m² and/or a height of more than 1,2 m is
used.
197
The following specifications are based on current fire protection experience. They
describe a concept to minimise the effects of a fire. In the case of new findings or
fundamental modifications in fire protection technology these requirements will be
updated.
K 7.3.1 General
Recent fire tests, previous research and experience have shown that in the case of fire
the a.m. plastics risks with storage heights above the limit of 3 m specified in VdS CEA
4001, K 7.2 are hard to control. However, by means of high design density sprinkler
systems can sufficiently control an initial fire in order to enable the fire brigade to fight the
fire in an inside fire attack.
The protection concept and the design of these risks shall be agreed with the VdS
Inspection Services and the insurer in the planning phase already. This is necessary, as
in such fire scenarios considerable smoke gas development may be expected and thus,
according to experience, great loss of property and business interruption.
The concept specifies requirements for the design of the extinguishing system as well as
organisational and fire defence requirements.
Note: Generally, this also applies to the storage of unexpanded plastics of special type
and form, e.g. so-called big boxes (GLT) and other special risks for which presently no
approved protection concepts are available.
Single-wall unexpanded big boxes (GLT) permeable to water may be treated as tote
boxes (KLT).
The instability of such storage constructions in the case of fire shall be taken into
account.
K 7.3.2 Scope
The following requirements apply to storage type ST1 with a maximum storage height of
4,6 m with ceiling sprinkler protection and a ceiling height of not more than 10,5 m, in
which single-wall and double-wall tote boxes (KLT) and other plastic products of the a.m.
type are stored compactly.
K.7.3.3 Design of the sprinkler system

The exact design of the sprinkler system shall be according to the storage height and the
following specifications:
− maximum ceiling height 10,5 m

− designed as wet pipe system
− minimum area of operation in all cases 300 m²
− area per sprinkler 9 m²
− sprinkler K160, sensitivity rating “Quick”
It is recommended to add film forming foam concentrate. Film forming foam concentrates
are appropriate to apply extinguishing water to water-repellent surfaces, such as plastics.
Note: If other sprinkler concepts are verified as similarly adequate by appropriate fire
tests, the above requirements can be adapted. Such object-related means of adaptation
198
may be appropriate for lower risks with minor accumulations of plastic material (fire load),
with single-wall storage containers permeable to water and a storage height of less than
3m and especially during modifications and retrofitting. The following may be possible:
− the reduced design density based on Table 6.02 of VdS CEA 4001, but possibly with
foam proportioning (to compensate the extinguishing efficiency);
− the use of sprinklers with lower K-factor (K115) based on Table 12.01 of VdS CEA
4001;
− according to the application a combination of reduced design density and sprinklers
of lower K-factor is possible.
K 7.3.3.1 Design with storage height up to 3,8 m
Up to this storage height a design density of 25 mm/min is required.
K 7.3.3.2 Design with storage height up to 4,6 m
Above a storage height of 3,8 m up to 4,6 m max. the minimum design density is
30 mm/min.
K 7.3.4 Requirements for storage area

For the storage of plastics, block storage with an area of 150 m² max. is permitted. The
aisles between the blocks shall be at least 2,4 m.
Alternatively, blocks of 25 m² are permitted. Between these blocks aisles of 1,2 m are
required.
It is recommended to use closed containers at the topmost level.
K 7.3.5 Further organisational requirements

Apart from the above extinguishing system details further loss prevention measures are
required in the scope of an integrated fire protection concept for effective fire fighting.
These measures shall be agreed with the property insurer on an individual basis and
should include the following:
− fire brigade;
− extinguishing water supply;
− fire compartments;
− smoke compartments, also in consideration of potential cold smoke development;
− smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems;
− operational emergency schedules.
K 7.4 Storage in production areas

In sprinklered production areas blocks with PE/PP/PS materials or materials with similar
fire behaviour up to 25 m² are permitted, provided that the maximum storage heights
specified in 6.2.2 of VdS CEA 4001 with the appropriate minimum design density are
complied with (classification HHS4, see Table 6.02 / ST1).
This design applies only to production areas (HHP1 to HHP3) with a design density
between 7,5 mm/min and 12,5 mm/min.
199
Several blocks of a protection zone shall not exceed a total of 150 m². This applies if
these blocks are divided into small adjacent areas separated by aisles of at least 2,4 m.
The side lengths of the blocks shall not exceed 10 m.
In a hall of 300 m² the block shall not exceed 25 m². The spacing between the blocks
shall be at least 10 m.
25m2 Min. 10m 25m2 Min. 10m 25m2
300m2 300m2 300m2

Min. 10m
Min. 10m
Min. 10m
300m2 300m2 300m2
25m2 Min. 10m 25m2 Min. 10m 25m2
Figure K.02: Layout of blocks in production areas
K.8 Local protection of chipboard manufacture

K.8.1 General
Sprinkler and water spray systems for local protection in chipboard factories may be
connected to the water supply or to the pipework of the ceiling sprinklers.
Note: Water spray extinguishing systems shall be designed in accordance with VdS
2109.
Deviating from Table 10.02 the pipework volume of dry pipe systems shall not exceed
1,5 m³ and of subsidiary systems 0,75 m³.
K.8.1.1 Rating basis
The following parameters apply to the design of local protection systems:
− operating time 30 min

− design density 5 mm/min
− maximum protection area per triggering sprinkler 9 m²
− for triggering sprinklers in bunkers 16 m²
− maximum spacing between triggering sprinklers resp. extinguishing nozzles 3,75 m
− for triggering sprinklers in bunkers 4,6 m
200
K.8.1.2 Extent and type of protection
The protection in operating areas I and II shall include the objects specified in K.8.1.3 to
K.8.1.9. Unless specified otherwise, it is possible to choose either sprinkler or water spray
extinguishing systems.
Operating area I includes chip processing from the raw material input until up to the glue
application, and operating area II includes any machinery (filters, bunkers, cyclones, etc.)
downstream of the grinding machine.
For a correct assessment of the manufacturing process in the a.m. operating areas the
authorities shall receive a block diagram before approving the extinguishing system(s).
K.8.1.3 Dryers
The manufacturer of the dryer shall provide evidence that there is appropriate fire
protection equipment installed in the dryer. This equipment supplied by the factory or
public water mains shall also be connected to the water supply of the sprinkler system.
The connection shall have shut-off devices.
K.8.1.4 Conveyors
Pneumatic conveyors shall be protected at both ends (inlet and outlet), e.g. by
sprinklering the cyclone.
Pneumatic conveyors shall also have explosion protection. The explosion hazard shall be
reduced by spark extinguishing systems (see VdS 2106).
Mechanical conveyors (e.g. rotary valves) shall be protected all over by water spray
K.8.1.5 Cyclones
Cyclones shall be protected by sprinklers. If the object connected to the cyclone is

protected by a water spray extinguishing system, the cyclone may also be connected to
this system.
K.8.1.6 Surface layer silos (dosing bunkers)
With a base area smaller than 25 m², either a sprinkler system or water spray
extinguishing system may be chosen. With a base area equal to or greater than 25 m² a
water spray extinguishing system shall be installed.
K.8.1.7 Core layer silos (silos for storing dusts)
Water spray extinguishing systems only are appropriate.
K.8.1.8 Post-refining
Hammer mills, cross beater mills, impact detachers, knife-ring flakers and other post-
refining facilities shall be protected at inlet and outlet by sprinkler or water spray
K.8.1.9 Sifters and filters
Sifters and filters (e.g. bag, fabric, hose filters) shall be protected by sprinkler or water
spray systems.
201
K.8.1.10 Rooms beneath presses and star coolers
These rooms shall be sprinklered.
K.8.1.11 Spreader
The spreader including gluing, bunker and lifting devices shall be protected by sprinkler
or water spray systems.
K.8.1.12 Presses
Presses such as chipboard presses shall be provided with extinguishing systems for local
application approved by VdS for this purpose. The ceiling area of the sprinkler system
above the presses is 260 m² for wet pipe systems. For dry pipe systems it may be
reduced from 325 m² to 300 m². The minimum design density is 10 mm/min.
The design of the system in the production area shall be calculated as follows:
1. calculation of the ceiling area plus the two largest water spray extinguishing
groups or local application groups in this production area;
2. calculation of the entire local application for the press.
All exhaustions shall be protected by appropriate local application systems.
K.8.1.13 Thermal oil plant / Hydraulic installation
For the protection of rooms with thermal oil plants or hydraulic installations and for the
protection of thermal oil pipes in the production area, sprinkler or water spray systems
with foam proportioning shall be installed.
K.8.2 Water supply

The water supply of the extinguishing systems shall always be designed in accordance
with the greatest water flow.
Determine which systems require the greatest water flow. The sprinkler system in
production plus the two largest water spray extinguishing groups located in this
production area, or the sprinkler system in the storage area.
K.8.3 Extinguishing and triggering sprinklers

Where water spray extinguishing systems are installed within objects, the open
extinguishing nozzles shall be protected against contamination by appropriate caps (e.g.
plastic caps, rubber plugs).
Where extinguishing or triggering sprinklers are installed at the objects to be protected in

separate housings, these housings shall be easy to open and the area around the
nozzles shall be easy to clean.
K.9 Special protection concept for racks with solid shelves and
gangways
This clause specifies the protection of racks with solid shelves and solid gangways as
layouted in Figure K.03. Between rack and gangway there may be a ventilation gap of
0,1m width. Fully solid gangways are also permitted.
202
Basic values:
Fire hazard class: HHS 4, up to 50% plastic containers acc. K.7 are
allowed*
Type of storage: ST6
Storage height: max. 2,5m
Flue width: 1,2m
Total rack width: max. 1,2m
Level spacing rack sprinklers: max. 3,6m
The installations shall be fully calculated in consideration of all necessary ceiling and rack
sprinklers. Rack and ceiling sprinklers shall be connected via separate valve stations.
Note: This concept is based on fire tests and specifies one possible solution for adequate
protection. If more than 50% plastic containers are used or materials classified according
to K.7, the concept shall be agreed with VdS in the planning phase.
K.9.1 Rack
Sprinkler layout (see also Figure K.03):
- rack sprinklers on each rack level and on the top level;
- sprinklers shall be arranged on the outsides of the rack underneath the potential
ventilation gap. The distance to the longitudinal side of the rack shall not exceed
0,15 m;
- rack sprinklers shall be arranged centrally in front of each rack shelf with an allowable
distance of max. 1,6 m;
- distance between sprinkler and loading area/ventilation gap max. 0,15 m;
- distance upper edge stored goods sprinkler deflector at least 0,5 m in the area of
intermediate levels;
- distance upper edge stored goods sprinkler deflector at least 0,15 m in the area of top
level.
Sprinklers:
− K factor min. 57
− RTI value “Quick”
− upright
− flat sprinkler water shields or deep sprinkler water shields shall be installed to prevent
the sprinklers from wetting each other and protect them against dripping plastics.
Hydraulic calculation of rack protection:
− 4 branches with 8 sprinklers on each level, but at least an area of operation of 90 m²

per level;
− 0,5 bar minimum pressure at the sprinkler.
203
Figure K.03: Sprinkler layout in rack
K.9.2 Ceiling
The ceiling protection above the topmost rack sprinkler level shall have the following
features:
− design density: 7,5 mm/min

− area of operation: 300 m²
− K factor min. 80
− RTI value min. “Special”
− area per sprinkler max. 9 m²
If the distance between upper edge of stored goods and ceiling exceeds 4 m, a special
agreement with VdS will be required.
K.9.3 Additional measures

− Foam proportioning with AFFF foam concentrate for rack and ceiling protection;
− to limit horizontal fire spread, continuous vertical sheet barrier shall be installed within
the racks at a distance of not more than 7 m;
204
− no storage above the topmost rack barrier level;

− at barrier level above the sprinklers continuous baffles shall be fitted. Alternative
loading areas shall be agreed with VdS.
K.10 Cable ducts, vertical cable ducts and cable floors

K.10.1 Horizontal cable ducts
Dimensions and structural design of horizontal cable ducts to be protected by sprinkler
systems shall meet the following requirements:
− cable ducts shall be made of non-combustible building materials;

− maximum length of 100 m for sections separated by at least fire-retardant walls and
ceilings made of non-combustible materials and at least fire-retardant doors and
cable seals;
− maximum width 2,5 m;
− maximum height 3,0 m;
− maximum width of cable trays 700 mm;
− in the case of multi-layer assignment of cables an assignment height of 60 mm per
cable tray shall not be exceeded;
− cables trays shall be made of perforated sheet or similar material with at least 30%
open surface;
− minimum vertical spacing between cable trays 200 mm
− minimum width of central aisle 700 mm
K.10.1.1 Sprinklers in horizontal cable ducts
Upright spray or flat spray sprinklers with K factor 80 and operating temperature 57°C
shall be used.
K.10.1.2 Sprinkler layout and spacing in horizontal cable ducts
With cable ducts in accordance with K.10.1 one row of sprinklers shall be arranged in the
aisle area, as centrally as possible. If the cable duct is assigned on one side only, a
sprinkler-wall spacing of 1,25 m shall not be exceeded. The maximum sprinkler spacing
of spray sprinklers is 2,5 m and of flat spray sprinklers 3 m.
The vertical distance between sprinkler deflector and topmost cable tray shall be 500 mm
for spray sprinklers and 300 mm for flat spray sprinklers. The a.m. spacing range shall be
without obstructions.
Lights shall be located only centrally in the aisle of the cable duct between the sprinklers.
The distances of 500 mm resp. 300 mm may be fallen below, if the sprinklers are
evidenced to be appropriate for this. The sprinkler spacing to ceilings shall be between
20 mm and 4500 mm for spray sprinklers and between 50 mm and 300 mm for flat spray
sprinklers.
K.10.1.3 Parameters of sprinkler system for horizontal cable ducts
The dimensioning of the sprinkler system shall be based on an area of operation of 50 m²

and a design density of 12 mm/min. Irrespective of the effective width of the cable duct a
theoretical width of 2,5 m shall be applied. The operating time is 30 min.
205
K.10.1.4 Alarm valves and shut-off devices of sprinkler systems in horizontal

cable ducts
The sprinkler system shall be a wet pipe system. Cable ducts up to 3000 m long may be
connected to a wet alarm valve station. For each 1000 m duct length there shall be a
separate shut-off device and draining.
The shut-off device shall be equipped with a monitoring device for the operational status.
The shut-off device shall be located outside the associated section. The associated
section shall be clearly identified.
K.10.1.5 Additional alarm devices of sprinkler systems in horizontal cable ducts
If there is no automatic fire detection and fire alarm system with alarm division (100 m
max.), additional alarm devices (water flow alarm switch or wet alarm valve station) shall
be provided for the sprinkler system per cable duct section (100 m max.). Water flow
alarm switches require test facilities (see Fig. 14.03).
K.10.2 Vertical cable ducts

In vertical cable ducts sprinklers shall be located at the topmost position. Further
sprinklers shall be provided at a vertical distance of not more than 4 m. The sprinklers at
intermediate levels shall be fitted with water shields.
It shall be possible to supply all sprinklers installed within a vertical cable duct
simultaneously with extinguishing water. If the vertical cable duct is subdivided by at least
fire-retardant separations made of non-combustible materials, only the sprinklers of the
largest section need to be considered.
Sprinklers in vertical cable ducts
Upright or pendent standard or spray sprinklers with K factor 80 and operating

temperature 57°C shall be used.
The minimum pressure at the sprinkler is 1,0 bar, operating time is 30 min.
K.10.3 Cable floors or cable rooms

For cable floors or cable rooms shall have an operating area of 260 m². With fire-
retardant cable floors or cable rooms made of non-combustible materials and smaller
than 260 m², the effective surface may be applied as the area of operation.
K. 10.3.1 Design density for sprinkler systems in cable floors or cable rooms
The design density depends on the number of cable trays arranged one upon the other. It
is as follows:
− up to 3 cable trays 5,0 mm/min

206
K.10.3.2 Operating time for sprinkler systems in cable floors or cable rooms
The operating time of the sprinkler system is 60 min.
For other types of horizontal and vertical cable ducts and floors the design shall be
agreed with the VdS Inspection Services (e.g. with the risk of freezing in the protection
area).
K.11 Recycling plants for plastic packaging material

K.11.1 General
This concept is based on fire tests and represents one possible solution for adequate
protection.
The different divisions of recycling plants for plastic packaging material shall be protected
by sprinkler or water spray extinguishing systems according to the fire load. Pneumatic
conveyors in which fires may occur and be forwarded, require additional protection by
spark extinguishing systems.
As bulk and bale storage require additional clearing out and damping down, the alarm
shall be directly transmitted to the fire brigade. The pump capacity of the fire engine shall
be at least 1600 l/min.
The protection concept should be agreed with the VdS Inspection Services in the
planning phase.
K.11.2 Sprinkler system design parameters for recycling plants

The following shall be protected by a sprinkler system:
− bulk storage;
− bale storage;
− sorting cabins.
According to size, the following equipment shall be protected by a sprinkler system:
− raw material bunkers;

− shredders, mills;
− drying systems;
− silo systems.
The maximum storage heights for bulk and bale storage are specified in Table K.08 and
the design parameters in Table K.09.
Max. storage height Max. room height

Bulk storage 5,0 m 9,0 m
Bale storage 4,0 m 9,0 m
Table K.08: Storage heights bulk and bale storage
207
Density of discharge (no HHS) 17,5 mm/min1)

Area of operation 260 m² wet pipe system
325 m² dry pipe system
Response sensitivity of sprinklers “Quick”
Extinguishing agent water with film forming foam concentrate3)
2)
Operating time
Water supply 90 min
Foam concentrate supply 60 min
Storage tanks or private reservoirs minimum effective capacity ≥ 70 m³
1) With a smaller storage height than that specified in Table K.09 the density of discharge may be reduced,
provided that the extinguishing performance is clearly proved by fire tests.
2) The operating time may be reduced to 60 min for water supply and 45 min for foam concentrate supply,
provided that:
– the fire brigade guarantees a response time of 15 min in accordance with DIN 14 011-9 for a group
strength of 1:8, confirmed in writing;
- the supply of film forming foam concentrate is ensured for another 15 min to be fed into the system
directly or indirectly by the fire brigade. The foam concentrate supply shall be refilled with the same
product by the same manufacturer only;
– foam extinguishing devices are available; and
– appropriate vehicles (wheel loaders, fork lifts, dredgers, etc.) and staff for clearing out are available.
In the planning phase compliance with these requirements shall be agreed with VdS.
3) The nominal proportioning rate shall be selected according to the type of foam concentrate and be 1%
minimum. All system components shall be appropriate for this proportioning rate.
Table K.09: Design parameters for sprinkler systems for bulk and bale storage
The sprinkler system for the sorting cabins may be designed according to OH3. For the
local protection of the equipment specified in this clause a design density of 7,5 mm/min
shall be provided. Use sprinklers of response sensitivity “Special”.
Where dry pipe systems are installed for the protection of bulk and bale storage, water
shall be discharged at the end of the pipework not later than 20 s after the test facility has
been opened. This may be achieved e.g. by installing accelerators.
K.11.3 Design parameters of a water spray extinguishing system in

recycling plants
A water spray extinguishing system (see VdS 2109) shall be used e.g. for the protection
of encapsulated mechanical conveyors, such as belt, drag chain and spiral conveyors or
vibratory channels with a design density of 7,5 mm/min.
Note: Alternatively to the protection by a sprinkler system in accordance with K.11.2 bulk
and bale storage may be protected by a water spray extinguishing system with a design
density of 17,5 mm/min and a proportioning of film forming foam concentrate as well as in
compliance with the storage heights specified in Table K.09.
Dry pilot lines with glass bulb release elements of response sensitivity “Special” shall be
used for fire detection purposes.
Upon release of the water spray extinguishing system the conveyor and sorting
equipment of the appropriate area shall be disabled automatically.
The water rate for the local protection systems available in the protection areas shall be
considered.
208
K.11.4 Power supply of pump system

The power supply of the pump system should be backed up.
K.11.5 Monitoring of sprinkler or water spray extinguishing system

The sprinkler resp. water spray extinguishing systems shall be monitored for operational
status.
K.11.6 Fire department supply connection

Where fire department supply connections are provided, these should have a supply pipe
DN 150 and four “B” hose connections.
K.11.7 Spark extinguishing systems in recycling plants

Spark extinguishing systems (see VdS 2106) shall be used to protect pneumatic
conveyors transporting residual materials and dusts (e.g. in bale presses, screening
plants, sieve sifters, reduced waste container station).
Upon release of the spark detector with spark counting device in pneumatic conveyors,
the additional local protection nozzles (see VdS 2109) installed in the objects (e.g. drum
sieve systems, sieve sifters, reduced waste container station, dust exhausting equipment,
filters, cyclone) shall operate automatically, as soon as the alarm threshold has been
reached. The design density shall be 7,5 mm/min minimum and the operating time shall
be 30 min.
Note: The nozzles shall be positioned at the top of each; activation shall be via spark
detectors in the exhaustion.
K.12 Local application for paper machines

Drying hoods of paper machines shall be protected by wet pipe systems in accordance
with OH3.
Note: If high temperatures prevail in the drying hoods (e.g. > 100°C), pendent dry
sprinklers or a dry pipe system may be appropriate for this area. Water shall be
discharged at the most unfavourably positioned sprinklers after 30 s maximum.
Beneath the drying hood ceiling sprinklers with an area of operation of 12 m² shall be
positioned.
In the area of the roller frames sprinklers shall be positioned between the roller frames
such that in the case of fire the storage areas are sprinklered.
The basement area shall be protected by a sprinkler row in the foundation area with a
sprinkler spacing of 2,5 m maximum. The areas of operation for the sprinklers between
the roller frames and in the basement area shall be 90 m².
K.13 Special requirements for the protection of mobile shelving

with ceiling sprinklers only
This Annex includes mobile shelving with the top open or closed. Perforated tops are
preferred.
Only Category I or II products shall be stored in mobile shelving.
209
The height of the mobile shelving protected by ceiling sprinklers only shall be limited to
3m. The clearance between the top of the mobile shelving units and the sprinkler
deflectors shall not be less than 0,5 m.
The area of each block of closed (compressed) mobile shelving shall not exceed 150 m².
There shall be aisles of at least 1,2 m surrounding each block of mobile shelving in either
the closed or open (uncompressed) condition. Instead of aisles there may also be a
separation by at least fire-retardant walls made of non-combustible materials. The walls
shall be fully closed, sufficiently resistant to mechanical impact and leading up to a height
of 0,5 m minimum above the topmost stored goods.
When the mobile shelves are closed (compressed), each shelf unit shall close against
hard tops, which shall maintain a space of at least 50 mm between adjacent shell units. A
fully closed topmost level shall be avoided.
The water density at the ceiling protection shall be in accordance with the specifications
of Clause 6 with a minimum of 10 mm/min.
For rooms with a floor area less than 150 m² the density shall be applied in accordance
with Table K.10:
Maximum room height Minimum density

(m) (mm/min)
3 7,5
2,6 5
Table K.10: Minimum density
K. 14 Requirements for the protection of automatic parking

systems
K. 14.1 Protection of automatic parking systems
K.14.1.1 General
Automatic parking systems are garages with neither movement of persons nor vehicular
traffic, in which the vehicles are transported by mechanical conveyors from the garage
entrance to the parking spaces and back to the garage exit.
The heat accumulation required for a quick response of the sprinklers is difficult to
achieve due to very open construction, mainly in the case of multi-storey parking
systems. Therefore, the sprinklers shall be arranged as in local applications, focusing on
the position of the vehicle. Quick response sprinklers shall be arranged with reduced
sprinkler distances.
Via increased pressure at the sprinkler a drop spectrum with a high amount of small
drops may be achieved, ensuring quick fire suppression and preventing fire spread to
other vehicles.
Appropriate means shall be used to prevent fire spread by ignited fuel.
210
K.14.1.2 Rating basis
Sprinklers: Response sensitivity “Quick”
Minimum pressure at sprinkler: The hydraulic calculation shall be based on

minimum pressure at sprinkler pü = 4 bar
and maximum pressure pü = 10 bar.
Minimum density of discharge: 7,5 mm/min
Area of operation: The area of operation comprises the

sprinklers for six parking spaces. The
hydraulic calculation shall be based on the
sprinklers for the hydraulically most
unfavourable six parking spaces of one
level. Evidence shall be provided that the
sprinklers of the three hydraulically most
unfavourable parking spaces situated one
above the other can be supplied with the
required operating pressure. The water flow
for the most unfavourable area of operation
shall fall below 70% of the maximum flow of
the sprinkler pump.
Operating time water supply: 30 min
Proportioning: The extinguishing water shall contain min.

3% film forming foam concentrate.
Operating time foam concentrate: 30 min
Water supply: Automatic parking systems with up to 500

parking spaces shall have at least water
supply type 2. In the case of systems with an
additional pressure tank, this tank shall have
a water quantity of 15 m³ minimum.
Power supply: If a pump system is used, it shall be

powered by a diesel engine. Alternatively,
two independent power supplies may be
used. This also applies to booster pumps in
water pipe systems.
Operating pressure: The pressure stage of the components shall

comply with the operating pressure in the
system. The pressure within the pipes of the
sprinkler system shall not exceed pü = 16
bar.
A fire department supply connection shall be provided.
K.14.1.3 Sprinkler arrangement
K.14.1.3.1 Arrangement at parking spaces
The sprinklers shall be arranged above the vehicles such that the automatic placing and
removal of any permitted type of vehicle will not cause any damage.
211
The sprinkler rows shall be arranged laterally beside the vehicles (see Figure K.04).
The sprinklers shall be arranged between every two adjacent vehicles of one row and
between the end of one vehicle row and the wall.
Figure K.04: Parking spaces
A maximum lateral distance of 0,5 m between sprinkler row and vehicle shall not be
exceeded.
The sprinkler spacing shall be between 1,5 m and 2,5 m; the distance to the walls shall
not exceed half a sprinkler spacing. The sprinkler distance to the ceiling shall be in
accordance with 11.4.2.
If no end-to-end ceiling is provided, the distance to the lower edge of the collecting tray or
to the vehicle carrier of the level above shall be measured. In this case a sufficiently large
heat accumulation space above the sprinklers shall be provided, with additional baffles, if
required.
K.14.1.3.2 Arrangement at conveyors
The sprinklers shall be installed at distances of 4 m max. to each other and 2 m max. to
the wall.
The protection area of a sprinkler shall not exceed 9 m².
The sprinkler distance to the ceiling shall comply with 11.4.2.
212
Annex L
ESFR Sprinkler systems, planning and installation
L.1 General
L.1.1 Scope
This Annex specifies design and installation requirements for Early Suppression Fast
Response (ESFR) sprinkler systems. ESFR sprinklers are quick-acting, high-performance
sprinklers which have the capability of extinguishing fires within designated risks. There is
little room for error in the design and installation of ESFR sprinkler systems; the design
principles and the operating characteristics are significantly different to standard sprinkler
protection. ESFR sprinklers may be unable to succeed with adverse design features and
non-compliance, which may be common practice when installing standard sprinkler
protection. It is therefore essential that all the requirements of this Annex are complied
with, without exception, when applying ESFR protection.
With the exception of the clauses identified in L.4.1, all the requirements of these
Guidelines are applicable when installing ESFR sprinklers.
Preliminary agreement of the authorities is essential before selecting ESFR sprinklers to

be used in a sprinkler installation.
EFSR sprinklers are mainly used if in-racks sprinkler cannot be installed for technical
reasons.
Note 1: Preliminary design considerations shall be carried out to determine if the building
construction is suitable for the use of ESFR sprinklers.
VdS should be involved even in the planning of ESFR sprinkler systems.
Note 2: When applying pressure tanks, an end pressure of 2 bar is sufficient. When
applying two pumps with separate power supply and a water volume of at least twice
50% of the total volume, a pressure tank may be omitted. In this case a pressure holding
pump is required.
L.1.2 Definitions
Sprinkler, ESFR pattern: Nozzle with a thermosensitive sealing device which opens to
discharge water, distributing it in a specified pattern, with sufficient momentum, over a
designated area to achieve suppression of a fire or inhibit growth when connected to the
appropriate piping and water supplies.
L.1.3 ESFR sprinklers

ESFR sprinklers shall be “Quick” response and have one of the following temperature
ratings:
− Bulbs: 68°C
93°C
− Fusible element: 68 to 74°C
93 to 104°C
The higher temperature ratings shall only be used where needed because of high
ambient temperature conditions.
The nominal K factor of ESFR sprinklers shall be 200 or 360.
213
L.1.4 Application
The following clauses of these Guidelines are not applicable to ESFR sprinkler protection:
4.2, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4.11, 8.3.2.2, , 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4.1,
11.4.2, 11.4.4, 11.4.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.7, 11.4.9, 11.4.10, 11.4.12, 11.4.13, 11.5, 12.2, 12.4,
12.5, 12.6, 12.7, 12.8, 12.9.
L.1.4.1 Storage configurations
L.1.4.1.1 Longitudinal and transverse flues
Storages should have longitudinal and transverse flues, which are:
a) continuous for the full height of each block of storage;

b) vertically aligned;
c) free of stored goods;
L.1.4.1.2 Storage methods ST2, ST3, ST4, ST5 and ST6
The longitudinal and transverse flues with storage methods ST2, ST3, ST4 and ST6 shall
be regularly spaced and having dimensions as follows:
− (1) transverse flues shall be at least 0,08 m wide and shall be spaced at distances of
not more than 3,0 m; and
− (2) longitudinal flues shall be at least 0,15 m wide and shall be spaced at distances of
not more than 3,0 m.
Figure L.01: Storage methods ST2, ST3 and ST4 transverse and longitudinal flues
214
Storage method ST1 shall have either appropriate longitudinal and transverse flues, or
else the storage blocks shall not have any flues – especially no flues covered at the top.
L.1.4.1.3 Storage methods ST5 and ST6
Single and double-row shelved racks shall comply with one of the following:
a) shelves having openings of less than 50% of the plan area shall not exceed 2,0 m² total
plan area and shall be bounded on all four edges by flues of not less than 0,15 m width;
b) slatted shelves shall have shelf-open areas, uniformly interspaced of at least 50% of the
shelf plan area. The distance between openings shall not exceed 0,15 m; or;
c) grated or mesh-type shelves shall have uniform openings of at least 50% of the shelf
plan area. The horizontal distance between openings shall not exceed 0,15 m.
215
L.1.4.3 ESFR sprinklers shall be designed in accordance with Table L.01.
Commodity (storage Maximum ceiling height: Maximum ceiling height: Maximum ceiling height: Maximum ceiling height:
1) 1) 1) 1)
methods required to 9,1 m 9,8 m 10,6 m 12,2 m
comply with L.1.4.1.2 and
L.1.4.1.3)
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
storage pressure at the storage pressure at storage pressure at storage pressure at the
6) 6) 6) 6)
height sprinkler height the height the height sprinkler
sprinkler sprinkler
(m) (bar) (m) (bar) (m) (bar) (m) (bar)
K-200 K-360 K-200 K-360 K-200 K-360
Expanded plastic and 7,6 3,5 1,4 7,6 4,2 NA NA NA NA NA

foamed rubber in carton
(more than 15% in volume
of the cardboard carton)
2), 3)
Category 1, 2, 3 & 4 7,6 3,5 1,4 7,6 4,2 7,6 2,1 10,6 5,2 2,8
(less than 15% in volume
of the cardboard carton)
7) 7) 7) 7)
Paper rolls stored on end 7,6 3,5 1,4 9,1 5,2 2,8
(stored vertically) in open
or closed arrays, banded
or unbanded: heavyweight
2), 3)
paper
7) 7) 7) 7)
Paper rolls stored on end 6,1 3,5 1,4 6,1 5,2 2,8
(stored vertically) in open
or closed arrays, banded
or unbanded : Medium
weight paper and plastic
coated heavyweight
4), 5)
paper
6)
Mezzanine height < 4,5 m. 6 additional sprinklers for hydraulic calculation 3,5 bar for K = 200 and at 1,4 bar for K = 360
All acceptable stored
goods and storage
configurations
6)
Mezzanine height > 4,5 m. Pressure appropriate for stored goods and ceiling (mezzanine) height
All acceptable stored
goods and storage
configurations
1)
The ceiling height shall be taken as the maximum vertical distance measured from the floor to the underside of the ceiling or roof
deck.
2)
Authorities shall be consulted for the protection of plastic commodity.
3)
All types of plastic products shall be contained in wooden, cardboard or non-combustible boxes. All types of plastics and foamed
rubber shall not occupy a greater volume than 15% of the capacity of the box.
4)
excluding lightweight paper
5)
lightweight paper - all paper with a weight of less than 50 g/m² and paper with absorbent features (such as toilet paper, paper
towelling, disposable absorbent paper product) regardless of weight. Medium weight paper – non-absorbent paper with a hard or
smooth finish that weighs 50 g/m² or more but less than 100 g/m². Heavyweight paper – non-absorbent paper or cardboard that
weighs 100 g/m² or greater.
6)
Utilisation of the storage height is only possible if the vertical distance from the upper edge of the stored goods to the sprinkler
deflector is at least 1 m or the value shown in the table, whichever is the lower.
7)
The values given for a maximum ceiling height of 12,2 m shall be used.
Table L.01: Design of ESFR sprinklers
216
L.1.4.4 ESFR sprinklers shall only be installed in buildings with roof or ceiling slope up to
and including 170 mm/m. Where roof or ceiling slopes exceed 170 mm/m, the roof or
ceiling shall be underdrawn with a false ceiling. The false ceiling shall be of non-
combustible construction, having an acceptable slope. ESFR sprinklers shall be deployed
below the false ceiling. Standard sprinkler protection shall be used in the roof or ceiling
space
L.1.4.5 Ceilings shall be capable of withstanding a vertical upward load of at least

150 N/m2. Materials suitable for such purpose include 10 mm gypsum board, corrugated
or sheet steel or mineral tile. Suspended ceilings shall be capable of withstanding a
vertical upward load of at least 50 N/m2.
L.1.4.6 The following example of storage or commodities are not suitable for protection
by ESFR sprinklers:
− certain storages which exhibit unusual fire characteristics such as roll tissue;
− open-top combustible containers;
− unusual commodities or materials which have not been proven, by either testing or
analysis, to be appropriate for ESFR sprinklers protection;
− warehouses in which the commodities or the type of storage are unpredictable;
− special risks which are described in Annex K (K.1 aerosols, K.3 flammable liquid
storages, K.5 spirituous liquors and K.7 PE, PP, PS and plastics with similar fire
behaviour).
L.2 Sprinkler System Design

L.2.1 General
L.2.1.1 Only wet-pipe systems shall be used.
L.2.1.2 ESFR protection is based on construction without smoke and heat exhaust
ventilation systems or other roof openings.
If smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems are unavoidable, they shall be operated
manually. Any draft curtains used in conjunction with roof vents or other roof openings
shall be limited in depth and located with respect to sprinklers so that distances specified
in Table L.03 are complied with. Any open roof vents or other roof openings shall be
closed automatically preferably before, but in no case more than 30 s after, the operation
of the first sprinkler.
The only smoke and heat exhaust ventilation systems allowed are those in which no
openings can occur due to melting up to the point of intended manual release in
accordance with DIN 18232.
L.2.1.3 The clear space beneath the sprinkler deflectors shall be no less than 1m.
L.2.1.4 Skylights shall be flush to the ceiling or underdrawn at ceiling level. The skylights
shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a temperature of 300°C for at least
5 min.
Where powered ventilation is employed, the building shall be protected by an approved

fire detection and fire alarm installation. The powered ventilation shall be stopped and
any dampers closed automatically in response to the fire detection and fire alarm system
alarm of fire.
217
L.2.2 Hydraulic design

L.2.2.1 ESFR sprinkler installations shall be fully hydraulically calculated in accordance
with Annex G.1 and G.3.
L.2.2.2 The design area of operation shall consist of an area with a minimum of 12 ceiling
sprinklers or minimum 90 m² whichever is the greater. This design area of operation shall
be the hydraulically most unfavourable area and may include up to 6 additional sprinklers
within the same area (e.g. under obstructions). The minimum operating pressures are
stated in Table L.01.
The water supply shall be capable of providing the demand flow for at least 60 min.
L.2.2.3 For hydraulic calculation purposes, 4 sprinklers shall be assumed to operate on

each of 3 branch pipes. When branch pipes have less than four sprinklers, all the
sprinklers on the branch pipe shall be assumed to operate and the number of branches
involved shall be increased until a total of 12 sprinklers are assumed operating.
L.2.2.4 Where ESFR sprinklers are installed beneath mezzanines of 4,5 m height from
the floor or less, at least 6 ESFR sprinklers shall be assumed to operate (three ESFR
sprinklers on each of two branches) at an operating pressure of 3,5 bar.
Note: Where standard sprinkler protection is employed beneath mezzanines of 4,5 m

height or less, the area of operation and design density shall comply with the appropriate
requirements of Section 6 - Hydraulic design criteria.
ESFR sprinklers shall be used beneath mezzanines which are higher than 4,5 m; twelve
ESFR sprinklers shall be assumed to operate (four sprinklers on each of three branches).
Sprinklers beneath walkways, conveyors and mezzanines shall be taken into account
when designing the water supplies, in accordance with table L.02.
Obstructions within the design area of Maximum number of additional sprinklers in

operation hydraulic calculation
Obstructions less than 3 m width 2 sprinklers operating
at 3,5 bar (K=200)
at 1,4 bar (K=360)
Obstructions greater than 3 m width such 4 sprinklers operating
as walkways and conveyors at 3,5 bar (K=200)
at 1,4 bar (K=360)
Mezzanines1 6 sprinklers operating at the design pressure (see
table L.01).
1
Additional sprinklers need not be added to the water supply requirement providing:
a) open-fronted mezzanines are fitted vertically with screens which extend at least 1,2 m below the ceiling
and are of non-combustible construction and fit tightly against the underside of the ceiling; and
b) a clear aisle beneath the screen of at least 0,6 m wide each side of the screen centre-line is
maintained.
Table L.02: Sprinklers design beneath obstruction
218
L.2.3 Spacing and location of sprinklers

L.2.3.1 The area of coverage of ESFR sprinklers shall be not less than 7,5 m² and not
more than 9 m². The distance between sprinklers shall be in accordance with table L.03.
Maximum height ceiling Distance between sprinklers

min max
9,1 m 2,4 m 3,7 m
12,2 m 2,4 m 3m
Table L.03: Distance between sprinklers
L.2.3.2 The centre line of the sprinkler heat-sensitive element shall be between 0,1 to
0,33 m below the roof or ceiling for an ESFR sprinkler with a K factor of 200.
The centre line of the sprinkler heat-sensitive element shall be between 0,1 to 0,45 m
below the roof or ceiling for an ESFR sprinkler with a K factor of 360.
Where the roofs or ceilings are constructed using beams and girders or profiled panelling,
sprinklers should be located in bays rather than under beams. Bays formed by this
method of construction should not exceed 0,75 m depth. Where the ceiling is profiled, the
distance from the ceiling to the sprinkler shall be measured from the bottom of the profile,
see figure L.02. The position of the deflector shall be in accordance with L.2.3.3.
Where this is not practical, the roof or ceiling shall be underdrawn by a suspended
ceiling.
Figure L.02: Position of sprinkler deflector relative to profiled ceilings
219
Figure L.03: Sprinkler deflector above bottom of beam or obstruction
Figure L.04: Obstacles exclusively underneath sprinkler
220
Figure L.05: Positioning of sprinklers above an obstruction
Note: With obstructions smaller than 30 cm values deviating from Figure L.05 may be
accepted by agreement with VdS, provided that the obstruction is located centrally
between the sprinklers.
L.2.3.3 Where sprinkler deflectors are located above the bottom of beams, girders, ducts,
fluorescent lighting fixtures or other obstructions located near the ceiling, the position of
the sprinklers with respect to these obstructions shall be in accordance with Figures L.03,
L.04 and L.05, as appropriate.
L.2.3.4 Continuous obstructions located below sprinklers, such as sprinkler piping, utility
piping or duct work up to 0,3 m wide at a horizontal distance of at least 0,6 m from the
vertical centre-line of the sprinklers do not require additional sprinklers below. Additional
sprinklers shall be located below wider or more closely located obstructions.
L.2.3.5 Upright sprinklers shall be positioned so that the deflector has a minimum
distance of 0,18 m above the top of the branch pipe.
Note: Presently only pendent ESFR sprinklers are VdS-approved.
L.2.3.6 Roller-type conveyors and grated walkways with 50% or more uniform openings
are not considered as obstructions to ceiling sprinkler discharge. However, when there
are more than one level above each other of conveyors or walkways 50% or more open,
a line of ESFR sprinklers shall be installed beneath every other level starting from the
second level down from the ceiling. (See Figure L.06).
221
L.2.4 Separation between ESFR and other sprinkler installations

Vertical screens shall be installed between areas protected by ESFR sprinklers and areas
protected by other type of sprinklers. This applies whether the roof over the two areas is
at the same elevation or at different elevations. The screens shall extend at least 1,2 m
below the ceiling, be non-combustible and fit tightly against the underside of the roof. A
clear aisle, at least 1,5 m on each side of the centre-line beneath the screen, shall be
maintained.
Figure L.06: Positioning of ESFR sprinklers relative to conveyors or walkways
222
Annex M
Proportioning of film forming foam concentrate in
sprinkler systems
M.1 Choice and type of sprinkler system

M.1.1 General
Compliance with the local environmental requirements and regulations for the design,
inspection and draining of the system and for the water discharged by the system and
other environmental requirements shall be ensured (e.g. WHG – Federal Water Act).
A proportioning of film forming foam concentrate is possible with
− wet pipe systems;

− dry pipe systems;
− quick dry pipe systems.
M.1.2 Wet pipe systems with foam proportioning

Wet pipe systems shall be permanently filled with a water-foam concentrate mixture
(premix). Alternatively, wet pipe systems can be designed such that the water-foam
concentrate mixture takes 1 min maximum from the proportioning unit to the most
unfavourable sprinkler, if only this one sprinkler operates. Alcohol-resistant foam
concentrate shall not be used as premix.
Note: The choice of premix shall be in accordance with the material of pipework and
components.
The foam concentrate manufacturer shall indicate the corrosive effect that the mix
produced from his foam concentrate has – compared to tap water – on the construction
material of the sprinkler system.
If water-foam concentrate mixture (premix) is prevailing in the pipework, its quality shall
be tested in accordance with the foam concentrate manufacturer, in any case at least
once a year. The test intervals depend on the water quality, on local conditions etc.
Samples shall be taken at not less than three locations in the pipework at the sampling
connections provided for this purpose, i.e.
− at the proportioning point;

− in the centre of the ceiling pipework or at thermally loaded locations;
− at the end of the pipework.
The quality of the foam concentrate shall be tested with regard to its spreading
coefficient, foaming (if applicable) and surface tension.
Note: This may be in accordance with the relevant parts of EN 1568.
Valves for testing the foam concentrate-water mixture shall be marked with a permanent
label or sticker reading “Test valve for foam concentrate-water mixture”.
In the case of a negative test result the pipework shall be drained and flushed before
refilling it. If the foam concentrate-water mixture repeatedly fails to fulfil the quality
requirements, it may be necessary to test the water supply or examine the water for
223
contamination. In case of a contamination the respective mixture shall be removed from

the system.
M.1.3 Dry pipe systems with foam proportioning

When opening the test facility located at the end of the pipework of dry pipe systems or
quick dry pipe systems, water-foam concentrate mixture shall be discharged after not
more than 30 s. This test may be carried out with water.
M.1.4 Function test of alarm devices

The system shall be designed such that the foam proportioning may be disabled during a
function test of the alarm devices.
M.2 Foam proportioning unit

M.2.1 General
The proportioning unit shall be designed such that a proportioning even takes place at an
extinguishant rate of 200 l/min minimum. Up to an extinguishant rate of 500 l/min
maximum the required nominal concentration of the foam concentrate shall be reached.
Between 500 l/min and the maximum extinguishant rate this value shall not exceed the
tolerances (see M.2.5).
M.2.2 Marking of proportioning unit

Proportioning units shall be permanently marked, at least with the following:
− flow direction;
− extinguishing concentration;
− operation range (concentration).
M.2.3 Test facility for foam concentration

Downstream of any proportioning unit a connection shall be provided for testing the foam
concentration in the extinguishing water and a shut-off valve.
During approval evidence shall be provided to the full extent that the required foam
concentration is reached, using appropriate fixed (or held ready on site) flow measuring
devices. The test shall be carried out at maximum extinguishant rate with water, and at a
value of 500 l/min with water and additionally with foam concentrate for comparison.
To minimise the quantity of unnecessary foam concentrate, a surrogate liquid may be

proportioned whose flow and shear properties correspond to those of the foam
concentrate.
In the periodical inspection one year after commissioning, a test can be carried out with
water or surrogate liquid and the results compared to those obtained upon
commissioning. If the values measured with water or the surrogate liquid exceed the
tolerance range after one year, the test shall be repeated with foam concentrate.
224
M.2.4 Foam concentration

The proportioning of foam concentrates shall be in accordance with the specified
extinguishing concentration taking into account the minimum concentration specified in
these Guidelines.
M.2.5 Tolerance
The following values shall be met as tolerances of the extinguishing concentration:
− minimum value: according to foam concentrate approval in consideration of the

materials to be extinguished;
− maximum value: 1,3-fold of the minimum value, in any case not more than 1%
absolute
The system shall be fitted with a test facility allowing control of all mechanical and
electrical components of the proportioning unit without adding any foam concentrate to
the extinguishing water during the test. The proportioning unit shall be reset automatically
after control, so that the foam concentrate can be proportioned.
M.3 Foam concentrate pumps

Pumps for foam concentrate shall be appropriate for this application (e.g. corrosion-
resistant, leak-proof).
The pump capacity shall be dimensioned in accordance with the maximum design
requirements of the sprinkler system, the viscosity of the foam concentrate and the
maximum proportioning tolerance. The maximum pressure of the pump may exceed the
permitted nominal pressure of the sprinkler system up to the proportioning unit and shall
be, in any operating state, at least as much higher than the water pressure upstream of
the proportioning unit, as has been specified by the manufacturer of the proportioning
unit, in any case at least 1 bar.
Foam concentrate pumps shall operate in positive head conditions. Positive displacement
pumps shall be fitted with an appropriate means of pressure limitation.
Pumps, suction and pressure pipes up to the proportioning unit shall be fitted with
flushing devices. During flushing no water shall flow back into the foam concentrate tank.
The power supply of the foam concentrate pump shall be backed up in the case of:
− more than 80 sprinklers in high rack storage;

− more than 750 sprinkler in HHS;
− more than 5000 sprinklers in LH, OH and HHP.
M.4 Foam concentrate

M.4.1 General
Foam concentrates are subject to approval in terms of the official regulations for fire
extinguishants and fire extinguishing devices.
Foam concentrates shall be used that are appropriate for both fire load and equipment,
e.g. proportioning unit.
225
M.4.2 Water quality

The water shall not contain any parts incompatible with foam concentrate.
M.4.3 Foam concentrate supply

The foam concentrate supply is determined by the water flow, the proportioning time and
the effective proportioning rate of the system.
The total supply of foam concentrate shall ensure a continuous operation of the
extinguishing system for 30 min.
If an approved works fire brigade with a group strength of at least 1:8 is available, the
foam concentrate supply may be reduced by 50%, providing at least the same amount is
stored at the works fire brigade and may be connected to the fixed foam concentrate tank
of the sprinkler system within 15 min. The fulfilment of these requirements shall be
agreed with the VdS Inspection Services in the planning phase.
Different foam concentrates shall not be mixed unless the respective manufacturers
permit this.
M.5 Foam concentrate tank

M.5.1 General
Storage tanks for foam concentrate shall have a design approval and be established and
fitted in accordance with the applicable regulations.
According to type and quantity of foam concentrate a collection tray may be required for
the protection area.
The foam concentrate manufacturer’s storage conditions shall be met.
M.5.2 Normal pressure tank

When determining the effective capacity of the tank, the heat expansion of the foam
concentrate shall be taken into account.
The tank shall be fitted with ventilation devices, a fill level indicator and an overflow
protection.
For checking the inner walls of the tank inspection openings shall be provided.
Connections for filling and draining the tank shall be provided. The filling pipe shall lead to
the vicinity of the tank bottom.
The suction connection for the foam concentrate shall be located above the tank bottom.
The volume beneath the suction pipe connection shall not be taken into account when
determining the effective volume.
Where sediment-free synthetic foam concentrate is stored in fibreglass or rust-proof steel

tanks, the connection may be fixed at tank bottom level.
226
M.5.3 Pressure tanks

Pressure tanks (membrane tanks) shall be fitted with filling, draining, ventilation, fill level
indicating, cleaning and inside area testing devices.
Appropriate devices shall be fitted to prevent any involuntary foam proportioning into the
system.
An operation manual shall be fixed in the direct vicinity of the tank. Any operational
sequences listed therein shall be followed by all means.
During operation of the extinguishing system pressure tanks cannot be refilled.
The total volume of foam concentrate may be allocated to several tanks connected to
each other. To avoid irregular extraction, the pressure losses in the connection pipes
shall be balanced.
M.6 Foam concentrate pipes and water-foam concentrate mixture

pipes
Components and pipes permanently filled with foam concentrate shall not change the
characteristics of the foam concentrate. They should be made of stainless steel.
Foam concentrate pipes upstream of the proportioning unit, which cannot be filled within
10s, shall be permanently filled with foam concentrate. The foam concentrate pump and
the connection between foam concentrate tank and proportioning unit shall be made of
stainless steel, providing they are permanently filled with foam concentrate.
Pipes and components permanently filled with water-foam concentrate mixture shall
comply with 15.1.2. Galvanised pipes and pipes with internal lining shall not be used.
In foam concentrate pipes strainers shall be installed upstream of the proportioning unit in
the direction of flow.
The strainers should be fitted such that the sprinkler system can operate even while they
are being cleaned (flushed).
Strainers are not required if membrane tanks and proportioning units with restrictors ≥
8mm in diameter are used.
M.7 Pressure loss calculation with foam concentrate pipes

Foam concentrate pipes shall be dimensioned such that pressure loss differences are
taken into account with the following operating conditions:
− lowest resp. highest anticipated water rate;

− lowest resp. highest anticipated temperature of foam concentrate in the pipework.
With foam concentrate pumps: The effective NPSH value of the foam concentrate pump
shall exceed the required NPSH by at least 1 m.
Any pressure loss in the foam concentrate pipes shall be calculated in accordance with
the DARCY formula. For foam concentrate with non-Newton characteristics special
considerations apply. Viscosity according to flow velocity shall be used.
227
L ρ
Δp =λ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅v 2 (Darcy formula)
d 2
with:
Δp pressure loss, in N/m²
λ pipe friction factor
L pipe length, in m
d pipe diameter, in m
ρ fluid density, in kg/m3

v flow velocity, in m/s
The absolute pipe friction factor λ shall be calculated as a function of the Reynolds
number Re according to the following equations.
The Reynolds number is a result of:
v
Re = d ⋅
γ
with:
γ kinematic viscosity, in m²/s
For calculating the Reynolds number the kinematic viscosity of the lowest possible
temperature at the location of the foam concentrate tank shall be used.
For Re < 2350 (laminar range) the following applies:
64
λ=
Re
d
For 2350 < Re < 65 (hydraulically smooth pipes)
k
with:
k pipe surface roughness, in mm (for steel pipes: k = 0,5 mm; for stainless steel
pipes: k = 0,2 mm)
the following applies:
−2
  λ 
λ = 2 ⋅lg Re⋅ 
  2,51 
 
d d
For 65 < Re < 1300 the following applies:
k k
228
−2
  2,51 k 
λ =  − 2⋅ lg + 

  Re⋅ λ 3,71⋅ d 
d
For Re > 1300 (hydraulically rough pipes) the following applies:
k
−2
  d 
λ = 2 ⋅ lg  3,71⋅ 
  k 
M.8 Disposal
The necessary extinguishing water retaining systems shall be dimensioned in accordance
with the guidelines for calculating extinguishing water retaining systems for the storage of
substances hazardous to waters.
Outdated, contaminated or non-required foam concentrates resp. foam concentrate

solutions (premix) shall be disposed of in accordance with legal regulations (extinguishing
water retaining guidelines).
Annex N
Commodity classification methodology utilising
calorimeter tests (informative)
N.1 Introduction
Efficient and reliable sprinkler protection of storage risks is dependent on appropriate
commodity classifications.
The European sprinkler installation specification CEA 4001 subdivides commodities into
four categories, based on experience and fire test results. Full-scale fire testing has been
the preferred solution for determining commodity classifications, but is a costly procedure.
The development of a purpose built Fire Products Collector (FPC) by Factory Mutual
Research Corporation (FMRC) has made the classification of commodities possible using
smaller amounts of materials than has hitherto been acceptable.
The FPC consists of a large capacity calorimeter hood with a water application pipework
array located below the collector hood, beneath which a fuel array is burnt.
N.2 Test principles

This classification methodology assesses the heat output of the burning goods, placed
beneath the calorimeter, in a fuel array of eight pallets. The pallets are ignited in a
specified manner and are allowed to burn freely until a predefined condition is achieved,
at which time water is released at one of three application rates onto the burning fuel
array. The convective heat release rate is measured over the duration of the test. Three
tests are undertaken at different water application rates.
229
N.3 Method
The method used is described in the document “NORDTEST METHOD NT FIRE 049".
The document may be obtained from:
NORDTEST P.O. Box 116

FIN-02151 ESPOO FINLAND
Phone: +3589 4554600
Fax: +3589 4554272
N.4 Evaluation of test results

A rank value is determined for each of the three test results, by means of comparing the
results with those of known commodities. The ranking system, by comparison, ultimately
enables the determination of a commodity classification for the goods under
consideration.
N.5 Bibliography
a) Chicarello, P-J- Troup, J.M, "Fire products collector test procedure for determining the
commodity classification of ordinary combustible products", Factory Mutual Research
Corporation, August 1990.
b) Heskestad, G. (a fire products collector for calorimetry in the MW range", Factory

Mutual Research Corporation, June 1981.
c) "Commodity classification - A more objective and applicable methodology", Swedish

National Testing Research Institute, SP Report 1993:70.
d) Chicarello, P-J Troup, J.M., "Combustible Products: commodity classification - fire test
procedure", Nordtest method, NT FIRE 049.
230
Annex O
List of numbering of tables and figures CEA/VdS
CEA (informative)
For a better overview the tables and figures of these VdS CEA Guidelines were newly
numbered. The original numbers of the tables and figures of the CEA specifications CEA
4001 : 1995-09 are specified in Tables O.01 and O.02.
CEA VdS CEA CEA VdS CEA

Table No. Table No. Table No. Table No.
1 5.01 A1 A.01
2 5.02 A2 A.01
3 6.01 A3 A.03
4 6.02 B1 B.01
5 6.03 C1 C.01
6 n/a G1 G.01
7 n/a G2 G.02
8 7.01 G3 G.04
9 n/a G4 n/a
10 n/a G5 n/a
11 8.01 G6 n/a
12 8.02 G7 n/a
13 n/a G8 n/a
14 8.03 G9 n/a
15 9.01 G10 n/a
16 9.02 G11 n/a
17 9.03 G12 n/a
18 n/a G13 n/a
19 10.01 G14 n/a
20 10.02
21 11.01
22 11.02
23 11.03
24 11.04
25 12.01
26 12.03
27 13.01
28 15.03
29 15.04
Table O.01: List of table nos.
231
CEA VdS CEA CEA VdS CEA

Figure No. Figure No. Figure No. Figure No.
1 1.01 B1 B.01
2 5.01 D1 D.01
3 5.02 E1 E.01
4 8.02 E2 E.02
5 8.03 H1 H.01
6 9.01 H2 n/a
7 11.01 H3 n/a
8 11.02 H4 n/a
9 11.05 H5 n/a
10 11.06 H6 n/a
11 11.07 H7 n/a
H8 H.02
H9 H.03
H10 H.04
H11 H.05
H12 H.06
Table O.02: List of figure nos.
232
Annex P
Confirmation on the Connection of Hydrant
Systems
Confirmation
on the connection of hydrants to the water supply of the sprinkler system
Building project
Postal code / City
Areas
Operator / Insurer / Competent fire protection authority
Address
Postal code / City
The hydrants are intended to be connected to the distribution pipework of the

sprinkler system.
We are aware of the fact that in case of repair and maintenance works the hydrants are
not available as intended. When water is extracted from the hydrants, a remote alarm is
released at a specified location, unless appropriate organisational measures are taken.
We hereby confirm that we consent to the connection of the hydrants/hydrant system to

the water supply of the sprinkler system in view of the a.m. restrictions.
_________________ ____________________________
Date Stamp and signatures
233
Annex Q
Confirmation: Concrete-casting of Sprinkler Pipes
Object / Building project:
Street:
Postal code/City:
Areas:
Sprinkler systems in accordance with VdS CEA 4001 are characterised by their high
success rate.
The intention is to grant this reliability over a long period of time. In case of any leakages
of the pipework, it shall be possible to do the repair works at short notice without
decommissioning any sections of the extinguishing system over a longer period.
Damage repair and modifications of concrete-cast pipework require increased effort and
thus lead to longer downtimes of the extinguishing system.
The casting dates shall be communicated to VdS Schadenverhütung beforehand. VdS
Schadenverhütung reserves the right to do an on-site inspection and/or witness the
pressure tests.
The owner confirms by his signature that he is aware of the effort required in case of any
works to be carried out at the concrete-cast pipework.
______________________ ____________________
Place, date Stamp / Signature of owner
Copies to:
-Owner
-Installer of extinguishing system
-VdS Schadenverhütung
234
Annex R
Requirements for Material and Fire Resistance
Classes and their Classification in accordance with
DIN 4102 and DIN EN 13501
Source (in extracts): Building Rules List, Editor: Deutsches Institut für Bautechnik (DIBt)
R.1 Principles
The classification of the material and fire resistance classes in accordance with DIN 4102
or DIN EN 13501 in line with this VdS CEA 4001 is analogous to the classification
according to building control requirements. However, this classification does not replace
the required certificates of suitability or applicability by the building control authorities.
R.2 Combustibility of materials

As regards combustibility, the requirements of VdS CEA 4001 are classified according to
the material classes of DIN 4202-1 and DIN EN 13501-1 in accordance with Table R.2
(excluding floorings) and for floorings in accordance with Table R.3.
The smoke growth and burning droplets, which are also included in the respective
material class of DIN 4102-1, are marked in the European class system with an additional
“s” (smoke) and “d” (droplets) in accordance with Table R.1. These additional
requirements have been included in Table R.2 to give you an idea of the corresponding
European classification.
In this context, “SMOGRA” indicates the Smoke Growth Rate and “TSP” indicates the
Total Smoke Production during the standardised test duration of 10 minutes.
Smoke Droplets
Smoke growth Burning droplets
(s) (d)
SMOGRA ≤ 30 m²/s² no burning droplets

s1 d0
and TSP600S≤ 50 m² within 600 s
SMOGRA ≤ 180 m²/s² no burning droplets

s2 d1
and TSP600S≤ 200 m² >10 s within 600 s
s3 neither s1 nor s2 d2 neither d0 nor d1
Table R.1: Additional characteristics of the fire behaviour
235
Material European class DIN EN 13501-11)2) Additional

class Requirements of requirements
DIN 4102-1 VdS CEA 4001 for
materials (no Materials, except
Linear pipe No No burning
floorings) linear pipe
insulation3) smoke droplets
insulation
A1 non-combustible A1 A1L x x
A
A2 A2 -s1 d0 A2L -s1 d0 x x
combustible materials
B -s1, d0 BL -s1, d0
x x
C -s1, d0 CL -s1, d0
A2 -s2, d0 A2L -s2, d0
A2 -s3, d0 A2L -s3, d0
B -s2, d0 BL -s2, d0
x
B -s3, d0 BL -s3, d0
C -s2, d0 CL -s2, d0
C -s3, d0 CL -s3, d0
B1 of low flammability A2 -s1, d1 A2L -s1, d1
A2 -s1, d2 A2L -s1, d2
B -s1, d1 BL -s1, d1 x
B -s1, d2 BL -s1, d2
C -s1, d1 CL -s1, d1
C -s1, d2 CL -s1, d2
B
A2 -s3, d2 A2L -s3, d2
B -s3, d2 BL -s3, d2
C -s3, d2 CL -s3, d2
D -s1, d0 DL -s1, d0
D -s2, d0 DL -s2, d0
x
D -s3, d0 DL -s3, d0
E EL
of normal D -s1, d1 DL -s1, d1
B2 D -s2, d1 DL -s2, d1
flammability
D -s3, d1 DL -s3, d1
D -s1, d2 DL -s1, d2
D -s2, d2 DL -s2, d2
D -s3, d2 DL -s3, d2
E -d2 EL -d2
B3 of high flammability F FL
1)
The European testing and classification regulations do not cover the glow behaviour of materials. For
applications in which the glow behaviour is important, the glow behaviour shall be proven in accordance
with national regulations.
2)
Except for class A1(no application of footnote c of Table 1 of DIN EN 13501-1) and E, the fire behaviour
of exterior wall surfaces and exterior wall cladding (construction types) cannot be finally classified acc. DIN
EN 13501-1.
3)
Index „...L“ (Linear Pipe Thermal Insulation Products) indicates the fire behaviour classes for heat
insulation products of linear pipes.
Table R.2: Material classes acc. DIN 4102-1 and DIN EN 13501-1 (excluding floorings) and their
classification acc. requirements of VdS CEA 4001
236
Material Requirements acc.

European class
class VdS CEA 4001 for 1)
DIN EN 13501-1
DIN 4102-1 floorings
A1 A1fl
A A2 non-combustible
A2fl -s1
combustible materials
Bfl -s1
B1 of low flammability
Cfl -s1
A2fl -s2
Bfl, -s2
B
Cfl, -s2
B2 of normal flammability
Dfl -s1
Dfl -s2
Efl
B3 of high flammability Ffl
1)
Index „...fl“ (floorings) indicates the fire behaviour classes for
floorings
Table R.3: Material classes for floorings acc. DIN 4102-1 and DIN
EN 13501-1 and their classification acc. requirements of VdS CEA
4001
R.3 Fire resistance of components

In the European standards new codes have been introduced for the fire resistance
classes of components (construction products and construction types) according to the
system shown in Table R.4. Performance classes are shown in Table R.5.
R E I W t M C S
Fire Additional
Basic criteria
resistance criteria
Table R.4: System of the European codes
237
Criterion
Code Application
(characteristics of the components)
R (résistance – resistance) load bearing capacity

E (étanchéité – enclosure
Basic criteria
enclosure integrity
integrity)
I (isolation – insulation) heat insulation (under impact of fire) to specify the fire resistance
W (radiation) limitation of radiation penetration
M (mechanical) mechanical impact on walls (shock)

limitation of smoke permeability (leak
smoke control doors (as
tightness, leakage rate) fulfils the
Sm (smokemax. leakage rate) additional requirement also
requirements both at ambient temperature
for fire-resisting closures)
and at 200°C
self-closing characteristic (if applicable, smoke control doors, fire-
C… (closing) with number of load cycles) incl. continuous resisting closures (incl. closures
operation for conveyors)
maintenance of power supply and/or signal
P transmission; test under fire impact by
standard temperature-time curve
electrical cable systems general
maintenance of power supply and/or signal
PH transmission; test under lower fire impact
than standard temperature-time curve
Additional criteria
G soot fire resistance chimneys

wall and ceiling cladding (fire
K1, K2 fire protection capacity
protection cladding)
fire-resisting closures (incl.
I1 , I2 various heat insulation criteria
closures for conveyors)
i→o non-bearing exterior walls,
i←o direction of the classified fire resistance installation ducts/channels,
i↔o (in – out) ventilation systems/flaps
a↔b (above – below) direction of the classified fire resistance false ceilings
ve, ho (vertical, horizontal) classified for vertical/horizontal installation ventilation ducts/flaps
pipe end uncapped inside fire test box/pipe
U/U (uncapped/uncapped) firestop seals for pipes
end uncapped outside fire test box
pipe end capped inside fire test box/pipe
C/U (capped/uncapped) firestop seals for pipes
end uncapped outside fire test box
pipe end uncapped inside fire test box/pipe
U/C (uncapped/capped) firestop seals for pipes
end capped outside fire test box
Table R.5: European performance classes, criteria and applications on fire resistance
in accordance with DIN EN 13501-2 and DIN EN 13501-3
238
The characteristics on fire resistance behaviour classified in accordance with DIN EN

14501-2, DIN EN 13501-3 and DIN EN 13501-4 of components and special components
can be assigned to the requirements of VdS CEA 4001, Tables R.6 and R.7.
The designations in square brackets correspond to the designations of fire resistance

classes as specified in DIN 4102.
Additionally, these Guidelines distinguish between components according to the fire

behaviour of their materials:
− components made of non-combustible materials;

− components made of combustible materials.
The designation of the European fire resistance classification of components does not
include any specifications on the fire behaviour of the materials of these components.
Therefore, the fire behaviour of the materials is taken into account in accordance with
DIN 4102-2 and determined in more detail in accordance with DIN 4102-1 or DIN EN
13501-1 (see Tables R.2 and R.3).
239
Bearing components
Requirements of Non-bearing Non-bearing False Independent
VdS CEA 4001 without with interior walls exterior walls floors false ceilings
enclosure1 enclosure1
E 30 (i→o)
R 30 REI 30 EI 30 and EI 30(a↔b)
fire-retardant EI 30-ef (i←o) REI 30
[F 30] [F 30] [F 30] [W 30] [F 30]
E 60 (i→o)
highly fire-retardant EI 60-ef (i←o)
[F 60] [F 60] [F 60] [W 60] [F 60]
E 90 (i→o)
fire-resistant EI 90-ef (i←o)
[F 90] [F 90] [F 90] [W 90] [F 90]
R120 REI 120

fire resistance
- - -
120 min.
[F 120] [F 120]
fire break wall - REI 90-M EI 90-M - - -
complex separation - REI 180-MGDV RE 180-MGDV

- - -
wall
1
For steel components coated with reactive fire protection systems, the indication IncSlow as specified in DIN EN
13501-2 is also required.
GDV
The requirements for the stability of complex separation walls during shock are specified in the Leaflet VdS
2234 published by Gesamtverband der Deutschen Versicherungswirtschaft e. V. (German Insurance Association
– GDV).
Note: Values in square brackets specify the fire resistance class in accordance with DIN 4102.
Table R.6: Fire resistance classes of components in accordance with DIN EN 13501-2 and their assignment to
the requirements of VdS CEA 4001
240
241
Annex S
Combustion Heat of Insulating Materials of Cables
and Wires (acc. VdS 2134)
S.1 General
The fire load is determined in accordance with the following tables specifying the
combustion heat of insulating materials of electrical cables and wires per running metre.
The combustion heat values have been agreed in a workgroup with the specialist
association “Cables and insulated wires” of the Zentralverband der Elektrotechnischen
Industrie e.V. (ZVEI – German electrical and electronics industry association) and foreign
manufacturers.
Cables and wires of different brands with the same designations can have different
proportions of insulating material. The combustion heat of halogenated and halogen-free
cables and wires with improved resistance in the case of fire is almost identical. However,
halogen-free cables and wires with improved resistance in the case of fire mainly have
the following advantages:
− low-smoke combustion, minor impairment of escape routes and of fire fighting

operations and minor contamination of rooms and their contents;
− lower flammability, after removal of ignition source cables and wires stop burning
within few seconds, whereas cables and wires with PVC or VPE insulation keep
burning after removal of ignition source
− minor fire spread due to more favourable fire behaviour
S.2 Application
The combustion heat can be the basis for calculating the fire load in accordance with VdS
CEA 4001 Cl. 4.1.1 n).
They are also an appropriate guidance for calculations in accordance with DIN 4102-4
“Fire behaviour of building materials and building components”, Cl. 6.5.1.21.
S.3 Application of tables

The cables and wires are distinguished according to:
− construction types;
− insulating materials;
− halogenated;
− halogen-free;
− nominal cross section of the conductors;
− number of conductors.
Depending on the form and type of construction, different quantities of insulating material
are required. In Table 1 the most current cable and performance types are listed,
specifying their cross sections and number of conductors.
242
Note:
The values can be converted as follows:
− 1 MJ/m2 corresponds to 0,278 kWh/m2
− 1 kWh/m2 corresponds to 3,6 MJ/m2
1
Cl. 6.5.1.2: The specifications of 6.5 do not apply to a fire load of the false ceiling area, therefore they do not
apply to a classification of the false ceilings in case of a fire load from above.
Therefore, the specifications imply that there are no combustible materials in the false ceiling area between
the raw and the false ceiling, except for the parts belonging to the false ceiling construction.
Cable insulations or materials whose fire load is evenly spread and < 7 kWh/m² are also considered unobject-
ionable.
In case of cable bundles, pipe insulations, wires, insulation layers etc. consisting of components of material
class B with a fire load > 7 kWh/m², or in case the false ceiling with fire load from above is to be classified in a
fire resistance class, the suitability of the false ceilings shall be verified by tests in accordance with DIN 4102-
2 : 1977-09, Cl. 4.1, 6.2.2.5 and 7.2.1.
243
Dimensions of cables and Design of cables and wires

wires halogenated halogen-free
Number of conductors and NYCY/
nominal cross section NYM NYY NHXHX NHXCHX
NYCWY
n mm² n mm² mm² kWh/m
1 x 1,5 0,17
1 x 2,5 0,22 0,22 0,22
1x 4 0,25 0,33 0,28
1x 6 0,28 0,33 0,28
1 x 10 0,36 0,33 0,28
1 x 16 0,42 0,42 0,39
1 x 25 0,58 0,58 0,53
1 x 35 0,67 0,58
1 x 50 0,81 0,69
1 x 70 0,92 0,81
1 x 95 1,17 1,03
1 x 120 1,31 1,14
1 x 150 1,58 1,39
2 x 1,5 0,42 0,69 0,69
2 x 2,5 0,53 0,78 0,78
2x 4 0,67 1,00 0,89
2x 6 0,75 1,11 1,00
2 x 10 1,17 1,31 1,19
3 x 1,5 0,44 0,75 0,78
3 x 2,5 0,58 0,83 0,86
3x 4 0,72 1,08 1,00
3x 6 0,92 1,22 1,08
3 x 10 1,28 1,42 1,28
3 x 16 1,53 1,69 1,53
3 x 25 2,39 2,47 2,25
3 x 35 2,78 2,14 2,56
3 x 50 2,60 3,19
3 x 70 3,08 3,94
3 x 95 4,06 5,14
3 x 120 4,47 5,89
3 x 150 5,42 7,25
4 x 1,5 3 x 1,5/1,5 0,53 0,83 0,78 0,89 0,78
4 x 2,5 3 x 2,5/2,5 0,67 0,94 0,86 1,00 0,89
4x 4 3 x 4/4 0,92 1,25 1,11 1,14 1,00
4x 6 3 x 6/6 1,08 1,42 1,25 1,28 1,11
4 x 10 3 x 10/10 1,50 1,67 1,47 1,50 1,33
244

NYCWY
4 x 16 3 x 16/10 1,86 2.03 1,75 1,86 1,58
3 x 16/16 1,75 1,58
4 x 25 2,89 2,89 2,64
3 x 25/16 2,67 2,53 2,42 2,31
3 x 25/25 2,53 2,31
4 x 35 3,28 2,61 3,00
3 x 35/16 2,67 2,22 2,69 2,61
3 x 35/35 2,22 2,61
4 x 50 3,31 3,92
3 x 50/25 3,31 2,78 3,53 3,33
3 x 50/50 2,78 3,33
4 x 70 4,08 4,81
3 x 70/35 4,06 3,28 4,31 4,11
3 x 70/70 3,28 4,11
4 x 95 5,11 6,25
3 x 95/50 5,19 4,28 5,58 5,33
3 x 95/95 4,28 5,33
4 x 120 5,69 7,14
3 x 120/70 5,81 4,72 6,58 6,11
3 x 120/120 4,72 6,11
4 x 150 6,97 7,14
3 x 150/70 7,03 5,72 7,64 7,50
3 x 150/150 5,72 7,50
5 x 1,5 4 x 1,5/1,5 0,58 0,94 0,86 1,03 0,89
5 x 2,5 4 x 2,5/2,5 0,75 1,08 0,97 1,14 1,03
5x 4 4 x 4/4 1,11 1,44 1,28 1,31 1,17
5x 6 4 x 6/6 1,28 1,64 1,44 1,47 1,31
5 x 10 4 x 10/10 1,83 2,00 1,69 1,83 1,53
5 x 16 4 x 16/16 2,31 2,39 2,08 2,17 1,89
5 x 25 4 x 25/16 3,42 3,42 2,92 3,14 2,69
4 x 35/16 2,67 3,06
4 x 50/25 3,44 4,00
4 x 70/35 4,17 4,89
4 x 95/50 5,33 6,44
4 x 120/70 5,94 7,36
245

NYCWY
4 x 150/70 7,22 8,97
6 x 1,5 0,67
7 x 1,5 0,67 1,08 1,17
7 x 2,5 1,22 1,31
7x 4 1,67 1,50
12 x 1,5 1,56 1,69
12 x 2,5 1,78 2,00
12 x 4 2,53 2,31
19 x 1,5 2,06 2,36
19 x 2,5 2,44 2,69
19 x 4 3,42 3,14
24 x 1,5 2,56 2,86
24 x 2,5 2,94 3,28
24 x 4 4,33 3,97
37 x 1,5 3,39 3,92
37 x 2,5 4,00 4,69
37 x 4 6,03 5,53
Table S.1: Combustion heat of cables and wires with nominal voltages up to 1000V
246
Dimensions of wires Construction type of wires

halogenated halogen-free
Number of conductors & nominal I-YY Bd IE-Y(ST) Y I-HH Bd IE-H(ST) H
diameter Bd Bd
n n mm kWh/m
2x 2x 0,6 0,11 0,22
4x 2x 0,6 0,17 0,33
6x 2x 0,6 0,22 0,39
10 x 2x 0,6 0,28 0,53
16 x 2x 0,6 0,39 0,81
20 x 2x 0,6 0,44 0,97
24 x 2x 0,6 0,50 1,11
30 x 2x 0,6 0,67 1,36
40 x 2x 0,6 0,81 1,72
50 x 2x 0,6 0,94 2,00
60 x 2x 0,6 1,17 2,39
80 x 2x 0,6 1,42 3,06
100 x 2x 0,6 1,69 3,72
2x 2x 0,8 0,19 0,28
4x 2x 0,8 0,28 0,39
8x 2x 0,8 0,42 0,58
12 x 2x 0,8 0,58 0,86
16 x 2x 0,8 0,72
20 x 2x 0,8 0,83 1,17
24 x 2x 0,8 0,94
28 x 2x 0,8 1,17
32 x 2x 0,8 1,28 1,78
36 x 2x 0,8 1,39
40 x 2x 0,8 1,50 2,08
44 x 2x 0,8 1,61
48 x 2x 0,8 1,83
52 x 2x 0,8 1,94
56 x 2x 0,8 2,06
60 x 2x 0,8 2,14
64 x 2x 0,8 2,25
68 x 2x 0,8 2,36
72 x 2x 0,8 2,47
76 x 2x 0,8 2,72
80 x 2x 0,8 2,83
Table S.2: Combustion heat of wires for telecommunication and data processing systems
247
Dimensions of cables Design of cables

halogenated halogen-free
Number of conductors &
NA2xSEY NYSEY
nominal cross section
n mm² mm² kWh/m
3 x 35/16 10,28 10,56
3 x 50/16 11,67 11,67
3 x 70/16 13,06 12,78
3 x 95/16 14,72 14,72
3 x 120/16 16,68 16,12
Table S.3: Combustion heat of cables with nominal voltages exceeding 1000V
Annex SL
Extinguishing support systems
Additional regulations to the CEA sprinkler

guidelines for achieving Class 3 of the VdS
classification model for sprinkler systems
Contents
SL.1 Scope................................................................................................................... 249

SL.2 Installer................................................................................................................ 249
SL.3 Separation ........................................................................................................... 249
SL.4 Rating basis ........................................................................................................ 249
SL.5 Water supply ....................................................................................................... 250
SL.6 Operating time .................................................................................................... 251
SL.7 Power supply ...................................................................................................... 251
SL.8 Sprinklers ............................................................................................................ 251
SL.9 Alarm ................................................................................................................... 251
248
SL.1 Scope
As extinguishing support systems are designed only for bridging the time between an
alarm and the beginning of the fire fighting operations, these systems do not fulfil the
requirements set to water extinguishing systems (e.g. sprinkler systems) in general.
Agreements shall be made with authorities and loss insurers as to whether extinguishing
support systems are appropriate to ensure adequate protection of life and property.
Racks with intermediate sprinklers are permitted up to a height at which the required
design density of ceiling sprinklers alone does not exceed 10 mm/min.
SL.2 Installer
Extinguishing support systems shall be installed only by installers approved for the
assembly of sprinkler systems. Any components of extinguishing support systems shall
be approved according to the list in Annex I.
SL.3 Separation
Extinguishing support systems of configuration levels 2 and 3 shall be separated from
unprotected areas according to Table SL.01.
Configuration level Type of separation

2 at least fire-retardant and
made of non-combustible
materials
3 at least fire-resistant and
made of non-combustible
materials
Table SL.01: Separations
SL.4 Rating basis

SL.4.1 General
The pipework shall be dimensioned according to Annex G using the data from Clauses 6
and 11 so that the extinguishing support systems may also be extended to sprinkler
systems.
Note: The rating basis according to Clauses 6 and 11 for dimensioning the pipework shall
be used to enable an extension of the system without modifying the pipework.
Unless otherwise stated in this Annex, all aforementioned clauses of these Guidelines
apply analogously. The design criteria which are reduced for extinguishing support
systems refer to the number of water sources, the extinguishing water quantity and the
operating times.
Note: Extinguishing support systems are designed such that the operator is able to
extend the system to a higher configuration level at all times.
Where dry pipe systems have to be installed, water shall be discharged not later than
30 s after opening the test facility at the end of the pipework. This may be achieved e.g.
by installing accelerators.
249
SL.4.2 Design density

In hazards protected by extinguishing support systems, the required design density
according to Cl. 6 shall not exceed the following values:
− 5 mm/min in configuration level 1

− 7,5 mm/min in configuration level 2
− 10 mm/min in configuration level 3
SL.5 Water supply

SL.5.1 Water sources
Water sources may be:
− pressure tanks;
− elevated private reservoirs;
− water mains;
− pump systems.
The minimum water volume of pressure tanks shall be 7,5 m³ for LH hazards and 15 m³
in all other cases.
Note: For further extensions of the system it is important to note that a larger pressure
tank may be required. An immediate investment in a larger tank may reduce
consequential costs for any further configuration levels.
A fire department supply connection shall be provided.
The operating time of the pressure tank shall be calculated based on the arithmetic mean
of initial and end pressure.
For reducing the water rate throttle sections ≥ DN 40 may be installed. The flow velocity
in the throttle section shall not exceed 20 m/s.
The power supply of pipe separators shall be backed up.
The minimum effective volume of reduced capacity tanks shall be 5 m³ for configuration
level 1, 10 m³ for configuration level 2 and 20 m³ for configuration level 3. The effective
volume of the reduced capacity tanks may be added to the total water volume.
Note: For a further extension of the system Clause 6 should be adhered to. An immediate
investment in a larger tank may reduce consequential costs for any further configuration
levels.
SL.5.2 Areas of operation

The water supply of extinguishing support systems shall be dimensioned such that the
size of the areas of operation at least complies with the following specifications:
250
Fire hazard Configuration level 11) Configuration level 2 Configuration level 3

(5 sprinklers min.)
LH 50 m² 60 m² 72 m²
OH1 50 m² 60 m² 72 m²
OH2 50 m² 72 m² (50% of the area of 101 m² (70% of the area of
operation acc. Cl. 6) operation acc. Cl. 6)
OH3 80 m² 108 m² (50% of the area 151 m² (70% of the area of
of operation acc. Cl. 6) operation acc. Cl. 6)
OH4 125 m² 180 m² (50% of the area 252 m² (70% of the area of
HHP1 ²) - 130 m² (50% of the area 182 m² (70% of the area of
HHP2 ²) - - 182 m² (70% of the area of
operation acc. Cl. 6)
HHS1 ²) ³) + - - 182 m² (70% of the area of
HHS 2 ²) ³) operation acc. Cl. 6)
(no plastics)
1) Basis shall be either
– the area of operation of 5 sprinklers or
– the value specified in the Table,
– whichever is the greater.
2) In the case of dry pipe systems the area shall be increased by 25%.
3) The design density for the appropriate storage height and type of storage shall be determined acc. Cl. 6.
Table SL.02: Areas of operation of extinguishing support systems according to

configuration level
SL.6 Operating time

The operating time of the extinguishing support system shall be:
− 30 min in configuration level 1

− 30 min in configuration level 2
− 30 min for LH and OH in configuration level 3
− 40 min for HHP and HHS in configuration level 3
SL.7 Power supply

Power supplies may be:
− public electrical mains;

− private power generators;
− diesel engines.
SL.8 Sprinklers
“Quick” or “Special” response sprinklers shall be used in extinguishing support systems.
Ceiling sprinklers shall have the same or a slower response sensitivity than sprinklers at
intermediate levels. In dry pipe systems “Special” response sprinklers shall be used.
SL.9 Alarm
Extinguishing support systems shall have an audible alarm and an electrical alarm
transmission to a permanently manned location (fire brigade).
251
Annex Z
Notification of installation for sprinkler systems
The appropriate form of the notification of installation is included in the Guidelines for the
approval of installers for fire extinguishing systems.
252

VDS Cea 4001en2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

VDS Cea 4001en2010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VDS Cea 4001en2010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VdS CEA

VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems 4001en

Planning and Installation

VdS CEA 4001en : 2010-11 (04)

Amsterdamer Str. 172-174

Copyright by VdS Schadenverhütung GmbH. All rights reserved.

VdS CEA Guidelines for Sprinkler Systems

Planning and Installation

8 Choice of water supply ........................................................................................ 46

13.3 Ring main valves .............................................................................................. 117

Annex A Classification of Hazards.............................................................................. 155

K.11 Recycling plants for plastic packaging material................................................ 207

0.1 Application of the VdS CEA Guidelines

0.2 Classification system for sprinkler systems

The classification of sprinkler systems is specified in Table 0.01:

Sprinkler systems Extinguishing

Table 0.01: Classification of sprinkler systems

0.3 Contents of these Guidelines

The requirements to be fulfilled by a sprinkler system of Class 1 are highlighted

Additional requirements to be fulfilled by sprinkler systems of Class 1.

On certain issues the CEA Specifications require amendments in order to ensure a

It covers the classification of hazards, provision of water supplies, components to be

The requirements concerning water supplies may be applicable as guidance, to be used

These Guidelines do not deal with water spray systems.

An evaluation of sprinkler protection shall also be based on further aspects, such as

It is essential that sprinkler systems should be properly maintained by VdS-approved

The sprinklers operate at predetermined temperatures to discharge water over the

Figure 1.01: Main elements of a sprinkler installation

If local requirements make sub-contracting necessary such as installation of electrical

1.4.3 Periodical inspections

1.4.4 Responsible person

The operator shall ensure that:

− the installation conforms to these Guidelines at all times;

1.5 Normative references

− DIN 1045 Concrete, reinforced and prestressed concrete structures

− R 1.1.1 Pressure pipes made of PVC-U with quality mark of “Gütegemeinschaft

AFFF (aqueous film forming foam)

Aqueous film forming foam concentrate based on fluorine surfactants.

AFFF/AR (alcohol resistant)

alarm test valve

alarm valve, alternate

An alarm valve suitable for a wet, dry or alternate installation.

alarm valve, dry

alarm valve, pre-action

An alarm valve suitable for a pre-action installation.

alarm valve station

alarm valve, wet

An alarm valve suitable for a wet installation.

area of operation, hydraulically most favourable

area of operation, hydraulically most unfavourable

balanced pressure proportioning

A pipe feeding sprinklers either directly or via arm pipes.

Designation for the combustibility of building materials and materials, characteristics of

composite pipe system

A sealed sprinkler mounted on a pressurised pipeline used to control a deluge valve.

distribution pipe spur

double tree arrangement

Pipe arrangement with branch pipes on both sides of a distribution pipe.